Ford 2015 Transit Owners Manual

2015-10-23

: Ford Ford-2015-Ford-Transit-Owners-Manual-815548 ford-2015-ford-transit-owners-manual-815548 ford pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 467

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2015 TRANSIT Owner’s Manual

fordowner.com

ford.ca

October 2014
Third Printing
Owner’s Manual
Transit
Litho in U.S.A.

FK3J 19A321 AB

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2014
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 03/2014 20140915160737

Table of Contents
Introduction

Keys and Remote Controls

About This Manual...........................................7
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
Data Recording..................................................9
California Proposition 65.............................10
Perchlorate........................................................10
Ford Credit.........................................................10
Replacement Parts
Recommendation......................................10
Special Notices.................................................11
Mobile Communications
Equipment......................................................11
Export Unique Options...................................11

Principle of Operation..................................43
General Information on Radio
Frequencies..................................................43
Remote Control..............................................43
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control...........................................................45

MyKey™
Principle of Operation..................................46
Creating a MyKey............................................47
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................48
Checking MyKey System Status..............49
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems.........................................................50
MyKey Troubleshooting................................51

Child Safety
General Information.......................................13
Installing Child Seats.....................................14
Booster Seats..................................................22
Child Seat Positioning..................................24
Child Safety Locks..........................................25

Locks
Locking and Unlocking.................................53

Security
Passive Anti-Theft System........................58
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................59

Safety Belts
Principle of Operation..................................26
Fastening the Safety Belts..........................27
Safety Belt Height Adjustment.................29
Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime.............................................................29
Safety Belt Minder.........................................30
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance.................................................31

Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................60
Audio Control - Vehicles Without:
Touchscreen Display................................60
Audio Control - Vehicles With:
Touchscreen Display..................................61
Voice Control - Vehicles Without:
Touchscreen Display..................................61
Voice Control - Vehicles With:
Touchscreen Display..................................61
Cruise Control..................................................62
Information Display Control.......................62

Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation...................................32
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................33
Side Airbags.....................................................39
Safety Canopy™............................................40
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.........41
Airbag Disposal...............................................42

Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers.........................................63
Autowipers.......................................................63
Windshield Washers.....................................64

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Table of Contents
Power Seats.....................................................96
Rear Seats.........................................................97

Lighting
General Information......................................65
Lighting Control..............................................65
Autolamps........................................................66
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................67
Daytime Running Lamps.............................67
Direction Indicators.......................................68
Interior Lamps.................................................68

Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points.................................101
Cigar Lighter...................................................102

Storage Compartments
Cup Holders....................................................103
Overhead Console.......................................103
Bottle Holder..................................................103

Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows.............................................69
Exterior Mirrors................................................70
Interior Mirror...................................................70
Rear Quarter Windows..................................71

Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information....................................104
Ignition Switch..............................................104
Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................104
Starting a Diesel Engine............................105
Diesel Particulate Filter..............................106
Switching Off the Engine...........................107
Engine Block Heater....................................107

Instrument Cluster
Gauges................................................................72
Warning Lamps and Indicators.................74
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............76

Information Displays
General Information......................................78
Trip Computer..................................................81
Personalized Settings...................................82
Information Messages.................................83

Fuel and Refueling

Principle of Operation..................................88
Air Vents............................................................88
Manual Climate Control..............................89
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................90
Rear Passenger Climate Controls.............91
Heated Windows and Mirrors....................92

Safety Precautions......................................109
Fuel Quality - Gasoline................................110
Fuel Quality - Diesel......................................111
Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................113
Running Out of Fuel......................................113
Catalytic Converter.......................................114
Selective Catalytic Reduction
System...........................................................115
Refueling...........................................................118
Fuel Consumption.......................................120
Emission Control System...........................122

Seats

Transmission

Sitting in the Correct Position...................93
Head Restraints..............................................93
Manual Seats..................................................94

Brakes

Climate Control

Automatic Transmission............................132

General Information....................................136
2

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Table of Contents
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes...........................................................136
Parking Brake..................................................137

Reduced Engine Performance.................172
Economical Driving.......................................172
Cold Weather Precautions.........................173
Driving Through Water................................173
Floor Mats........................................................173

Traction Control
Principle of Operation.................................138
Using Traction Control................................138

Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance...................................175
Hazard Warning Flashers...........................176
Fuel Shutoff....................................................176
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................177
Post-Crash Alert System...........................179

Stability Control
Principle of Operation................................140
Using Stability Control.................................141

Parking Aids
Principle of Operation.................................142
Parking Aid......................................................142
Rear View Camera........................................143

Customer Assistance

Load Carrying

Getting the Services You Need...............180
In California (U.S. Only)..............................181
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)......................182
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)........................182
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................183
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.....................................................184
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only).............................................................184
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only).............................................................185

Load Retaining Fixtures..............................152
Load Limit........................................................152

Fuses

Towing

Fuse Box Locations.....................................186
Fuse Specification Chart...........................187
Changing a Fuse...........................................198

Cruise Control
Principle of Operation................................146
Using Cruise Control...................................146

Driving Aids
Speed Limiter................................................148
Driver Alert......................................................148
Lane Keeping System.................................149

Towing a Trailer.............................................160
Trailer Sway Control.....................................161
Recommended Towing Weights.............161
Essential Towing Checks...........................163
Transporting the Vehicle...........................169
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......170

Maintenance
General Information..................................200
Opening and Closing the Hood.............200
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L....................201
Under Hood Overview - 3.7L...................202
Under Hood Overview - 3.2L Power
Stroke Diesel.............................................203

Driving Hints
Breaking-In......................................................172
3

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Table of Contents
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.5L.........................204
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.7L..........................204
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.2L Power Stroke
Diesel...........................................................204
Engine Oil Check..........................................204
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil
Filter.............................................................205
Oil Change Indicator Reset......................206
Engine Coolant Check...............................206
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check...........................................................209
Brake Fluid Check.........................................210
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................210
Washer Fluid Check.....................................210
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap........210
Fuel Filter - Gasoline....................................212
Changing the 12V Battery..........................213
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................215
Changing the Wiper Blades......................215
Adjusting the Headlamps..........................215
Removing a Headlamp...............................216
Changing a Bulb............................................217
Bulb Specification Chart............................221
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 3.5L.....223
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 3.7L......224
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 3.2L
Power Stroke Diesel................................225

Wheels and Tires
General Information...................................233
Tire Care..........................................................234
Using Winter Tires.......................................250
Using Snow Chains......................................251
Tire Pressure Monitoring System............251
Changing a Road Wheel...........................256
Lug Nuts..........................................................264

Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications - 3.5L....................265
Engine Specifications - 3.7L....................265
Engine Specifications - 3.2L Power
Stroke Diesel.............................................266
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L..............................267
Motorcraft Parts - 3.7L..............................268
Motorcraft Parts - 3.2L Power Stroke
Diesel...........................................................269
Vehicle Identification Number................270
Vehicle Certification Label.......................270
Transmission Code Designation..............271
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L......271
Capacities and Specifications - 3.7L.....274
Capacities and Specifications - 3.2L
Power Stroke Diesel................................278

Audio System

Vehicle Care

General Information...................................282
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM......283
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/
FM/CD.........................................................286
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC............................................................288
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Satellite Radio............................290
Digital Radio..................................................292
Satellite Radio..............................................294
Audio Input Jack...........................................297
USB Port..........................................................297
Media Hub......................................................298

Cleaning Products........................................227
Cleaning the Exterior...................................227
Waxing.............................................................228
Cleaning the Engine....................................228
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades..........................................................229
Cleaning the Interior...................................229
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.......................229
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............230
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................230
Vehicle Storage..............................................231
4

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Table of Contents
Audio Troubleshooting..............................299

SYNC™
General Information..................................300
Using Voice Recognition...........................302
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone...........304
SYNC™ Applications and Services.......318
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player...........................................................329
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................339

MyFord Touch™
General Information...................................348
Settings...........................................................356
Entertainment..............................................369
Phone..............................................................388
Information....................................................395
Navigation......................................................405

Accessories
Accessories.....................................................414
Auxiliary Switches........................................415

Appendices
End User License Agreement..................416

Extended Service Plan
(ESP)
Extended Service Plan (ESP).................438

Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information.......440
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........443
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance.............................................445
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........448

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Introduction
Note: Either Ford Motor Company or an
authorized Ford dealer may have originally
sold this incomplete vehicle to a vehicle
modifier who upfitted it. As a result, some
of the options and features on this vehicle
may differ from what we describe in this
manual.

ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about it,
the greater the safety and pleasure you
will get from driving it.

This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.

WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any handheld device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

E154903

Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to your
vehicle.

Right-hand side

Left-hand side

Protecting the Environment
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.

Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so may appear different
to you on your vehicle. However, the
essential information in the illustrations is
always correct.

SYMBOLS GLOSSARY

Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.

These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.

Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of the
vehicle.

Safety alert

See Owner's Manual

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Introduction
Air conditioning system

Engine air filter

Anti-lock braking system

Engine coolant

Avoid smoking, flames or sparks

Engine coolant temperature

Battery

Engine oil

Battery acid

Explosive gas

Brake fluid - non petroleum
based

Fan warning

Brake system

Fasten safety belt

Cabin air filter

Front airbag

Check fuel cap

Front fog lamps

Child safety door lock or unlock

Fuel pump reset

Child seat lower anchor

Fuse compartment

Child seat tether anchor

Hazard warning flashers

Cruise control

Heated rear window

Do not open when hot

Heated windshield

E162384

E71340

Interior luggage compartment
release

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Introduction
Jack

Shield the eyes
E167012

Stability control

Keep out of reach of children
E138639

E161353

Windshield wash and wipe

Lighting control

Low tire pressure warning

DATA RECORDING
Maintain correct fluid level

A large number of electronic components
of your vehicle contain data storage
modules temporarily or permanently
storing technical data about the condition
of the vehicle, events and errors.

Note operating instructions

In general, this technical information
documents the condition of parts,
modules, systems or the environment:
• Operating conditions of system
components (e.g. filling levels).
• Status messages of the vehicle and its
individual components (e.g. number of
wheel revolutions/rotational speed,
deceleration, lateral acceleration).
• Malfunction and defects in important
system components (e.g. lighting and
brake system).
• Vehicle reactions in particular driving
situations (e.g. inflation of an airbag,
activation of the stability regulation
system).
• Environmental conditions (e.g.
temperature).

Panic alarm

Parking aid
E139213

Parking brake

Power steering fluid

Power windows front/rear

Power window lockout

These data are exclusively technical and
help identification and correction of errors
as well as optimisation of vehicle
functions. Motion profiles indicating
travelled routes cannot be created with
these data.

Service engine soon

Side airbag

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Introduction
If services are used (e.g. repair works,
service processes, warranty cases, quality
assurance), employees of the service
network (including manufacturers) are
able to read out this technical information
from the event and error data storage
modules using special diagnostic devices.
If required, you will receive further
information. After an error has been
corrected, these data are deleted from the
error storage module or they are constantly
overwritten.

Web Address

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate

FORD CREDIT
(U.S. Only)
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.

When using the vehicle, situations may
occur in which these technical data related
to other information (accident report,
damages on the vehicle, witness
statements etc.) may be associated with
a specific person - possibly, with the
assistance of an expert.

For your convenience we offer a number
of ways to contact us, as well as to help
manage your account.
Phone: 1-800-727-7000

Additional functions contractually agreed
upon with the client (e.g. vehicle location
in emergency cases) allow the
transmission of particular vehicle data
from the vehicle.

For more information regarding Ford Credit,
as well as to access Account Manager,
please go to www.fordcredit.com.

REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING

Your vehicle has been built to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.

Some constituents of engine
exhaust, certain vehicle components,
certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.

PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, safety belt
pretensioners and remote control batteries
may contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. For more information
visit:

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Introduction
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs

MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT

One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.

Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.

Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish,
structural integrity, corrosion protection
and dent resistance. During vehicle
development we validate these parts
deliver the intended level of protection as
a whole system. A great way to know for
sure you are getting this level of protection
is to use genuine Ford replacement
collision parts.

WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of the
failure of non-Ford parts may not be
covered by the Ford Warranty. For
additional information, refer to the terms
and conditions of the Ford Warranty.

EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
SPECIAL NOTICES

For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that

If converting or modifying your vehicle from
production specification, refer to the Body
and Equipment Mounting Manual at
www.etis.ford.com/fordservice.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Introduction
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for Export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Child Safety
GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNINGS
requirements of law. Ford recommends
checking with a NHTSA Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and
consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and
is compatible with and properly installed
in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting
station and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll
free at 1-888-327-4236 or go to
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada,
check with your local St. John Ambulance
office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial
ministry of transportation, locate your local
St. John Ambulance office by searching for
St. John Ambulance on the internet, or
Transport Canada at 1-800-333-0371
(http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
restrain children in safety seats made
especially for their height, age, and weight
may result in an increased risk of serious
injury or death to your child.

See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is
secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
All children are shaped differently.
The recommendations for safety
restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds
from National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child

Child size, height, weight, or age

Recommended restraint
type

Infants or
toddlers

Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).

Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).

Small children

Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four
and less than age 12, and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).

Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.

Larger children Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80
lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by child restraint manufacturer).

•

You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements about
the safety of children in your vehicle.
When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position.

Use a vehicle safety belt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seat back
upright.

INSTALLING CHILD SEATS
Child Seats

E142594

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Child Safety
•

Use a child safety seat (sometimes called
an infant carrier, convertible seat, or
toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or
children weighing 40 pounds (18
kilograms) or less (generally age four or
younger).

•

Using Lap and Shoulder Belts

Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child seat will be installed in the upright
position.
Put the safety belt in the automatic
locking mode. See Step 5. Your vehicle
does not require the use of a locking
clip.

Perform the following steps when
installing the child seat with combination
lap and shoulder belts:

WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.

Note: Although the child seat illustrated is
a forward facing child seat, the steps are
the same for installing a rear facing child
seat.

Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Children 12 and under
should be correctly restrained in the
rear seat whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be correctly restrained.

E142528

When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for
that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the correct
buckle until you hear a distinct click
and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue
is securely fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child
seat and the release button, to prevent
accidental unbuckling.

Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.

E142529

2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and
then grasp the shoulder belt and lap
belt together.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Child Safety

E142530

E142875

3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.

5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until all of the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.

E142531

4. Insert the belt tongue into the correct
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a distinct click and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.

E142533

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Child Safety
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH)

8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that will exist once the extra
weight of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
correct snugness of the child seat to
your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will additionally help
to remove remaining slack from the
belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).

WARNINGS
Never attach two child safety seats
to the same anchor. In a crash, one
anchor may not be strong enough to
hold two child safety seat attachments
and may break, causing serious injury or
death.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle
assemblies or LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be correctly restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
located where seat back and seat cushion
meet (called the seat bight) and one top
tether anchor located behind that seating
position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need
to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
however the safety belt can still be used
to attach the child seat. For forward-facing
child seats, the top tether strap must also
be attached to the correct top tether
anchor, if a top tether strap has been
provided with your child seat.

E142534

10.

Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement
for correct installation.

Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is correctly installed. In Canada,
check with your local St. John Ambulance
office for referral to a Certified Passenger
Seat Technician.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Child Safety

E184881

E178553

Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child seat installation at the seating
positions marked with the child seat
symbol.

E178551

E177639

E178552

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Child Safety
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear
section of the rear seat between the
cushion and seat back above the symbols
as shown. Follow the child seat
manufacturer's instructions to correctly
install a child seat with LATCH
attachments. Follow the instructions on
attaching child safety seats with tether
straps.

Combining Safety Belt and LATCH
Lower Anchors for Attaching Child
Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the
safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors
may be attached first, provided a correct
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
seat.

Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child seat only to the anchors shown.

Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety
seats include a tether strap
which extends from the back of
the child safety seat and hooks to an
anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.

Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center
Seating Use)
WARNING
The standardized spacing for LATCH
lower anchors is 11 inches (28
centimeters) center to center. Do not
use LATCH lower anchors for the center
seating position unless the child seat
manufacturer's instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in your vehicle.

Contact the manufacturer of your child
seat for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your safety seat
does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in your vehicle.
Once the child safety seat has been
installed using either the safety belt, the
lower anchors of the LATCH system, or
both, you can attach the top tether strap.

Do not attach a child seat to any lower
anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached
to that anchor.
Each time you use the safety seat, check
that the seat is correctly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child seat from side to
side and forward and back where it is
secured to your vehicle. The seat should
move less than one inch when you do this
for a correct installation.

The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view):

If the safety seat is not anchored correctly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.

E184881

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Child Safety

E178553

E178551

Perform the following steps to install a
child safety seat with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child seat off
your vehicle seat cushion when the child is
seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat.
Keeping the child seat just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
Front Passenger Seating Position
1.

Adjust the front passenger seat fully
forward.
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat, under the
head restraint and between the head
restraint posts.

E178552

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Child Safety
4. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
5. Adjust the front passenger seat full
rearward.
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer's
instructions. If your child restraint
system is equipped with a tether strap,
and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, Ford also
recommends its use.
Rear Seats
1.

Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat, under the
head restraint and between the head
restraint posts.

E178096

3. Locate the correct anchor on the back
panel of the rear seat for the selected
seating position. The anchors are
labeled with the tether strap symbol
and are partially covered by the gap
panel. Pull the panel back to fully
expose the anchors.

E177640

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Child Safety
2. Locate the correct anchor on the back
panel of the rear seat for the selected
seating position. The anchors are
labeled with the tether strap symbol
and are partially covered by the gap
panel. Pull the panel back to fully
expose the anchors.
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer's
instructions. If your child restraint
system is equipped with a tether strap,
and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, Ford also
recommends its use.

E142595

•

•
•

BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING

•

Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.

•

Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
Can the child sit without slouching?
Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?

Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.

Types of Booster Seats
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and
80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to
100 pounds (45 kilograms) if
recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer). Many state and provincial
laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,
or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
E68924

Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:

•

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Backless booster seats

Child Safety
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
back or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back or
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts,
or consider using a high back booster seat.

•

High back booster seats

If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.

E70710

E142596

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Child Safety

E142597

WARNINGS
warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.

If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any item
thicker than this under the booster seat.
Check with the booster seat
manufacturer's instructions.

Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash,
which may result in serious injury or death.

CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the vehicle seat
upon which the child seat is installed all
the way back. When possible, all children
age 12 and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained
properly in a rear seating position, properly
restrain the largest child in the front seat.

Never use pillows, books, or towels
to boost a child. They can slide
around and increase the likelihood
of injury or death in a crash.
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects
may become projectiles in a crash or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk
of serious injury.
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.

Always carefully follow the
instructions and warnings provided
by the manufacturer of any child
restraint to determine if the restraint device
is appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and

To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Child Safety

Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Restraint
type

Combined
weight of
child and
child
restraint
seat

Use any attachment method as indicated below by X
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)

LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)

Rear facing Up to 65 lb
child seat
(29.5 kg)

Safety belt Safety belt Safety belt
and LATCH
only
and top
(lower
tether
anchors
anchor
and top
tether
anchor)

Rear facing Over 65 lb
child seat
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat

Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)

Forward
facing
child seat

Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)

X
X

Note: The child seat must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
93).

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
WARNING
You cannot open the rear side door
from inside if you have put the child
safety lock on.

E176718

A child safety lock is on the rear side door.

Left-Hand Side
Turn it counterclockwise to switch the child
lock on and clockwise to switch it off.

Right-Hand Side
Turn it clockwise to switch the child lock
on and counterclockwise to switch it off.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Safety Belts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGS
When possible, all children 12 years
old and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position.
Failure to follow this could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.

WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with the seat
backrest upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.

Safety belts and seats can become
hot in a vehicle that has been closed
up in sunny weather; they could burn
a small child. Check seat covers and
buckles before you place a child anywhere
near them.

To reduce the risk of injury, make
sure children sit where they can be
properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash
which may result in serious injury or death.

Front and rear seat occupants,
including pregnant women, should
wear safety belts for optimum
protection in an accident.

All occupants of the vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.

All seating positions in this vehicle have
lap and shoulder safety belts. All
occupants of the vehicle should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system
is provided.

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a safety belt properly.

The safety belt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder safety belts.
• Shoulder safety belt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver safety
belt).
• Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
• Safety belt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific safety belt assembly
which is made up of one buckle and
one tongue that are designed to be used
as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never
swing the safety belt around your neck over
the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single
belt for more than one person.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

•

Safety belt warning light and chime.

•

Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.

Safety Belts
The safety belt pretensioners at the front
seating positions are designed to tighten
the safety belts when activated. In frontal
and near-frontal crashes, side crashes and
rollovers, the safety belt pretensioners may
be activated alone or, if the crash is of
sufficient severity, together with the front
airbags.

2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.

Using Safety Belts During
Pregnancy
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your seat
back upright and the safety belt
properly fastened. The lap portion of
the safety belt should fit snug and be
positioned low across the hips. The
shoulder portion of the safety belt should
be positioned across the chest. Pregnant
women should also follow this practice.
See the following figure.

FASTENING THE SAFETY
BELTS
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.

E142587

Insert the safety belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.

E170730

Pregnant women should always wear their
safety belt. The lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt should
be positioned low across the hips below
the belly and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt should be
positioned to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.

E142588

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Safety Belts
Safety Belt Locking Modes

Automatic Locking Mode

WARNINGS
After any vehicle crash, the safety
belt system at all passenger seating
positions must be checked by an
authorized dealer to verify that the
automatic locking retractor feature for
child seats is still functioning properly. In
addition, all safety belts should be checked
for proper function.

In this mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The safety belt
will still retract to remove any slack in the
shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode
is not available on the driver safety belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
This mode should be used any time a child
safety seat, except a booster, is installed
in passenger front or rear seating positions.
Children 12 years old and under should be
correctly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. See Child
Safety (page 13).

Safety belt and retractor assemblies
must be replaced if the safety belt
assembly automatic locking retractor
feature, or any other safety belt function
is not operating correctly when checked
by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace
the safety belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in a crash.

How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode

All safety belts in your vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver safety belt has the first type of
locking mode, and the front outboard
passenger and rear seat safety belts have
both types of locking modes described as
follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly
or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety
belts will lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.

E142591

Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire safety belt
is pulled out.
Allow the safety belt to retract. As the
safety belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now
in the automatic locking mode.

In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If
this occurs, let the safety belt retract
slightly and pull webbing out again in a
slow and controlled manner.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Safety Belts
How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and return the safety belt to
the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking
mode.

Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNING

Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the shoulder belt across the
torso.
If the safety belt is too short when fully
extended, a safety belt extension assembly
can be obtained from an authorized dealer.

E165022

1. Press the button.
2. Slide the height adjuster up or down.
3. Release the button and pull down on
the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.

Only use extensions manufactured by the
same supplier as the safety belt.
Manufacturer identification is located at
the end of the webbing on the label or the
retractor behind the trim. Only use an
extension if the safety belt is too short for
you when fully extended.

SAFETY BELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME

SAFETY BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT

This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver's safety belt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.

WARNING
Position the safety belt height
adjuster so that the safety belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
Failure to adjust the safety belt correctly
could reduce its effectiveness and increase
the risk of injury in a crash.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Safety Belts
Conditions of operation
If...

Then...

The driver's safety belt is not buckled
before the ignition switch is turned to the
on position...

The safety belt warning light illuminates 12 minutes and the warning chime sounds
4-8 seconds.

The driver's safety belt is buckled while the
indicator light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...

The safety belt warning light and warning
chime turn off.

The driver's safety belt is buckled before The safety belt warning light and indicator
the ignition switch is turned to the on posichime remain off.
tion...

SAFETY BELT MINDER
Belt-Minder®
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders by intermittently sounding a
chime and illuminating the safety belt
warning light when the driver seat is
occupied and the safety belt is unbuckled.
If...

Then...

The driver safety belt is buckled before the The Belt-Minder feature will not turn on.
ignition is switched on or less than two
minutes have elapsed since the ignition was
switched on.
The driver safety belt is not buckled when
the vehicle has reached at least 6 mph (9.7
km/h) and two minutes have elapsed since
the ignition was switched on.

The Belt-Minder feature is turned on - the
safety belt warning light illuminates and
the warning chime sounds for six seconds
every 25 seconds, repeating for about five
minutes or until the driver safety belt is
buckled.

The driver safety belt becomes unbuckled
for about one minute while the vehicle is
traveling at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and
more than two minutes have elapsed since
the ignition was switched on.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Safety Belts
Switching the Belt-Minder on and off

•

WARNING

•

While the system allows you to
switch it off, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being
safely belted and surviving a crash. We
recommend you leave the system
switched on. To reduce the risk of injury,
do not switch the system on or off while
driving your vehicle.

This will disable the feature if it is
currently enabled.
This will enable the feature if it is
currently disabled.

CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
seat safety belts to make sure there are no
nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary.
All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies
(slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt
height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder
belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child
safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and
attaching hardware, should be inspected
after a crash. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.

Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
The system can be switched on and off by
carrying out the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission selector lever is in
position park (P).
• The ignition is switched off.
• The driver safety belt is unbuckled.
1.

Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
engine.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about one minute). After
Step 2, wait an additional five seconds
before proceeding with Step 3. Once
Step 3 is started, the procedure must
be completed within 30 seconds.
3. Buckle then unbuckle the driver safety
belt three times at a moderate speed,
ending in the unbuckled state. After
Step 3, the safety belt warning light will
illuminate.
4. While the safety belt warning light is
illuminated, buckle then unbuckle the
driver safety belt. After Step 4, the
safety belt warning light will flash for
confirmation.

Ford Motor Company recommends that
all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles
involved in a crash be replaced. However,
if the crash was minor and an authorized
dealer finds that the belts do not show
damage and continue to operate properly,
they do not need to be replaced. Safety
belt assemblies not in use during a crash
should also be inspected and replaced if
either damage or improper operation is
noted.
Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle
Care (page 227).

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or
gently, and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is the greatest close
to the trim covering the airbag module.

Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.

All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.

The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (for example, baking soda)
that result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.

Always transport children 12 years
old and under in the back seat and
always properly use appropriate
child restraints. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Never place your arm over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or
other injuries.

While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.

Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint systems or its fuses as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Several airbag system components
get hot after inflation. Do not touch
them after inflation as this may result
in serious injury.

Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.

If the airbag has deployed, the airbag
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
Passenger Airbag On and Off
Switch (If Equipped)

DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS

WARNINGS
Even with Advanced Restraints
Systems, children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in a
rear seating position. Failure to follow this
could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.

WARNINGS
Never place your arm or any objects
over an airbag module. Placing your
arm over a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries. Objects placed on or over the
airbag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the airbag into
your face and torso causing serious injury.

The front passenger airbag is not
designed to offer protection to an
occupant in the center seating
position.

An airbag ON and OFF switch may
be installed in this vehicle. Before
driving, always look at the face of the
switch to be sure the switch is in the proper
position in accordance with these
instructions and warnings. Failure to put
the switch in a proper position can increase
the risk of serious injury or death in a crash.

E151127

The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.

E181532

The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
41).

High-series vehicles (if equipped)
The front passenger airbag on and off
switch has indicators that will illuminate,
indicating that the front passenger frontal
airbag is either on or off. The indicator lamp
is located on the radio.
Note: The passenger airbag status indicator
OFF and ON lamps will illuminate for a short
period of time when the ignition is first
turned on to confirm it is functional.
33

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Supplementary Restraints System

Switch position

Passenger airbag status
indicator

Passenger airbag

Off

OFF: Lit

Disabled

ON: Unlit
On

OFF: Unlit

Enabled

ON: Lit
WARNINGS
An infant in a rear-facing seat faces
a high risk of serious or fatal injuries
from a deploying passenger airbag.
Rear facing infant seats should never be
placed in the front seats, unless the
passenger airbag is turned off.

E170613

Low-series vehicles (if equipped)
The front passenger airbag on and off
switch has an indicator that will illuminate
and stay lit to remind you that the front
passenger frontal airbag is off. The
indicator lamp is located by the radio.
Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for
a short period of time when the ignition is
first turned on to confirm it is functional.
Turning the Passenger Airbag Off
WARNINGS
If the light fails to illuminate when
the passenger airbag switch is off
and the ignition is on, have the
passenger airbag switch serviced at your
authorized dealer immediately.
In order to avoid inadvertent
activation of the switch, always
remove the ignition key from the
passenger airbag on and off switch.

E181523

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
If your vehicle has rear seats, always
transport children who are 12 years
and under in the rear seat. Always
use safety belts and child restraints
correctly. Do not place a child in a rear
facing infant seat in the front seat unless
your vehicle is equipped with an airbag on
and off switch and the passenger airbag is
turned off. This is because the back of the
infant seat is too close to the inflating
airbag and the risk of a fatal injury to the
infant when the airbag inflates is
substantial.
E181522

If the pass airbag off light is
illuminated when the passenger
airbag switch is on and the ignition
is on, have the passenger airbag switch
serviced at your authorized dealer
immediately.

Insert the ignition key, turn the switch
to OFF and hold in OFF while removing
the key.
2. When the ignition is turned on, the pass
airbag off light illuminates briefly,
momentarily shuts off and then turns
back on. This indicates that the
passenger airbag is deactivated.

The passenger airbag remains off until you
turn it back on.

Turning the Passenger Airbag Back On
WARNINGS
The safety belts for the driver and
right front passenger seating
positions have been specifically
designed to function together with the
airbags in certain types of crashes. When
you turn off your airbag, you not only lose
the protection of the airbag, you also may
reduce the effectiveness of your safety belt
system, which was designed to work with
the airbag. If you are not a passenger who
meets the requirements stated in the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration or Transport Canada
deactivation criteria turning off the airbag
can increase the risk of serious injury or
death in a crash.

E181521

Insert the ignition key and turn the
switch to ON.
2. The pass airbag off light will briefly
illuminate when the ignition is turned
to on. This indicates that the passenger
airbag is operational.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
The passenger side airbag should always
be on (the pass airbag off light should not
be illuminated) unless the passenger
meets the requirements stated either in
Category 1, 2 or 3 of the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration or Transport
Canada deactivation criteria which follows.

National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Deactivation Criteria
(Excluding Canada)
WARNING
This vehicle has special energy
management safety belts for the
driver and right front passenger.
These particular belts are specifically
designed to work with airbags to help
reduce the risk of injury in a crash. The
energy management safety belt is
designed to give or release additional belt
webbing in some accidents to reduce
concentration of force on an occupant's
chest and reduce the risk of certain bone
fractures and injuries to underlying organs.
In a crash, if the airbag is turned off, this
energy management safety belt might
permit the person wearing the belt to move
forward enough to incur a serious or fatal
injury. The more severe the crash, and the
heavier the occupant, the greater the risk
is. Be sure the airbag is turned on for any
person who does not qualify under the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration deactivation criteria.

The vast majority of drivers and passengers
are much safer with an airbag than
without. To do their job and reduce the risk
of life threatening injuries, airbags must
open with great force, and this force can
pose a potentially deadly risk in some
situations, particularly when a front seat
passenger is not using the safety belt
correctly. The most effective way to reduce
the risk of unnecessary airbag injuries
without reducing the overall safety of your
vehicle is to make sure all passengers are
correctly restrained in the vehicle,
especially in the front seat. This provides
the protection of safety belts and permits
the airbags to provide the additional
protection they were designed to provide.
If you choose to deactivate your airbag,
you are losing the very significant risk
reducing benefits of the airbag and you are
also reducing the effectiveness of the
safety belts, because safety belts in
modern vehicles are designed to work as
a safety system with the airbags.

1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old)
must ride in the front seat because:
•
•

•

the vehicle has no rear seat;
the vehicle has a rear seat too small to
accommodate a rear-facing infant
seat; or
the infant has a medical condition
which, according to the infant's
physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front so that the
driver can constantly monitor the
child's condition.

2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must
ride in the front seat because:

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
•
•

•

Transport Canada Deactivation Criteria
(Canada Only)

the vehicle has no rear seat;
although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the
rear seat(s) whenever possible,
children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must
ride in the front because no space is
available in the rear seat(s) of the
vehicle; or
the child has a medical condition
which, according to the child's
physician, makes it necessary for the
child to ride in the front seat so that the
driver can constantly monitor the
child's condition.

WARNING
This vehicle has special energy
management safety belts for the
driver and right front passenger.
These particular belts are specifically
designed to work with airbags to help
reduce the risk of injury in a crash. The
energy management safety belt is
designed to give or release additional belt
webbing in some accidents to reduce
concentration of force on an occupant's
chest and reduce the risk of certain bone
fractures and injuries to underlying organs.
In a crash, if the airbag is turned off, this
energy management safety belt might
permit the person wearing the belt to move
forward enough to incur a serious or fatal
injury. The more severe the crash, and the
heavier the occupant, the greater the risk
is. Be sure the airbag is turned on for any
person who does not qualify under the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration deactivation criteria.

3. Medical condition. A passenger has a
medical condition which, according to his
or her physician:
•
•

causes the passenger airbag to pose a
special risk for the passenger;
makes the potential harm from the
passenger airbag in a crash greater
than the potential harm from turning
off the airbag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the
dashboard or windshield in a crash.

1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old)
must ride in the front seat because:
•
•

•

my vehicle has no rear seat;
the rear seat in my vehicle cannot
accommodate a rear-facing infant
seat;
the infant has a medical condition
which, according to the infant's
physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front seat so that
the driver can monitor the infant's
condition.

2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or
under must ride in the front seat because:

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
•
•

•

After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on safety belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. Properly seated occupants sit
upright, lean against the seat back, and
center themselves on the seat cushion,
with their feet comfortably extended on
the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
forward or sideways, or puts one or both
feet up, the chance of injury during a crash
is greatly increased.

my vehicle has no rear seat;
although children age 12 and under ride
in the rear seat whenever possible,
children age 12 and under have no
option but to sometimes ride in the
front seat because rear seat space is
insufficient;
the child has a medical condition that,
according to the child's physician,
makes it necessary for the child to ride
in the front seat so that the driver can
monitor the child's condition.

3. Medical condition: A passenger has a
medical condition that, according to his or
her physician:
•
•

Children and Airbags

poses a special risk for the passenger
if the airbag deploys; and
makes the potential harm from the
passenger airbag deployment greater
than the potential harm from turning
off the airbag and experiencing a crash
without the protection offered by the
airbag

WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.

Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration recommends a
minimum distance of at least 10
inches (25 centimeters) between an
occupant’s chest and the driver airbag
module.
E142846

To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.

Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
If two adults and a child occupy a Regular
Cab, properly restrain the child in the
center front unless doing so would interfere
with driving your vehicle. This provides lap
and shoulder belt protection for all
occupants, and airbag protection for the
adults. A child or infant properly restrained
in the center front seat should not incur
risk of serious injury from the airbags.

The side airbags are located on the
outboard side of the seatbacks of the front
seats. In certain sideways crashes, the
airbag on the side affected by the crash
will be inflated. The airbag was designed
to inflate between the door panel and
occupant to further enhance the protection
provided occupants in side impact crashes.

SIDE AIRBAGS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks
(of the front seats), or in front seat areas
that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.

E152533

The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are found
on your vehicle.
• Side airbags located inside the
seatback of the driver and front
passenger seats.

Do not use accessory seat covers.
The use of accessory seat covers
may prevent the deployment of the
side airbags and increase the risk of injury
in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the
seatback.

·Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 41).

Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the
seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag as you could be seriously injured or
killed. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.

The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.

If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The
side airbag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and serviced by
an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
The Safety Canopy will deploy during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side rail behind the
headliner and above each row of seats. In
certain sideways crashes or rollover events,
the Safety Canopy will be activated,
regardless of which seats are occupied.
The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate
between the side window area and
occupants to further enhance protection
provided in side impact crashes and
rollover events.

SAFETY CANOPY™ (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner
at the side rail that may come into
contact with a deploying curtain airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The safety canopy could injure you
as it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the safety canopy, its fuses,
the pillar trims, or the headliner on a
vehicle with a safety canopy as you could
be seriously injured or killed. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
All occupants of your vehicle
including the driver should always
wear their safety belts even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system and
safety canopy are provided. Failure to wear
your safety belt correctly could seriously
increase the risk of personal injury or death.

E75004

The system consists of the following:
• Safety canopy airbags located above
the trim panels over the front and rear
side windows identified by a label or
wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow safety canopy
deployment

To reduce risk of personal injury, do
not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the safety
canopy.
If a safety canopy deploys it will not
function again. The safety canopy,
including the pillar trims and
headliner, must be inspected and serviced
by an authorized dealer. If the safety
canopy is not replaced, the unrepaired area
will increase the risk of personal injury in a
crash.

•

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

The crash sensors and monitoring
system have a readiness indicator. See
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator
(page 41).

Supplementary Restraints System
The supplemental restraint system control
module also monitors the readiness of the
above safety devices plus the crash
sensors. The readiness of the
supplemental restraint system is indicated
by a warning lamp in the instrument cluster
or by a backup tone if the warning lamp is
not working. Routine maintenance of the
airbags is not required.

Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear
seats. The safety canopy will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly
installed child or booster seat because it
is designed to inflate downward from the
headliner above the doors along the side
window opening.
The design and development of the safety
canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a
group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of personal
injury related to the deployment of a safety
canopy.

If a fault is present in the supplemental
restraint system it is indicated by one or
more of the following:
The warning lamp will not
illuminate when you switch the
ignition on.
•

CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR

•

WARNING

The warning lamp will either flash or
stay illuminated.
A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically
until the fault, the warning lamp or
both are repaired.

If the above occurs, even intermittently,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless repaired, the
system may not operate correctly in the
event of a crash.

Do not modify the front end of your
vehicle. Adding equipment to the
front of the vehicle, including the
frame, bumper, front body structure or
recovery hook may affect the performance
of the airbag system, increasing the risk of
personal injury.

The safety belt pretensioners and the front
airbags are designed to deploy when the
vehicle sustains longitudinal deceleration
sufficient to cause the supplemental
restraint system control module to deploy
a safety device.

The vehicle has a collection of crash
sensors which provide information to the
supplemental restraint system control
module. The system will deploy the front
safety belt pretensioners, driver airbag,
passenger airbag, seat mounted side
airbags or safety canopy based on the type
of crash, for example frontal impact or side
impact. The supplemental restraint system
control module will deploy the appropriate
safety devices.

The fact that the safety belt pretensioners
or front airbags did not deploy for all front
seat occupants in a crash does not mean
there is a fault with the system. The
supplemental restraint system control
module determines crash conditions,
severity and safety belt usage to deploy
the appropriate safety devices.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
•

•

The design of the front airbags is to
deploy only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes, for example not rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts, unless the
crash causes sufficient longitudinal
deceleration.
The design of the safety belt
pretensioners is to deploy only in
frontal and near-frontal crashes, and
may also deploy if a safety canopy
deploys.
The design of the side airbags is to
deploy only in certain side impact
crashes. Side airbags may deploy in
other types of crashes if your vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation.
The design of the safety canopy is to
deploy only in certain side impact
crashes or rollover events. The safety
canopy may deploy in other types of
crashes if your vehicle experiences
sufficient sideways motion or
deformation, or the likelihood of a
rollover event.

AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Keys and Remote Controls
•
•

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The remote control allows you to:
• remotely lock or unlock the vehicle
doors
• unlock the doors without actively using
a key or remote control (intelligent
access only)
• remotely open the power liftgate (if
equipped)
• remotely start or stop the engine (if
equipped)
• arm and disarm the anti-theft system
• activate the panic alarm.

structures around the vehicle
other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle

The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other short
distance radio transmissions, for example
amateur radios, medical equipment,
wireless headphones, remote controls and
alarm systems. If the frequencies are
jammed, you will not be able to use your
remote control. You can lock and unlock
the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.

GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES

Note: The remote control contains sensitive
electrical components. Exposure to moisture
or impact may cause permanent damage.

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.

REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Key head Transmitter
(If Equipped)

Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term IC before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.

E177585

Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
unlock or lock the driver door from outside
your vehicle. The transmitter portion
functions as the remote control.

The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10
meters). Vehicles with the remote start
feature will have a greater range. One of
the following could cause a decrease in
operating range:
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Keys and Remote Controls
Integrated Key head Transmitter

E138615
E138619

Note: Your vehicle’s keys came with a
security label that provides important
vehicle key cut information. Keep the label
in a safe place for future reference.

Twist a thin coin in the slot of the
transmitter near the key ring to remove
the battery cover.
2. Remove the old battery.

Programming a New Remote
Control
To program an additional remote control
See Passive Anti-Theft System (page
58).

Replacing the Battery
The remote control uses one coin type
three volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.

E138620
3. Insert the new battery. Refer to the
instructions inside the transmitter for
the correct orientation of the battery.
Press the battery down to make sure
it is fully in the housing.
4. Snap the battery cover back onto the
transmitter.

Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery will not delete
the transmitter from the vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.

Car Finder
Press the lock button on the key twice
within three seconds. The horn sounds and
the direction indicators will flash. We
recommend you use this method to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic
alarm.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Keys and Remote Controls
Note: If locking was not successful or if any
door is open, or if the hood is open on
vehicles with a perimeter alarm or remote
start, the horn will sound and the direction
indicators will not flash.

Sounding a Panic Alarm
Note: The alarm will only operate when the
ignition is off.

E138624

Press the button to turn on the
alarm. Press the button again or
switch the ignition on to turn off.

REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
You can purchase replacement keys or
remote controls from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Remote
Control (page 43).
To re-program the passive anti-theft
system see an authorized dealer.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyKey™ (If Equipped)
Configurable Settings

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

With an admin key, you can configure
certain MyKey settings when you first
create a MyKey and before you recycle the
key or restart the engine. You can also
change the settings afterward with an
admin key.

MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys can
be activated with these restricted modes.
Any keys that remain unprogrammed are
referred to as administrator keys or admin
keys. They can be used to:
•
•
•

•

Create a MyKey.
Program configurable MyKey settings.
Clear all MyKey features.

When you have created a MyKey, you can
access the following information by using
the information display to determine:
•
•

WARNING
Do not set MyKey maximum speed
limit to a limit that will prevent the
driver from maintaining a safe speed
considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.

How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle.
The total distance your vehicle traveled
with a MyKey.

Note: Switch the ignition on to use the
system.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.

•

Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed
by an admin key user:
•

•

A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display
followed by an audible tone when your
vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
depressing the accelerator pedal or by
setting cruise control.

•

Safety belt minder. You cannot disable
this feature. The audio system will
mute when the driver's safety belt is
not fastened.
Early low fuel. The low-fuel warning
activates earlier, giving the MyKey user
more time to refuel.
Driver assist features, if equipped on
your vehicle, are forced on: parking aid
and Blind Spot Information System
(BLIS) with cross traffic alert.

•

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Various vehicle speed minders can be
set. Once you select a speed, it will be
shown in the display, followed by an
audible tone when the preselected
vehicle speed is exceeded.
Audio system maximum volume of
45%. A message will be shown in the
display when you attempt to exceed
the limited volume. Also, the
speed-sensitive or compensated
automatic volume control will be
disabled.
Always on setting. When this is
selected, you will not be able to turn
off AdvanceTrac or the do not disturb
feature (if your vehicle is equipped with
these features).

MyKey™ (If Equipped)
CREATING A MYKEY

wheel. See Information Displays (page
78).

You can program a MyKey using the
information display control on the steering

Insert the key you want to program into the
ignition and switch the ignition on.

Press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

Settings

Press the OK button.

MyKey

Press the OK button.

Create MyKey

When prompted, hold the OK button until you see a message
informing you to label this key as a MyKey. The key will be
restricted at your vehicle's next start.
Make sure you label the key so you can distinguish it from the
admin keys.
You can also program configurable settings for the key(s).
Refer to the following Programming/Changing Configurable Settings.

Programming/Changing
Configurable Settings
Switch the ignition on using an admin key
or fob.
Use the information display to access the configurable MyKey settings, scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

Settings

Press the OK button.

MyKey

Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll to a configurable
feature.
Press the OK or right arrow button to make a selection.
Choose your applicable setting.

Note: You can clear or change your MyKey settings at any time during the same key cycle
as you created the MyKey. Once you switch the ignition off you will need an admin key to
change or clear your MyKey settings.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyKey™ (If Equipped)
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS

control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 78).

You can clear or change your MyKey
settings using the information display

Switch the ignition on using an admin key
or fob.

To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access
the main menu and scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

Settings

Press the OK button.

MyKey

Press the OK button.

Clear MyKey

Press and hold the OK button until the following message
displays.

All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyKey™ (If Equipped)
You can find information on programmed
MyKey(s) using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 78).

CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS

To find information on a programed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to
access the main menu and scroll to:
Message

Description

Settings

Press the OK button.

MyKey

Press the OK button.

Select one of the following:
MyKey Dist.

Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way
to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key
to clear your MyKey. If the distance does not accumulate as
expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or
an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a
MyKey.

{0} MyKeys

Indicates the number of MyKeys programed to your vehicle.
Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.

{0} Admin Keys

Indicates how many admin keys are programed to your
vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programed.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyKey™ (If Equipped)
2. Start your vehicle using your remote
start fob.
3. See Clearing All MyKeys (page 48).
Follow Steps 1-3.

USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
Vehicles With Ford-Approved
Aftermarket Remote Start
Systems

After clearing your MyKeys, you can create
a new MyKey. See Creating a MyKey
(page 47).

When using a Ford-approved aftermarket
remote start system, the vehicle recognizes
the remote start system as an additional
admin key. It is the vehicle’s default setting.
You can also program the remote start as
a MyKey. As a result, the MyKey system
status menu display includes the remote
start system as an additional key in the
total count of programed keys. See
Checking MyKey System Status (page
49).

Note: For vehicles with Intelligent Access
keys (push-button start), you cannot
program the remote start system as a
MyKey. Always treat the remote start fob
as you would any other admin key.

Vehicles With Non-Ford-Approved
Aftermarket Remote Start
Systems
MyKey is not compatible with
non-Ford-approved aftermarket remote
start systems. If you choose to install a
remote start system, see an authorized
dealer for a Ford-approved remote start
system.

When you start your vehicle with a
Ford-approved aftermarket remote start
system, the system stalls the engine after
you open the door or shift your vehicle into
gear. This is intentional. When you restart
your vehicle, it reads the Key or intelligent
Key fob status instead of the remote start
system status.

The following information may help if you
choose to install a non-Ford-approved
remote start system. The actions provided
below do not make MyKey compatible with
non-Ford-approved remote start systems,
but may help you retain some MyKey
functions.

As an added precaution, owners of vehicles
fitted with traditional keys may want to
program the remote start system as a
MyKey, if the MyKey driver uses the remote
start fob. That way, when the MyKey driver
starts the vehicle with the remote start
system, the MyKey restrictions remain
active.

When using a non-Ford-approved remote
start system, the vehicle may recognize
the remote start system as an additional
admin key with its associated privileges. If
you restart the engine by inserting a key
into the ignition cylinder and recycling the
ignition completely, then you may retain
some MyKey functions. This action forces
your vehicle to read the traditional key
instead of the remote start fob and then
uses the MyKey associated privileges.

With a Ford-approved aftermarket remote
start system, it is possible to program all
keys as MyKeys unintentionally. If this
happens, then the remote start fob is the
admin key. If you want to have only one
key as a MyKey, or do not want to have any
MyKeys, then you need to use your remote
start to clear all MyKeys. In that case,
follow these steps:
1.

Note: The MyKey system status menu
display may include the remote start system
as an additional key in the total count of
programed keys. See Checking MyKey
System Status (page 49).

Enter your vehicle and close all doors.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyKey™ (If Equipped)
As an added precaution, owners of vehicles
fitted with traditional keys may want to
program the remote start system as a
MyKey, if the MyKey driver uses the remote
start fob. That way, when the MyKey driver
starts the vehicle with the remote start
system, the MyKey restrictions remain
active.

1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Start your vehicle using your
non-Ford-approved remote start fob.
3. See Clearing All MyKeys (page 48).
Follow Steps 1-3.
After clearing your MyKeys, you can create
a new MyKey. See Creating a MyKey
(page 47).

With a non-Ford-approved aftermarket
remote start system, it is possible to
program all keys as MyKeys
unintentionally. If this happens, then the
remote start fob is the admin key. If you
want to have only one key as a MyKey, or
do not want to have any MyKeys, then you
need to use your remote start to clear all
MyKeys. In that case, follow these steps:

Note: For vehicles with Intelligent Access
keys (push-button start), you cannot
program the remote start system as a
MyKey. Always treat the remote start fob
as you would any other admin key.

MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition

Potential Causes

I cannot create a MyKey.

· The key or fob used to start the vehicle does
not have admin privileges.
· The key or fob used to start the vehicle is the
only admin key (there always has to be at least
one admin key).
· Vehicles with push-button start: The intelligent access key fob is not positioned correctly
next to the steering column. See Ignition
Switch (page 104).
· SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
· The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. See Using MyKey With
Remote Start Systems (page 50).

I cannot program the configurable
settings.

· The key or fob used to start your vehicle does
not have admin privileges.
· No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 47).

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyKey™ (If Equipped)
Condition

Potential Causes

· The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. See Using MyKey With
Remote Start Systems (page 50).
I cannot clear the MyKeys.

· The key or fob used to start your vehicle does
not have admin privileges.
· No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 47).
· The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. See Using MyKey With
Remote Start Systems (page 50).

I lost the only admin key.

Purchase a new key from your authorized
dealer.

I lost a key

Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft
System (page 58).

I accidentally programmed all keys as
MyKeys.

· The vehicle has a remote start system that is
recognized as an admin key. Clear all MyKeys
by using the remote start. See Using MyKey
With Remote Start Systems (page 50).
· The vehicle's system does not recognize any
programmed MyKeys. See Creating a MyKey
(page 47).

MyKey total includes one additional key. · An unknown key or fob has been created as
a MyKey.
· The vehicle has a remote start system. See
Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems
(page 50).
Admin key total includes one additional · An unknown key or fob has been programmed
key.
to the vehicle as an admin key.
· The vehicle has a remote start system. See
Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems
(page 50).
MyKey distances do not accumulate.

· The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
· An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and
created new MyKeys.
· The key system has been reset.

No MyKey functions with the Intelligent · An admin fob is present at vehicle start.
Access key.
· No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 47).

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Locks
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

Reprogramming the Unlocking
Function

Note: Make sure you have locked your
vehicle before leaving it unattended.

You can reprogram the unlocking function
so that only the driver door unlocks. See
Remote Control (page 43).

Note: Do not leave the keys in your vehicle.

Locking and Unlocking
Confirmation

Locking
Locking With the Key

When you lock the doors, the direction
indicators flash twice.

Turn the top of the key toward the rear of
your vehicle.

When you unlock the doors, the direction
indicators flash once and a tone sounds.

Locking With the Remote Control

Locking and Unlocking the Doors
From Inside

Press the button.
Note: You can lock the driver door with the
key. Use the key when the remote control is
not functioning.

Unlocking (If Equipped)
Unlocking With the Key
Turn the top of the key toward the front of
your vehicle.

Unlocking With the Remote Control

E148829

Press the button.
Note: You can unlock the driver door with
the key. Use the key when the remote
control is not functioning.
Note: When you leave your vehicle
unattended for several weeks, the remote
control turns off.
Note: Unlock your vehicle and start the
engine using the key. Unlocking and starting
your vehicle once enables the remote
control.
Unlocking the Rear Cargo Doors
Press the button.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Lock.

Unlock.

Locks
Opening and Closing the Sliding
Door
Opening the Sliding Door

E172313

Pull the door handle to release the door
check feature.
2. Slide the door to close.

Opening and Closing the Double
Rear Doors

E148804

Pull the interior door handle to open the
door.
Closing the Sliding Door

1
E148805

E171966

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Locks
Unlocking and Opening the Double
Rear Doors From Inside

E148806

E175828

Lift the locking button up.

E178366
E175955

1. Slide the lever to release the catch.
2. Fully open the cargo door.

2. Push the inner release lever down to
open the door.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Locks

E148806

E179501

Rear Emergency Exit

Pull the interior handle up to open the door
in an emergency.

Wagon and Bus

Automatic Locking
You can set your vehicle's doors to lock
automatically when you exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). You can switch this on in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 78). If you have switched
automatic locking on, either use the interior
door unlock button or switch the ignition
off and use the key or remote control to
unlock the rear or sliding door.

Automatic Unlocking
You can switch this function on using the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 78). If you have switched
this function on, the automatic unlocking
feature unlocks all doors within 10 minutes
of the end of a drive cycle, when the driver
door is opened and the ignition is off.

E179502

One-Stage Unlocking
You can switch on this function using the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 78).
If you have switched on this function, you
unlock all doors including the rear doors
and the sliding door.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Locks
Configurable Unlocking

Note: When you unlock the doors, the
direction indicators flash once.

Configurable unlocking is set when you
purchase your vehicle. It allows you to
select which doors unlock when you press,
once or twice, the unlock button or the
cargo area unlock button on your remote
control. You cannot switch this feature
back on if you had it switched off. See an
authorized dealer for further information.

You unlock all of the doors when you:
• Press the unlock button on the remote
control once.
• Press the interior unlock button once.

Two-Stage Unlocking
Note: When you unlock the doors, the
direction indicators flash once.
You unlock the front doors when you:
• Press the unlock button on the remote
control once.
• Press the interior unlock button once.
You unlock the front doors and cargo area
when you:
• Press the unlock button on the remote
control once.
• Press the unlock button on the remote
control twice within three seconds.

Zone Re-Locking (If Equipped)
If you enable zone re-locking and open one
door, all other doors remain locked. See an
authorized dealer for further information.
The locks on van, bus or wagon have two
zones, cabin and cargo. For van, the cargo
area includes the rear doors and the sliding
door. For bus or wagon, the cargo area
includes the rear doors.
•
•

Exit your vehicle and press the lock
button.
Press the unlock button or the cargo
area unlock button once to open the
respective zone.

If you now open a door within the unlocked
zone, the other doors in that zone
automatically lock.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Security
Automatic Disarming

PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM (If Equipped)

Switching the ignition on with a correctly
coded key disarms the engine
immobilization system.

Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.

Replacement Keys
The integrated keyhead transmitter
functions as a programmed ignition key
that operates all the locks and starts your
vehicle, as well as a remote control.

Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may cause vehicle starting problems
if they are too close to the key when starting
the engine. Prevent these objects from
touching the coded key while starting the
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the
coded key and restart the engine if a
problem occurs.

If your keys are lost or stolen and you do
not have a spare correctly coded key, you
will need to have your vehicle towed to an
authorized dealer. You need to erase the
coded keys from your vehicle and program
new coded keys.
Store an extra correctly coded key away
from the vehicle in a safe place to help
prevent any inconveniences. See an
authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.

Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.

SecuriLock®

Programming a Spare Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter

The system is an engine immobilization
system. It is designed to help prevent the
engine from being started unless a
correctly coded key for your vehicle is used.
Using an incorrectly coded key may
prevent the engine from starting. A
message may appear in the information
display.

You can program your own integrated
keyhead transmitter or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This
procedure will program both the engine
immobilizer keycode and the remote entry
portion of the remote control to your
vehicle

If you are unable to start the engine with a
correctly coded key, a malfunction has
happened and a message may appear in
the information display.

Only use integrated keyhead transmitters
or standard SecuriLock keys.
You must have two previously
programmed correctly coded keys and the
new unprogrammed key readily accessible.
See an authorized dealer to have the spare
key programmed if two previously
programmed correctly coded keys are not
available.

Automatic Arming
The engine immobilization system arms
immediately after you switch the ignition
off.

Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
1.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Insert the first previously programmed
correctly coded key into the ignition.

Security
2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Switch the ignition off and remove the
first correctly coded key from the
ignition.
4. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off,
insert the second previously correctly
coded key into the ignition.
5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Switch the ignition off and remove the
second previously programmed
correctly coded key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off
and removing the previously
programmed correctly coded key,
insert the new unprogrammed key into
the ignition.
8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least six seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed
correctly coded key from the ignition.

ANTI-THEFT ALARM
Alarm System
The perimeter alarm is a deterrent against
unauthorized access to your vehicle
through the doors, luggage compartment
and the hood.

Triggering the Alarm
Once armed, the alarm is triggered in any
of the following ways:
•

•

If someone opens a door, cargo area
or the hood without a valid key or
remote control.
If you switch the ignition on without a
valid key.

If the alarm is triggered, the horn will sound
for 30 seconds and the hazard warning
flasher will flash for five minutes.
Any further attempts to perform one of the
above will trigger the alarm again.

Arming the Alarm
To arm the alarm, lock your vehicle. See
Locks (page 53).

If the key has been successfully
programmed it will start the engine and
operate the remote entry system (if the
new key is an integrated keyhead
transmitter).

Disarming the Alarm
Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking
the doors with the key and switching the
ignition on with a correctly coded key
within 12 seconds, or by unlocking the
doors or the cargo area with the remote
control.

If the key was not successfully
programmed, wait 10 seconds and repeat
Steps 1 through 8. If you are still
unsuccessful, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
Note: You can program a maximum of eight
coded keys to your vehicle. All eight can be
integrated keyhead transmitters.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 93).

3
E95179

3. Lock the steering column.

AUDIO CONTROL - VEHICLES
WITHOUT: TOUCHSCREEN
DISPLAY

E95178

1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.

B
E129463

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Volume up

Seek up or next

Volume down

Seek down or previous

Steering Wheel
Seek, Next or Previous

VOICE CONTROL - VEHICLES
WITHOUT: TOUCHSCREEN
DISPLAY

Press the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• Play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next station up
or down the frequency band.
• Seek through a track.

AUDIO CONTROL - VEHICLES
WITH: TOUCHSCREEN
DISPLAY
Select the required source on the audio
unit.

E129464

You can operate the following functions
with the control:

Pull the control to select or deselect voice
control. See SYNC™ (page 300).

A
VOICE CONTROL - VEHICLES
WITH: TOUCHSCREEN
DISPLAY

E129462

Volume up

Seek up or next

Volume down

Seek down or previous

Mode

E161798

Pull the control to select or deselect voice
control. See MyFord Touch™ (page 348).
See MyFord Touch™ (page 348).

Press M to select the audio source.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Steering Wheel
MyFord Touch® Controls (If Equipped)

INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL

Your steering wheel controls may also
have these additional features.
Press to go to the home screen.
E142613

Press to go to the information
screen.
E142608

See MyFord Touch™ (page 348).

CRUISE CONTROL

E130248

See Information Displays (page 78).

E142437

See Cruise Control (page 146).

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wipers and Washers
Intermittent Wipe

WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Defrost the windshield before you switch
the windshield wipers on.

Do not operate the windshield wipers on
a dry windshield. This may scratch the
glass, damage the wiper blades or cause
the wiper motor to overheat. Always use
the windshield washers before you switch
the windshield wipers on.

D
C

E169314

Short wipe interval.

Intermittent wipe.

Long wipe interval.

Use the rotary control to adjust the
intermittent wipe interval.

A
E169313

AUTOWIPERS
A

Single wipe.

Intermittent wipe.

Normal wipe.

High-speed wipe.

Defrost the windshield before you switch
the windshield wipers on.
Do not operate the windshield wipers on
a dry windshield. This may scratch the
glass, damage the wiper blades or cause
the wiper motor to overheat. Always use
the windshield washers before you switch
the windshield wipers on.

Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wipers and Washers
A

Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
hit the windshield.

C
E169314

High sensitivity.

On.

Low sensitivity.

Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps will
automatically turn on when the windshield
wipers continuously operate.

WINDSHIELD WASHERS

During wet or winter driving conditions
where ice, snow or a salty road mist is
present, inconsistent or unexpected wiping
or smearing may occur. In these conditions,
you can do the following:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing on
the windshield.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch autowipers off.
Autowipers uses a rain sensor located in
the area around the interior mirror. The
wipers will operate when the rain sensor
detects water on the windshield. The rain
sensor will continue to monitor the amount
of water on the windshield and
automatically adjust the speed of the
wipers.

E169316

Pull the lever toward you to operate the
windshield washers. When you release the
lever, wiping will continue for a short period
of time.
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This may
cause the washer pump to overheat.

Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the autowipers. When you
select low sensitivity, the wipers will
operate when the sensor detects a large
amount of water on the windshield. When
you select high sensitivity, the wipers will
operate when the sensor detects a small
amount of water on the windshield.

Note: Do not operate the windshield
washers for more than 10 seconds at a time.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Lighting
GENERAL INFORMATION

LIGHTING CONTROL

Condensation in Lamp Assemblies

Lighting Control Positions

Exterior lamps have vents to
accommodate normal changes in air
pressure.

Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.

E175211

Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.

Off.

Position lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps.

Headlamps.

Autolamps.

High Beams

Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.

E163718

Push the lever forward to switch the high
beams on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Lighting
Headlamp Flasher

When the lighting control is in the
autolamps position, the headlamps
automatically turn on in low light situations
or when the wipers activate.
If equipped, the following also activate
when the lighting control is in the
autolamps position and you switch them
on in the information display:
• Configurable daytime running lamps.
• Automatic high beam control.
• Adaptive headlamp control.

E163719

Pull the lever slightly toward the steering
wheel.

The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on. See Information Displays
(page 78).

Parking Lamps
Select position B on the lighting control to
switch the parking lamps on.
Note: Prolonged use of the parking lamps
will cause the battery to run out of charge.

Note: With the headlamps in the
autolamps position, you cannot switch the
high beam headlamps on until the
autolamps system turns the low beam
headlamps on.

AUTOLAMPS (If Equipped)
WARNING

Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps

The autolamps switch position may
not activate the headlamps in all low
visibility conditions, such as daytime
fog. Always ensure that your headlamps
are switched to auto or on, as appropriate,
during all low visibility conditions. Failure
to do so may result in a collision.

The windshield wiper activated headlamps
turn on within 10 seconds when you switch
the windshield wipers on and the lighting
control is in the autolamps position. They
turn off approximately 60 seconds after
you switch the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps will not turn on by wiper
activation:
• During a mist wipe.
• When the wipers are on to clear washer
fluid during a wash condition.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps will
automatically turn on when the windshield
wipers continuously operate.

E142451

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Lighting
Type 1 - Conventional (NonConfigurable)

INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER

The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions
or the parking brake is released for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking
lamp or autolamps positions.
4. The headlamps are off.
E175219

Type 2 - Configurable

Press it repeatedly or press it and hold it
until the desired level is reached.

Switch the daytime running lamps on or
off using the information display controls.
See Information Displays (page 78).

Note: If you disconnect the battery or it
loses charge the instrument lighting will
return to its brightest setting.

The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. They are switched on in the information
display. See Information Displays
(page 78).
2. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions
or the parking brake is released for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If
Equipped)

WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the rear lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting
during low visibility driving conditions. Also,
the autolamps switch position may not
activate the headlamps in all low visibility
conditions, such as daytime fog. Make sure
the headlamps are switched to auto or on,
as appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
crash.

The other lighting control switch positions
do not activate the daytime running lamps,
and you can use them to temporarily
override autolamp control.
When switched off in the information
display, the daytime running lamps are off
in all lighting control switch positions.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Lighting
If you set the switch to position B, the
courtesy lamps will automatically turn on
when you unlock your vehicle or open a
door. If you leave a door open with the
ignition switched off, they will
automatically turn off after a short period
of time to prevent the vehicle battery from
losing charge. To switch them back on,
switch the ignition on for a short period of
time.

DIRECTION INDICATORS

The courtesy lamps will automatically turn
on when you switch the ignition off. They
will automatically turn off after a short
period of time to prevent the vehicle
battery from losing charge.

E162681

Push the lever up or down to use the
direction indicators.

INTERIOR LAMPS

If you set the switch to position C with the
ignition switched off, the courtesy lamps
will turn on. They will automatically turn
off after a short period of time to prevent
the vehicle battery from losing charge. To
switch them back on, switch the ignition
on for a short period of time.

Courtesy Lamp

Reading Lamps

Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times to
indicate a lane change.

E112208

If you switch the ignition off, the reading
lamps will automatically turn off after a
short period of time to prevent the vehicle
battery from losing charge. To switch them
back on, switch the ignition on for a short
period of time.

E112207

Off

Door contact

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Windows and Mirrors
Driver Side One-Touch Up

POWER WINDOWS

Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or
lift it again to stop the window.

WARNINGS
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.

Bounce-Back
The window will automatically stop and
reverse some distance if it detects an
obstacle while closing.

When closing the power windows,
you should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the window openings.

Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse
if it detects an obstacle. Take care
when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
To override this protection feature when
there is a resistance, for example in winter:
1.

Close the window twice until it reaches
the point of resistance and let it
reverse.
2. Close the window a third time to the
point of resistance. The bounce-back
feature is now disabled and you can
close the window manually. The
window will go past the point of
resistance and you can close it fully.

E146043

Press the switch to open the window. The
window will stop if you release the switch
before the window fully opens.
Lift the switch to close the window. The
window will stop if you release the switch
before the window fully closes.

If the window does not close after the third
attempt the system requires service.

Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.

Resetting the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING

Accessory Delay (If Equipped)

The bounce-back feature remains
turned off until it is reset.

You can use the window switches for
several minutes when you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
door.

Lift and hold the switch until the
window is fully closed.
2. Release the switch.
3. Lift the switch again for one more
second.

Driver Side One-Touch Down
Press the switch fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
69

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Windows and Mirrors
4. Release the switch.
5. Lift the switch again for one more
second.
6. Open the window and then try to close
using the one-touch feature.
7. Repeat the procedure if the window
does not close using the one-touch
feature.
Note: If you have disconnected the battery,
you must reset the bounce-back memory.

E71281

EXTERIOR MIRRORS

Move the controller in the direction of the
arrows to adjust the mirror.

Power Exterior Mirrors

Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when you unfold it.

WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving. This could result
in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.

INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING

Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.

C
A

Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
side.

E71280

Left-hand mirror.

Off.

Right-hand mirror.

Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce glare at night.

Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger or
raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Windows and Mirrors
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.

REAR QUARTER WINDOWS
Opening the Rear Windows (If
Equipped)

E170036

Press the unlock button to release the
catch.
Note: Depending on the lock type fitted,
you will have to either press the unlock
buttons together or down to release the
catch.
2. Hold the catch and push the window
open. Make sure the catch engages.
Note: There is an audible click when the
catch engages.

Closing the Rear Windows
1.

Hold and pull the catch to close the
window.
2. Press the catch to engage the lock.
Note: There is an audible click when the
lock engages.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Instrument Cluster
GAUGES

E184961

Information display. See Information Displays (page 78).

Speedometer.

Engine coolant temperature gauge.

Tripmeter reset and distance to empty toggle button.

Fuel gauge.

Tachometer.
Vehicle Settings and Personalization

Information Display

See General Information (page 78).

Odometer

Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge

Registers the distance your vehicle has
traveled.

WARNING

Outside Air Temperature

Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.

Shows the outside air temperature.
Trip Computer

At normal operating temperature, the
needle will remain in the center section.

See Trip Computer (page 81).

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Instrument Cluster
If the needle enters the red section, the
engine is overheating. Stop your vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so and switch the
engine off. Determine the cause once the
engine has cooled down. See Engine
Coolant Check (page ?).

The needle should move toward F when
you refuel your vehicle. If the needle points
to E after adding fuel, this indicates your
vehicle needs service soon.

Note: Do not restart the engine until the
cause of overheating has been determined
and resolved.

•

After refueling some variability in needle
position is normal:

Tripmeter Reset and Distance to
Empty (If Equipped)

•

Press the button to change between the
tripmeter and distance to empty
information. Press and hold the button to
reset the tripmeter.

•

Fuel Gauge
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a gradient.

It may take a short time for the needle
to reach F after leaving the gas station.
This is normal and depends upon the
slope of pavement at the gas station.
The fuel amount dispensed into the
tank is a little less or more than the
gauge indicated. This is normal and
depends upon the slope of pavement
at the gas station.
If the gas station nozzle shuts off
before the tank is full, try a different
gas pump nozzle.

Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel reminder triggers when the fuel
gauge needle is at 1/16th.

Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is
in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to the
fuel pump symbol indicates on which side
of your vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Variations:
Driving type (fuel economy
conditions)

Fuel gauge position

Distance-to-empty

Highway driving

1/16th

35 miles to 80 miles (56 km
to 129 km)

Severe duty driving (trailer
towing, extended idle)

1/16th

35 miles (56km)

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Instrument Cluster
If it illuminates when your vehicle is
moving, make sure the parking brake is
disengaged. If the parking brake is
disengaged, this indicates low brake fluid
level or a brake system fault. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.

WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and
indicators will alert you to a vehicle
condition that may become serious. Some
lamps will illuminate when you start your
vehicle to make sure they work. If any
lamps remain on after starting your vehicle,
refer to the respective system warning
lamp for further information.

Battery
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. Switch off all
unnecessary electrical equipment. Have
the system checked by an authorized
dealer.

Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and function the
same as a warning lamp but do not
illuminate when you start your vehicle.

Diesel Warning Lamps (If Equipped)

Anti-Lock Brake System

The following warning lamps are unique
for vehicles equipped with a diesel engine.

If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. Your vehicle will
continue to have normal braking without
Anti-lock brake system function. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.

Exhaust Emission Fluid
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates the diesel
E163176
exhaust fluid is low. See
Selective Catalytic Reduction System
(page 115).

Brake System
WARNINGS
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance
may occur. It will take you longer to stop
your vehicle. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.

If it illuminates when you are driving, and
the diesel exhaust fluid is at a sufficient
level, this indicates a system malfunction.
Have your vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer.

Driving extended distances with the
parking brake engaged can cause
brake failure and the risk of personal
injury.

It illuminates when you switch
the ignition on, wait until it
extinguishes before starting the

E138644

Glow Plug

engine.

It illuminates when you engage
the parking brake and the
ignition is on.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Instrument Cluster
Water In Fuel

All Vehicles

It will illuminate if there is excess
water in the fuel filter. Drain off
the water immediately. See
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap
(page 210). If it illuminates after draining
the water, this indicates a fuel filter service
is required. Have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer immediately.

If either lamp illuminates when the engine
is running, this indicates a malfunction. The
engine will continue to run but it may have
limited power. If either lamp flashes when
you are driving, reduce the speed of your
vehicle immediately. If it continues to flash,
avoid heavy acceleration or deceleration.
Have your vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer.

Direction Indicator

WARNING
Under engine misfire conditions,
excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic
converter, the fuel system, interior floor
coverings or other vehicle components,
possibly causing a fire. Have an authorized
dealer service your vehicle immediately.

Flashes during operation. A
sudden increase in the rate of
flashing warns of a failed
indicator bulb. See Changing a Bulb
(page 217).

Door Ajar
It illuminates when you switch
the ignition on and remains on if
any door or the hood is open.

If both lamps illuminate when the engine
is running, stop your vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so. You may notice a reduction
in vehicle speed caused by reduced engine
power. Switch the ignition off and attempt
to restart the engine. Have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer.

Engine Coolant Temperature
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. Stop your vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the
engine off. Have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.

Front Airbag
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, this
indicates a malfunction. Have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer.

Engine Warning Lamps
Malfunction Indicator

High Beam
It will illuminate when you switch
the headlamp high beam on. It
will flash when you use the
headlamp flasher.

Service Required

Lane Departure
It will illuminate when you switch
the system off.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Instrument Cluster
Park Lamp

It will illuminate when the system is not
available and may indicate a system
malfunction. Have your vehicle checked
by an authorized dealer.

It will illuminate when you switch
the headlamp low beam or the
side and tail lamps on.

Low Fuel Level

Safety Belt Minder

If it illuminates when you are
driving, refuel as soon as
possible.

It will illuminate and a chime will
sound to remind you to fasten
your safety belt. See Safety
Belt Minder (page 30).

Low Tire Pressure Warning

Stability Control

It will illuminate if the tire
pressure in one or more tires is
below the correct pressure. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 251).

It will illuminate for a short
period of time when you switch
E138639
the ignition on. If it illuminates
when you are driving, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction, the
system turns off. Have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.

Message Center Warning
It will illuminate when a new
message is stored in the
information display. It will be red
or amber in color depending on the severity
of the message and will remain on until the
cause of the message has been rectified.
See Information Messages (page 83).

Note: While driving, it flashes when the
system is operating.

Transmission Tow/Haul

Oil Pressure

E161509

WARNING

It will illuminate when you switch
the system on. See Automatic
Transmission (page 132).

If the warning lamp flashes continuously,
this indicates a malfunction and damage
to the transmission could occur. Have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.

If it illuminates when you are driving
do not continue your journey, even if
the oil level is correct. Have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
If it stays on after starting the
engine or illuminates when you
are driving, this indicates a
malfunction. Stop your vehicle as soon as
it is safe to do so and switch the engine off.
Check the engine oil level. See Engine Oil
Check (page 204).

AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Airbag Secondary Warning
Sounds when there is a fault with the
airbag system and the airbag warning
lamp.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Instrument Cluster
Door Ajar
Sounds when a door is not fully closed and
your vehicle is moving.

Exterior Lamps On
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver door, and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.

Gearshift Lever not in Park (P)
Sounds when the driver door is open, the
key is in the ignition and the gearshift lever
is not in park (P).

Key in Ignition
Sounds when the driver door is open and
the key is in the ignition.

Parking Brake On
Sounds when the parking brake is on and
your vehicle is moving. If the warning chime
continues to sound when you release the
parking brake, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.

Safety Belt Minder
WARNINGS
The safety belt minder remains in
stand-by mode when the front safety
belts have been fastened. It will
sound if either safety belt is unfastened.
Do not sit on top of a fastened safety
belt to prevent the safety belt minder
from coming on. The occupant
protection system will only provide
optimum protection when you use the
safety belt correctly.
Sounds when a safety belt is unfastened
in an occupied seat and your vehicle is
moving.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Information Displays
Information Display Controls

GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

E138659

•

You can control various systems on your
vehicle using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.

•

The information display shows the
corresponding information.

•
•

Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
Press the right arrow button to enter a
submenu.
Press the left arrow button to exit a
submenu.
Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.

Menu Structure - Information
Display
You can access the menu using the
information display control.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Trip computer

Message

Trip computer
Dist to empty
Trip odometer
Trip Timer

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Information Displays
Message

Average Fuel
All values
1

See Trip Computer (page 81). See Gauges (page 72).

Information
Message

Driver Alert
DEF level
Engine Hours
Idle:
Engine Hours
Running:
Trailer Brake
Gain:
System check

Settings
Message

Driver Assist

Action

Driver Alert

Off

Trailer Brake

Electric
E.-Hydraulic

Lane Keeping

Sensitivity
Intensity

Lighting

Display

Hdlamp Delay

Manual or xx Seconds

Rain Light

Choose your applicable
setting

Language

Choose your applicable
setting

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Information Displays
Message

Convenience

Action

Distance

Choose your applicable
setting

Temp unit

Choose your applicable
setting

Compass

Show - check enabled or
uncheck disabled

Locks

Autolock
Autounlock
Global Unlock

System Reset

Hold OK to Reset System to Factory Default

Menu Structure - Information and
Entertainment Display

System Check
All active warnings will display first if
applicable. The system check menu may
appear different based upon equipment
options and current vehicle status. Use the
up and down arrow buttons to scroll
through the list. See Information
Messages (page 83).

You can access the menu using the
information and entertainment display
control.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
SYNC-Media allows you to access the
SYNC features.

SYNC-Phone
Message

Dial a number
Phone Redial
Phonebook
Call History

Incoming calls
Outgoing calls
Missed calls

Speed Dial
Text messaging

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Information Displays
Message

BT Devices
Phone settings

Set as master
Phonebook pref.
Set ringtone
Phone status
Text msg notify

Emerg. Assist.

SYNC-Menu
Message

SYNC-Settings

Bluetooth on
Set defaults
Master reset
System info
Voice settings
Browse USB

SYNC-Apps

Average Fuel Consumption

TRIP COMPUTER

Indicates the average fuel consumption
since the function was last reset.

Resetting the Trip Computer

Distance to Empty

Press and hold OK on the current screen
to reset the respective trip, distance, time
and average fuel consumption information.

Indicates the approximate distance your
vehicle will travel on the fuel remaining in
the tank. Changes in driving pattern may
cause the value to vary.

All Values
Indicates all the respective trip, distance,
time and average fuel consumption
information.

Outside Air Temperature
Shows the outside air temperature.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Information Displays
Trip Odometer

PERSONALIZED SETTINGS

Registers the distance traveled of
individual journeys.

Measure Units
You can choose personalized settings
using the information display control on
the steering wheel. See Information
Displays (page 78).

Trip Timer
Registers the elapsed time of individual
journeys or the total time since the function
was last reset.

To swap between imperial and metric units, scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

Display

Press the OK button.

Measure unit

Choose your applicable setting. Press the OK button.
Swapping between imperial and metric units will affect the
following displays:
• Average fuel consumption.
• Distance to empty.
• Odometer.
• Outside temperature units.
• Trip odometer.

Switching Chimes Off or On
You can switch chimes off or on using the
information display control on the steering
wheel. See Information Displays (page
78).
To switch chimes off or on, scroll to:
Message

Action

Warning

Choose your applicable setting. Press the OK button.

Information

Choose your applicable setting. Press the OK button.

Note: The default setting is on.
Note: You cannot switch safety warning message chimes off.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Information Displays
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus. The
information display will automatically
remove other messages after a short
period of time.

INFORMATION MESSAGES

Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all of the
messages will display or be available. The
information display may abbreviate or
shorten certain messages.
The message indicator
illuminates to supplement some
messages. The message
indicator will be red or amber depending
on the severity of the relevant system
condition. The message indicator will
remain on until a system repair is
completed.

E130248

Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
information display.

A system-specific symbol with a message
indicator may supplement some
messages.

Airbag
Message

Description and Action

Airbag fault Service now The system has detected a fault that requires service.

Battery and Charging System
Message

Description and Action

Electrical system overvoltage Stop safely

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the
ignition off. The system has detected a fault that requires
service.

Battery low See manual

Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems and devices.
The system has detected a fault that requires service.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Information Displays

Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Message

Description and Action

DEF level low Range XXX Indicates the approximate distance remaining before the
mi Refill now
diesel exhaust fluid tank will be empty. Refill the diesel
exhaust fluid tank as soon as possible.
DEF level empty YY MPH Indicates the approximate distance remaining before the
diesel exhaust fluid tank will be empty and when it will restrict
max in XXX mi
your vehicle speed. Refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank as soon
as possible.
DEF level empty Speed
limited to YY MPH

Indicates that the diesel exhaust fluid tank is empty and that
your vehicle speed is being restricted. Refill the diesel exhaust
fluid tank as soon as possible.

DEF level empty YY MPH Indicates that the diesel exhaust fluid tank is empty and that
max Upon restart
your vehicle speed will be restricted when you restart your
vehicle. Refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank as soon as possible.
DEF level empty Engine
idled soon

Indicates that the diesel exhaust fluid tank is empty and that
the engine will soon be restricted to idle operation.

DEF level empty Engine
idled See manual

Indicates that the diesel exhaust fluid tank is empty and that
the engine is restricted to idle operation.

DEF fault YY MPH max in Indicates that your vehicle speed will soon be restricted. The
XXXX mi
system has detected a fault that requires service.
DEF fault Speed limited
to YY MPH

Indicates that your vehicle speed is restricted. The system
has detected a fault that requires service.

DEF fault Engine idled
soon

Indicates that the engine will soon be restricted to idle operation. The system has detected a fault that requires service.

DEF fault Engine idled
See manual

Indicates that the engine is restricted to idle operation. The
system has detected a fault that requires service.

DEF level empty YY MPH Indicates that your vehicle speed will be restricted when you
max Upon restart
restart your vehicle. The system has detected a fault that
requires service.
Note: When filling the diesel exhaust fluid tank from empty, there may be a short period
before the increased diesel exhaust fluid level is registered. The system must register the
increased diesel exhaust fluid level before your vehicle will return to full power.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Information Displays

Door Open
Message

Driver door ajar

Description and Action

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and close the
door.

Driver side rear door ajar Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and close the
door.
Passenger door ajar

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and close the
door.

Passenger side rear door Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and close the
ajar
door.
Hood open

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and close the
hood.

Rear load compartment
door ajar

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and close the
door.

Emergency rear door ajar Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and close the
door.

Engine
Message

Description and Action

Engine fault Service now The system has detected a fault that requires service.
High engine temperature Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so, allow the
Stop safely
engine to cool and then check the coolant level. If the warning
remains on when you have checked the coolant level, the
system has detected a fault that requires service. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 206).

Lighting
Message

Description and Action

Brake lamp Bulb fault

Indicates that a brake lamp bulb has burned out. See Maintenance (page 200).

Low beam Bulb fault

Indicates that a low beam headlamp bulb has burned out.
See Maintenance (page 200).

Headlamp fault Service
required

The system has detected a fault that requires service.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Information Displays

Maintenance
Message

Description and Action

Oil change required

The engine oil has exceeded the service time or distance limit.
Renew the engine oil and oil filter as soon as possible. See
Engine Oil Check (page 204).

Brake fluid level low
Service now

The system has detected a fault that requires service. See
Brake Fluid Check (page 210).

Washer fluid level low

Refill the washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible. See
Washer Fluid Check (page 210).

Parking Aid
Message

Parking aid fault Service
required

Description and Action

The system has detected a fault that requires service. See
Parking Aid (page 142).

Parking Brake
Message

Park brake applied

Description and Action

The parking brake is applied and your vehicle speed is above
3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning remains on when you have
released the parking brake, the system has detected a fault
that requires service.

Starting System
Message

Description and Action

Press brake to start

Press the brake pedal before you start the engine.

Cranking time exceeded

Indicates that the engine has failed to start.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Information Displays

Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Message

Description and Action

Low Tire Pressure

The tire pressure is low in one or more tires, check the tire
pressures. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page
251).

Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault

The system has detected a fault that requires service.

Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault

The system has detected a fault that requires service or the
spare tire is in use. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 251).

Water in Fuel
Message

Water detected in fuel
Service required

Description and Action

Drain off the water immediately. See Draining the Fuel
Filter Water Trap (page 210).

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Climate Control
Air Conditioning

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

The system directs air through the
evaporator for cooling. The evaporator
extracts humidity from the air to help keep
the windows free of mist. The system
directs the resulting condensation to the
outside of your vehicle, which may cause
a small pool to form under your vehicle.
This is normal.

Outside Air
Keep the air intakes in front of the
windshield free from obstruction (such as
snow or leaves) to allow the climate
control system to function effectively.

Recirculated Air

Note: The air conditioning operates only
when the temperature is above 39°F (4°C).

WARNING
Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to mist up. If the
windows mist up, follow the settings
for demisting the windshield.

Note: When you use air conditioning, your
vehicle uses more fuel.

AIR VENTS

The air currently in the passenger
compartment recirculates. Outside air does
not enter your vehicle.

To close a vent, slide the airflow direction
adjuster down.
Center Air Vents

Heating
Heating performance depends on the
temperature of the engine coolant.

General Information on Controlling
the Interior Climate
Fully close all the windows.
Warming the Interior
Direct the air toward your feet. In cold or
humid weather conditions, direct some of
the air toward the windshield and the door
windows.

E169287

Side Air Vent

Cooling the Interior
Direct the air toward your face.

E169288

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Climate Control
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL

E147011

Fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in your vehicle. Adjust
to select the desired fan speed or switch off. If you switch the fan off, the
windshield may fog up.

Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the button illuminates and
the air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce
the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering
your vehicle.

Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in your
vehicle. Adjust to select the desired temperature. If you select MAX A/C, the
system distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel air vents. This
mode is more economical and efficient than normal air conditioning. Turn the
temperature control to maximum heat to turn the auxiliary heater on

Air conditioning: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. To
improve air conditioning when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows
open for two to three minutes.

Air distribution control: Adjust to select the desired air distribution.
Select to distribute air through
the instrument panel air vents.

Select to distribute air through
the footwell air vents.

Select to distribute air through
the instrument panel air vents
and footwell air vents.

Select to distribute air through
the windshield air vents and
footwell air vents.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Climate Control
Recommended Settings for
Heating

Select to distribute air through
the windshield air vents. You can
also use this setting to defog or
clear the windshield of a thin covering of
ice. You can also increase the temperature
and fan speed to improve clearing.

•
•
•

HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE

Adjust the fan speed to the second
speed setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings.
Adjust the air distribution control to the
footwell and windshield air vents
position.

General Hints

Cooling the Interior Quickly

Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.

•

Note: A small amount of air may be felt
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.

•
•

Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.

Recommended Settings for
Cooling
•

Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.

•

Note: Keep the air intakes in front of the
windshield free from obstruction (such as
snow or leaves) to allow the climate control
system to function effectively.

•

•
•

Heating the Interior Quickly

•

Adjust the fan speed to the second
speed setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.
Adjust the air distribution control to the
instrument panel air vents position.

Vehicle Stationary for Extended
Periods During Extreme High
Ambient Temperatures

Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield
during humid weather, adjust the air
distribution control to the windshield air
vents position. Increase the temperature
and fan speed and press the A/C button to
improve clearing, if required.

•

Adjust the fan speed to the highest
speed setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
MAX A/C position.
Adjust the air distribution control to the
instrument panel air vents position.

Adjust the fan speed to the highest
speed setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
highest setting.
Adjust the air distribution control to the
footwell air vents position.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Apply the parking brake.
Move the transmission selector lever
to position P or neutral.
Adjust the temperature control to the
MAX A/C position.
Adjust the fan speed to the lowest
speed setting.

Climate Control
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather
•

•
•
•
•
•

Maximum Cooling Performance in
Instrument Panel or Instrument
Panel and Footwell Positions

Adjust the air distribution control to the
instrument panel and windshield air
vents positions.
Press the A/C button.
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.
Direct the instrument panel side air
vents toward the side windows.
Close the instrument panel vents.

•
•
•

Adjust the temperature control to the
lowest setting.
Press the A/C and recirculated air
buttons.
Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting initially and then adjust it to suit
the desired comfort level.

REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROLS

E175829

Fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in your vehicle. Adjust
to select the desired fan speed or switch off.

Temperature and air distribution control: Controls the temperature of the
air circulated in your vehicle. Adjust to select the desired temperature and
distribution. Cool air distributes through the top air vents and warm air distributes
through the footwell air vents.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Climate Control
Note: Switch the air conditioning on to cool
the air through the rear air vents.

Note: Do not clean the mirror glass or mirror
assembly with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.

HEATED WINDOWS AND
MIRRORS

Note: On vehicles without a heated exterior
mirror switch, they will turn on automatically
when you switch the heated rear window
on.

Heated Rear Window (If Equipped)

E72507

The heated rear window button is located
on the instrument panel. Press the button
to clear the heated rear window of thin ice
and fog. Press the button again to switch
the heated rear window off. It will turn off
automatically after a short period of time.
Note: Make sure that the engine is running
before switching the heated rear window
on.
Note: Do not use razor blades or sharp
objects to clean the inside of the heated rear
window. Do not use razor blades or sharp
objects to remove decals from of the inside
of the heated rear window. The vehicle
warranty does not cover damage to the
heated rear window grid lines.

Heated Exterior Mirrors

The heated exterior mirrors will clear the
mirror glass of thin ice and fog. They will
turn off automatically after a short period
of time.
Note: Do not use razor blades or sharp
objects to remove ice from the mirror glass
or attempt to adjust the mirror glass when
it is frozen in place. The vehicle warranty
does not cover damage to the mirror glass
or mirror assembly.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Seats
•

SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Do not recline the seat backrest too
far as this can cause the occupant
to slide under the safety belt,
resulting in serious injury in the event of a
crash.

•

Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seat backrest reclined too
far, can result in serious injury or
death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat backrest, with
your feet on the floor.

•
•
•

Do not place objects higher than the
seat backrest to reduce the risk of
serious injury in the event of a crash
or during heavy braking.

Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 inches
(25 centimeters) between your
breastbone and the airbag cover.
Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.

Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.

HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING
The adjustable head restraint is a
safety device. Whenever possible it
should be installed and correctly
adjusted when the seat is occupied. An
incorrectly adjusted head restraint may
provide reduced protection to an occupant
during certain rear impacts.
E68595

When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, safety belt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seat backrest more
than 30 degrees.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Seats
Removing the Head Restraint

The head restraint consists of:

WARNING
Do not remove the head restraint
from an occupied seat.
1.

Lift the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Remove the head restraint.

Installing the Head Restraint

E138642

Energy absorbing head restraint.

Steel stems.

Guide sleeve adjust and unlock
button.

Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.

WARNING
Install head restraints correctly to
help minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
1.

Align the steel stems into the guide
sleeves.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Push the head restraint down.

Adjusting the Head Restraint
WARNING
Adjust the head restraints for all
passengers before you drive your
vehicle. This will help minimize the
risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Do not adjust the head restraints when
your vehicle is moving.

MANUAL SEATS
Moving the Seat Backward or
Forward
WARNINGS
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seat backrest before
returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that
it has fully latched after returning the seat
backrest to its original position. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous if
you stop suddenly or have a crash.

Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible.
Raising the Head Restraint
Lift the head restraint up.

Do not adjust the driver seat when
your vehicle is moving. This may
result in sudden seat movement,
causing the loss of control of your vehicle.

Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Seats
Adjusting the Lumbar Support

WARNINGS
Make sure the driver seat fully locks
into place by rocking it backward and
forward.

E146386

1.
E177638

Rotate the handle clockwise or counter
clockwise to attain the desired lumbar
support.

Recline Adjustment

1. Lift the handle.
2. Move the seat backward or forward to
attain the desired position.
3. Release the handle.
Note: The driver seat has removable stop
bolts on the track to enable access to the
vehicle battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 213).

WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat backrest
when your vehicle is moving. This
may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control of
your vehicle.
Do not adjust the recliner from inside
your vehicle if the seat is unoccupied.
The seat back may move suddenly
and cause personal injury.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Seats
Adjusting the Armrest

E95256

1. Raise the armrest fully.
2. Lower the armrest to the stowed
position.
3. Raise the armrest to attain the desired
position.

E175474

1. Lift the handle.
2. Move the seat back backward or
forward to attain the desired position.
3. Release the handle.

POWER SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat when
your vehicle is moving.
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seat backrest before
returning it to the original position.
The driver seat has removable stop
bolts on the track to enable access
to the vehicle battery. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 213).

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Seats

E138647

Power Lumbar

REAR SEATS
WARNINGS
Do not use the bench seats as a bed
when your vehicle is moving. Failure
to follow this warning could result in
serious personal injury or death.
Do not place objects on a folded
seat. Hard objects may become
projectiles in a crash or sudden stop,
which may increase the risk of serious
personal injury.
Note: Rear seat arrangements vary
depending on the vehicle.

E138648

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Seats
Recline Adjustment

Removing Seats, 12 & 15 Passenger
Vehicles

WARNINGS
When reclining the seat backrest
forward and backward, take care not
to get your hands caught between
the seat backrest and the frame, catches
or mechanism. Failure to take care may
result in personal injury.

WARNINGS
Seats can weigh up to 132 lb (60 kg).
Do not attempt to lift or carry a seat
on your own.
Do not use the release handles to lift
or carry the seat.

Make sure that any cargo or objects
are not trapped behind the seat
backrest. Make sure the safety belts
are not trapped in any way when unfolding
the seat backrest up. Failure of an
occupant to be able to use a trapped
safety belt increases the risk of serious
personal injury or death.
Make sure that the seat backrest is
fully engaged in its catch. A seat
backrest which is not fully engaged
in its catch could move in the event of an
accident. This may result in serious
personal injury or death.

E172224

With the seat occupied, pull the lever or
strap to recline or raise the seat backrest.

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Seats
3. Pull the seat backward to release the
seat frame front catches.
4. Remove the seat.
Note: Two persons must carry out this
procedure.
Note: You can only remove seats that have
integral release handles.
Note: The seat back does not fold forward.

Installing the Seats
WARNINGS
Make sure that the floor catches are
free from foreign material before
installing the seats.

Make sure that you securely fasten
the seat catches when installing.
Check the latches are correctly
engaged by checking the red latch
indicators.

E173870

1. Pull the release handles up.
2. Tilt the seat forward to release the seat
frame rear catches.
E178062

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Seats
1. Align the seat frame front catches.
2. Push the seat forward to engage the
seat frame front catches.
3. Align the seat frame rear catches.
4. Allow the seat to drop under its own
weight for the last 6-8 in (15-20 cm).

100

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Point Locations

WARNINGS
Do not use the power points for
operating a cigar lighter element.
Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power points.
Run the engine for full capacity use of the
power points.
Note: Do not use the power points over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watt or a
fuse may blow.

E185878

Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.

Auxiliary Power Point locations may be:
• On the instrument panel.
• Inside the floor console storage
compartment.
• Inside the cargo area.

Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Note: Incorrect use of the power points can
cause damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.

Note: Do not keep electrical devices or
adaptors plugged in to the auxiliary power
point when not in use.

To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power points for longer
than necessary when the engine is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when your vehicle is in park
(P) for extended periods of time.

AC Power Point
WARNING
Do not use any extension cord with
the AC power point, since it will
defeat the safety protection design
provided by the cap and twist tab. Doing
so may cause the power point to overload
due to powering multiple devices that can
reach beyond the 150 watt load limit and
could result in fire or personal injury.

Note: The power point turns off after 30
minutes if you switched the ignition on
without the engine running.

101

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Auxiliary Power Points
•
•
•

Compressor-driven refrigerators.
Medical or measuring equipment that
must process precise data.
Appliances requiring an extremely
stable power supply, for example:
• Microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets.
• Touch-sensor lamps.

CIGAR LIGHTER (If Equipped)

E143941

Use the AC power point for powering
electrical devices that require up to 150
watts. You can find it under the parking
brake lever.
Note: Do not keep electrical devices or
adaptors plugged in to the AC power point
when not in use.
When the green indicator light, located on
the AC power point, is:
• On — AC power point is ready to supply
power.
• Off — AC power point is not ready to
supply power or you ignition is not
switched on.
• Flashing — AC power point is in fault
mode.

E103382

Press the element in to use the cigar
lighter. It will pop out automatically.
Note: Do not press and hold the cigar lighter
element.

If you exceed the 150 watts limit, then the
AC power point temporarily turns off.
The indicator light flashes if the power
point detects overloading, overheating, or
shorting conditions. For overloaded or
shorted conditions, unplug your device and
switch the ignition off then back on. For an
overheated condition, let the system cool
down and switch the ignition off then back
on.
The AC power point is not suitable for use
with all electrical devices, for example:
• Tube type televisions.
• Vacuum cleaners.
• Power tools.

102

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Storage Compartments
CUP HOLDERS
WARNINGS
Do not place hot drinks in the cup
holders when your vehicle is moving.
Make sure that cups placed in the
holders do not obstruct your vision
while driving.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Overhead Storage Compartments
Overhead Console

E171160

WARNING
Do not place heavy objects in the
overhead console. Heavy objects
may become projectiles in a crash or
sudden stop and may increase the risk of
serious injury.

E189357

BOTTLE HOLDER
WARNING
Do not place glass objects in the
bottle holder.

103

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
GENERAL INFORMATION

IGNITION SWITCH

WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine
speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or
other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.

E72128

0(off) - The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.

Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.

I (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to operate
while the engine is not running.

If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes.

Note: Do not leave the ignition key in
position I or II (without the engine running)
for too long to avoid vehicle battery losing
charge.
II (on) - All electrical circuits operational.
Warning lamps and indicators are
illuminated.

If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 miles
(8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. This
is because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.

III (start) - cranks the engine. Release the
key as soon as the engine starts.

STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE

The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.

Before starting the engine check
the following:
•

When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.

•
•
•

104

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
Make sure the parking brake is on.
Make sure the transmission is in park
(P).

Starting and Stopping the Engine
Flooded Engine

When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases, this helps to warm up the
engine. If the engine idle speed does not
slow down automatically, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.

Move the transmission selector lever
to position P.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
3. Start the engine.
Note: If the engine does not start, repeat
the cold or hot engine procedure.

Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Turn the ignition key to position II to
switch the ignition on.
3. Turn the ignition key to position III to
start your vehicle. Release the key
when the engine starts.
Note: You can only operate the starter for
a limited period of time, for example 10
seconds. The number of start attempts is
limited to approximately six. If you exceed
this limit, the system will not allow you to
try again until a period of time has elapsed,
for example 30 minutes.

STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE
WARNINGS
Do not use starting fluid, for example
ether, in the air intake system (see
air filter decal). Starting fluids could
cause immediate explosive damage to the
engine. Failure to follow this warning could
result in fire, serious personal injury or
death.

Engine Idle Speed after Starting

Do not add gasoline, gasohol, alcohol
or Kerosene to diesel fuel. This action
creates a serious fire hazard and will
result in poor engine performance. Engine
damage caused by the use of incorrect fuel
is not covered by the vehicle warranty.

The speed at which the engine idles
immediately after starting will adjust
automatically to minimize vehicle
emissions and maximize cabin comfort
and fuel economy.
The idle speed will vary depending on
certain factors. These include vehicle
component and ambient temperatures as
well as electrical and climate system
demands.

Note: Avoid shutting the engine down after
an extensive idling period. Drive your vehicle
for several miles with the engine at normal
operating temperatures under a moderate
load.

Cold or Hot Engine

Engine Glow Plugs

If the engine does not start within 10
seconds, wait for a short period and try
again.
If the engine does not start after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow the
flooded engine procedure.

The powertrain control and glow plug
control modules operate the glow plug
system. When you switch the ignition on
the glow plug control module immediately
energizes the glow plugs. The glow plug
control module using the engine coolant
temperature, barometric pressure sensor

If you have difficulty starting the engine
when the temperature is below -13°F
(-25°C), press the accelerator pedal to the
mid-way point of its travel and try again.

105

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
4. Release the key.
Note: You may need to crank the engine for
up to 10 seconds when the outside air
temperature is 5°F (-15°C) or below.

and the environmental temperature sensor
will determine how long the glow plugs
stay energized. The required time for the
glow plugs to remain energized will
decrease as the engine coolant
temperature, barometric pressure and the
environmental temperature increases.

Note: Engine power may be reduced for 15
seconds when the engine oil temperature
is -9°F (-23°C) or below. This is to allow
the turbocharger to be lubricated.

When you switch the ignition on, the glow
plug indicator lamp will illuminate if glow
plug heat is necessary as a starting aid.
Wait until the glow plug indicator lamp
turns off before starting the engine. The
lamp should always momentarily
illuminate when the engine is cold and you
switch the ignition on.

Note: If the engine fails to start after a
number of attempts, the system will not
allow you to operate the starter for a short
period of time, for example 30 minutes.

Failure to Start
If the engine does not crank with the
ignition key turned to position III while the
brake pedal is fully depressed, do the
following:

Cold Weather Operation
In cold weather below 32°F (0°C), the
engine may slowly increase to a higher idle
speed if left idling in park (P). As the engine
warms-up, the engine sound level
decreases due to the activation of
powertrain control module controlled
sound reduction features.

1. Switch the ignition off.
2. Release the brake pedal.
Note: Make sure the parking brake is fully
applied.

It is recommended that the engine block
heater be used for starting when the
temperature is -9°F (-23°C) or colder. See
Engine Block Heater (page 107).

3. Fully depress the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition key to position II and
wait until the glow plug indicator lamp
turns off.
Note: Do not press the accelerator pedal.

Note: Idling in cold weather does not heat
the engine to its normal operating
temperature. Long periods of idling,
especially in cold weather, can cause a
buildup of deposits which can cause engine
damage.

5. Turn the ignition key to position III until
the engine starts.
6. Release the key.

Starting a Cold or Hot Engine

DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER

Note: Do not press the accelerator pedal.

The filter forms part of the emissions
reduction system on your vehicle. It filters
harmful diesel particulates (soot) from the
exhaust gas.

1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Turn the ignition key to position II and
wait until the glow plug indicator lamp
turns off.
Note: Do not press the accelerator pedal.
3. Turn the ignition key to position III until
the engine starts.

106

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
Regeneration

You must carry out occasional trips with
the following conditions to assist the
regeneration process:
• Drive your vehicle in more favorable
conditions, which you will find at higher
vehicle speeds in normal driving, on a
main road or freeway for a minimum
of 20 minutes. This drive may include
short stops that will not affect the
regeneration process.
• Avoid prolonged idling and always
observe speed limits and road
conditions.
• Do not switch the ignition off.
• Select a suitable gear to ideally
maintain engine speed between 1500
and 3000 RPM.

WARNING
Do not park or idle your vehicle over
dry leaves, dry grass or other
combustible materials. The
regeneration process creates very high
exhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust
will radiate a considerable amount of heat
during and after regeneration and after you
have switched the engine off. This is a
potential fire hazard.
Note: Avoid running out of fuel.
Note: During regeneration at low speed or
engine idle, you may smell a hot metallic
odor and could notice a clicking metallic
sound. This is due to the high temperatures
reached during regeneration and is normal.

SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE

Note: Changes in the engine or exhaust
sound may be heard during the regeneration
process.

Vehicles With a Turbocharger
WARNING

Note: After you have switched your engine
off the fans may continue to run for a short
period of time.

Do not switch the engine off when it
is running at high speed. If you do, the
turbocharger will continue running
after the engine oil pressure has dropped
to zero. This will lead to premature
turbocharger bearing wear.

The diesel particulate filter on your vehicle
requires periodic regeneration to maintain
its correct function. Your vehicle will carry
out this process automatically.
If your journeys meet one of the following
conditions:
• You drive only short distances.
• You frequently switch the ignition on
and off.
• Your journeys contain a high level of
acceleration and deceleration.

Release the accelerator pedal. Wait until
the engine has reached idle speed and then
switch it off.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If
Equipped)

WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.

107

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
•

WARNINGS
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk
of electrical shock.

•
•

Do not fully close the hood, or allow
it to drop under its own weight when
using the engine block heater. This
could damage the power cable and may
cause an electrical short resulting in fire,
injury and property damage.

•

Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).

•

The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element (installed in the engine block) and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
electrical source.

Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.

Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.

We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
108

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuel and Refueling
•

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel
capless fuel system), do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.

•

Automotive fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or
mishandled.

•

Flow of fuel through a fuel pump
nozzle can produce static electricity.
This can cause a fire if you are filling
an ungrounded fuel container.
•

Fuel ethanol and gasoline may
contain benzene, which is a
cancer-causing agent.
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the filler neck.
Never smoke or use a cell phone while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.

•

Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
•

•

Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.

109

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
visible for hours.
Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead
to eye and respiratory tract irritation.
In severe cases, excessive or prolonged
breathing of fuel vapor can cause
serious illness and permanent injury.
Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with
water for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper
medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes
skin irritation.
Be particularly careful if you are taking
“Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin
contact could cause an adverse
reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious
personal injury or sickness may result.
If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly
wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately
if you experience an adverse reaction.

Fuel and Refueling
•

FUEL QUALITY - GASOLINE
Note: Use of any fuel other than
recommended fuel can cause powertrain
damage, impair the emission control system
or cause loss of vehicle performance. Any
damage to vehicle that is caused by use of
fuel not recommended will not be covered
under warranty.

•

Fuels containing metallic based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT)
Leaded fuel (The use of leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).

Octane Recommendations

Choosing the Right Fuel Without
a Flex Fuel Vehicle (If Equipped)
Use only UNLEADED gasoline or
UNLEADED gasoline blended with a
maximum of 85% ethanol (E-85) in your
Flex Fuel Vehicle (FFV). If your vehicle is
flex fuel capable, the fuel fill inlet will have
a yellow housing.

E161513

Do not use:
•
•
•

•

Do not be concerned if your engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it
knocks heavily under most driving
conditions while you are using fuel with the
recommended octane rating, see your
authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.

Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E-85 fuel.
Fuel with methanol.
Fuels containing metallic based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT)
Leaded fuel (The use of leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).

3.5L V6 EcoBoost
We recommend regular unleaded gasoline
with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some stations offer fuels posted as regular
with an octane rating below 87, particularly
in high altitude areas. We do not
recommend fuels with an octane rating
below 87. To provide improved
performance, we recommend premium
fuel for severe duty usage, such as trailer
tow.

Choosing the Right Fuel With a
Flex Fuel Vehicle (If Equipped)
Use only UNLEADED gasoline or
UNLEADED gasoline blended with a
maximum of 85% ethanol (E-85) in your
Flex Fuel Vehicle (FFV). If your vehicle is
flex fuel capable, it will have a yellow bezel
placed over the fuel fill inlet.
Do not use:
•
•

Fuels containing more than 85%
ethanol or E-100 fuel.
Fuel with methanol.

110

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuel and Refueling
3.7L Engine

Note: Do not blend used engine oil with
diesel fuel under any circumstances.
Blending used oil with the fuel will
significantly increase your vehicle’s exhaust
emissions and reduce engine life due to
increased internal wear.

We recommend regular unleaded gasoline
with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some stations offer fuels posted as regular
with an octane rating below 87, particularly
in high altitude areas. We do not
recommend fuels with an octane rating
below 87.

Fuel Requirements - Choosing The
Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated
Where Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel
Is Not Required

FUEL QUALITY - DIESEL

Use only a diesel engine configured for use
with high sulfur diesel fuel in markets with
diesel fuel that has sulfur content greater
than 15 ppm. Using low sulfur diesel fuel
(16–500 ppm) or high sulfur diesel fuel
(greater than 500 ppm) in a diesel engine
designed to use only ultra-low sulfur diesel
fuel may result in damage to engine
emission control devices and the
after-treatment system, potentially
rendering your vehicle inoperable.

Fuel Requirements - Choosing the
Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated
Where Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel
is Required (United
States/Canada/Puerto Rico/U.S.
Virgin Islands and Other Locales)
WARNINGS
Only use Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel fuel
(ULSD) containing a maximum of 15
ppm sulfur and up to 20% biodiesel
(B20). These fuels should meet the diesel
specifications defined by American Society
for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D975 for
diesel and by ASTM D7467 for B6-B20
blends, or an equivalent local market
specification.

For the engine to operate reliably on low
sulfur or high sulfur diesel fuel, the engine
must be a factory built high sulfur engine
(available as a dealer order option for
select markets) or an ultra-low sulfur
diesel fuel configured engine that has been
retrofitted for high sulfur diesel fuel using
Ford Motor Company dealer service parts.
Failure to use retrofit components other
than those available through your
authorized dealer will result in coolant
system damage, engine overheating,
selective catalyst reduction system or
diesel particulate filter damage and
possible base engine damage.

Do not mix diesel with oil, kerosene,
paraffin, gasoline or other liquids to
diesel. This can cause damage to the
fuel system.
Do not use home heating oil,
agricultural fuel, raw fats, oils, waste
cooking greases, biodiesel fuels
greater than 20% or any diesel fuel not
intended for highway use.

Vehicles with engines configured for use
with high sulfur diesel fuel are only
available for sale in countries where
ultra-low sulfur diesel fuel is generally not
available or mandated by the government.
Vehicles originally sold in a ultra-low sulfur
diesel fuel market that are subsequently

The vehicle warranty will not cover
damage caused by using an improper
type of fuel or fuel additive.

111

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuel and Refueling
exported to non ultra-low sulfur diesel fuel
markets will need to be retrofitted (at the
customer’s expense using Ford authorized
dealer service parts) in order to be reliably
operated on non ultra-low sulfur diesel
fuel.

To help achieve acceptable engine
performance and durability when using
biodiesel in your vehicle:
• Confirm the biodiesel content of the
fuel to be B20 (20% biodiesel) or less
by checking the label on the fuel pump.
• Only use biodiesel fuel of good quality
that complies with applicable industry
standards ASTM D975 for diesel and
ASTM D7467 for B6-B20 blends.
• Follow the recommended service
maintenance intervals. See Normal
Scheduled Maintenance (page 443).
• Do not store biodiesel fuel in the fuel
tank for more than one month.
• Do not use raw oils, fats or waste
cooking greases.

Biodiesel
You may operate your vehicle on diesel
fuels containing up to 20% biodiesel, also
known as B20.
Biodiesel fuel is a chemically converted
product from renewable fuel sources, such
as vegetable oils, animal fats and waste
cooking greases.

System Messages
Message

LOW FUEL PRESSURE

Action and Description

Consider changing brands or reducing biodiesel content if
you have cold temperature fuel gelling issues or this message
frequently appears.
Biodiesel content is often indicated with
the letter B followed by the percent of
biodiesel in the fuel. For example, B20
indicates a fuel containing 20% biodiesel.
Ask the service station attendant to
confirm the biodiesel content of a diesel
fuel if you do not see a label on the fuel
pump.

Use of biodiesel in concentrations greater
than 20% may cause damage to your
vehicle, including engine and/or exhaust
after-treatment hardware (exhaust
catalyst and particulate filter) failures.
When using biodiesel in concentrations
greater than 20%, this can also cause fuel
filter restrictions that may result in a lack
of power or damage to fuel system
components, including fuel pump and fuel
injector failures. See Special Operating
Conditions Scheduled Maintenance
(page 445). .

Biodiesel fuels degrade more easily than
diesel fuels not containing biodiesel and
should not be stored in the fuel tank for
more than one month. If you plan to park
or store your vehicle for more than one
month, then you should empty your vehicle
fuel tank of biodiesel fuel. You should fill
the tank with a pure petroleum-based
diesel fuel and run your vehicle for a
minimum of 30 minutes.

Look for a label on the fuel pump to
confirm the amount of biodiesel contained
in a diesel fuel. Biodiesel fuel blends with
greater than 5% must be labeled.

112

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuel and Refueling
If you intend to store your vehicle for more
than two months, we recommend that you
seek advice from an authorized dealer.

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.

Note: Degraded or oxidized biodiesel can
damage fuel system seals and plastics and
corrode steel parts.

If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel
to restart the engine. If your vehicle is
out of fuel and on a steep slope, more
fuel may be required.
• You may need to switch the ignition
from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to
pump the fuel from the tank to the
engine. When restarting, cranking time
takes a few seconds longer than
normal.

During cold weather, if you have problems
operating on biodiesel, you may need to
use a diesel fuel with lower biodiesel
content, try another brand, or discontinue
the use of biodiesel.

Diesel Fuel Additives
It should not be necessary to add any
aftermarket additives to your fuel if you
use a high quality diesel fuel that conforms
to ASTM industry specifications.
Aftermarket additives can damage the fuel
injector system or engine.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling
an ungrounded fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.

Use Motorcraft® cetane booster or an
equivalent cetane booster additive if you
suspect fuel has low cetane. Use
Motorcraft® anti-gel & performance
improver or an equivalent additive if there
is fuel gelling during cold weather.
Do not use alcohol-based additives to
improve cetane quality, to prevent fuel
gelling or any other use. The use of alcohol
additives may result in damage to the fuel
injectors and system.
Your warranty may not cover repairs
needed to correct the effects of using an
aftermarket product that does not meet
Ford specifications in your fuel.

Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel
container or an aftermarket funnel
into the fuel system filler neck. This
may damage the fuel system filler neck or
its seal and cause fuel to run onto the
ground.

FUEL FILLER FUNNEL
LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is located in the under
seat storage compartment.

113

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuel and Refueling
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the plastic funnel from the
fuel tank filler pipe opening.
5. Replace the fuel tank filler cap and
close the fuel tank filler door.
6. Clean the plastic funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or properly dispose
of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.

WARNINGS
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
Do not dispose of fuel in the
household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized
waste disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, use the plastic funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page ?).

CATALYTIC CONVERTER

Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
they will not work with the capless fuel
system and can damage it.

WARNING
Do not park or idle your vehicle over
dry leaves, dry grass or other
combustible materials. The exhaust
will radiate a considerable amount of heat
during use, and after you have switched
the engine off. This is a potential fire
hazard.

Note: Capless fuel systems do not have a
fuel tank filler cap.
1.

Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
it engages and remove the fuel tank
filler cap.

Driving with a Catalytic Converter
WARNINGS
Avoid running out of fuel.
Do not crank the engine for long
periods.
Do not run the engine when a spark
plug lead is disconnected.
Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See
Jump Starting the Vehicle (page
177).
Do not switch the ignition off when
driving.

E156223

2. Insert the plastic funnel into the fuel
tank filler pipe opening.

114

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuel and Refueling
Continued driving without refilling the fluid
will result in:
• Vehicle speed being limited. Prior to
this occurring a message will appear in
the information display.
• Further vehicle operation without
refilling the diesel exhaust fluid will
cause the engine to run at idle speed.

SELECTIVE CATALYTIC
REDUCTION SYSTEM
WARNINGS
You must refill the diesel exhaust
fluid tank when it is low. If it is not
refilled, vehicle speed will be limited
to 50 mph (80 km/h). Drive with caution
and refill the fluid tank as soon as possible.

Note: You must add a minimum of 3.2 qt
(3 L) for your vehicle to exit the run at idle
speed mode.

If the diesel exhaust fluid becomes
contaminated your vehicle will be
limited to idle speed operation.
Replace the fluid immediately.

Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank
WARNINGS
Do not allow diesel exhaust fluid to
come into contact with eyes, skin or
clothing. Should the fluid come into
contact with eyes, flush them with plenty
of water and contact a physician. Clean
affected skin with soap and water. If
swallowed, drink plenty of water and
contact a physician immediately.

Tampering with or disabling the
selective catalytic reduction system
will result in severe vehicle
performance limitation. Vehicle speed will
be limited to 6 mph (10 km/h).
Your vehicle has a selective catalytic
reduction system to help reduce exhaust
emission levels by injecting diesel exhaust
fluid into the exhaust system.

Refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank in
a well-ventilated area. When
removing the tank cap or a diesel
exhaust fluid container cap, ammonia
vapor may escape. Ammonia vapor is an
irritant to the eyes, skin and mucous
membranes. Inhaling ammonia vapor can
cause burning to the eyes, throat and nose
resulting in watering eyes or severe
coughing.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level
For the system to operate correctly, you
must maintain the diesel exhaust fluid
level.
A warning lamp will illuminate
when the diesel exhaust fluid
E163176
level is low and needs to be
refilled. See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 74).

Do not put diesel exhaust fluid in the
fuel tank. This can cause engine
damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.

The warning lamp will illuminate
approximately 500 mi (800 km) before
the diesel exhaust fluid tank is empty. Refill
the tank as soon as possible.
Note: If the warning lamp illuminates when
your vehicle is moving, and the diesel
exhaust fluid is at a sufficient level, this
indicates a system malfunction. Have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.

115

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuel and Refueling
Note: Immediately wash off any diesel
exhaust fluid that has spilled on to a painted
surface with soapy water.
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank
Using a Fuel Station Pump
Filling the diesel exhaust fluid tank using
a pump is similar to a refuelling your
vehicle. The diesel exhaust fluid pump
nozzle will shut off automatically when the
tank is full.
Note: Some filling stations utilize a
magnetic mechanism in the pump nozzle
that may prevent refilling the diesel exhaust
fluid tank. To overcome this issue you will
need to locate another filling station or use
a refill container.

E172245

Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank
Using a Container

The diesel exhaust fluid tank filler neck is
located below the fuel filler neck and has
a blue cap. Fill the tank using a fluid pump
at a diesel exhaust fluid filling station or a
diesel exhaust fluid container. We
recommend Motorcraft® diesel exhaust
fluid, the containers are spill proof and stop
the flow of fluid when the tank is full. The
capacity of the diesel exhaust fluid tank is
21 liters.

The following procedure applies to
Motorcraft diesel exhaust fluid or similar
fluid containers. Always follow the
manufacturer's instructions.
1.

2.
3.

)

E163354
E163354

You must only use diesel exhaust fluid that
is certified by the American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Note: You must open the fuel filler door
before you can open the diesel exhaust fluid
filler door.

116

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Remove the diesel exhaust fluid
container cap. Place the spout on to
the container and tighten it until you
feel a strong resistance.
Remove the diesel exhaust fluid tank
filler cap.
Insert the spout in to the filler neck until
the seal on the spout seats on to the
filler neck. Pour the fluid in to the tank.
When the tank is full the fluid will stop
flowing automatically.
Return the container to the vertical
position slightly below the diesel
exhaust fluid filler neck. Allow any fluid
remaining in the spout to drain back in
to the container.
Remove the spout from the diesel
exhaust fluid filler neck. Replace the
diesel exhaust fluid tank cap.

Fuel and Refueling
6. Remove the spout from the diesel
exhaust fluid container and replace the
cap.
Note: If there is diesel exhaust fluid left in
the container retain it for later use. The
spout is re-useable. Wash the spout with
clean water prior to storage. Do not use the
diesel exhaust fluid spout with any other
fluid.

Note: If the vehicle speed becomes limited
or the engine will only run at idle speed,
normal vehicle operation will not resume
until you have the system repaired. To
service a contaminated or inoperative
system, see an authorized dealer.
Note: You must add a minimum of 3.2 qt
(3 L) for your vehicle to exit the run at idle
speed mode.

Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank in
Cold Climates

Diesel Exhaust Fluid Guidelines
•

Diesel exhaust fluid may freeze if the
ambient temperature is below 12°F (-11°C).
Your vehicle has a preheating system
which allows diesel exhaust fluid to
operate below 12°F (-11°C). If you do not
use your vehicle for an extended period
when the ambient temperature is below
12°F (-11°C), the fluid in the tank may
freeze. If the tank is overfilled and the fluid
freezes it may damage the tank. This is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.

•
•
•
•
•

Contaminated Diesel Exhaust
Fluid or Inoperative Selective
Catalytic Reduction System

•
•

If the system becomes
contaminated or inoperative, the
E163176
diesel exhaust fluid warning
lamp will illuminate and a message will
appear in the information display.

Do not put diesel exhaust fluid in the
vehicle fuel tank.
Do not overfill the diesel exhaust fluid
tank.
Do not dilute diesel exhaust fluid with
water or any other liquid.
Do not re-use a diesel exhaust fluid
container.
Do not store in direct sunlight.
Store at temperatures between 23°F
(-5°C) and 68°F (20°C).
Do not store a diesel exhaust fluid
container in your vehicle.
Diesel exhaust fluid is non-flammable,
non-toxic, colorless and water-soluble.

Approximate Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Usage
The chart below illustrates the
approximate diesel exhaust fluid usage for
the given distances traveled under various
driving conditions. Usage may vary
depending on:
• Driving style.
• Towing a trailer.
• Vehicle load.
• Engine idling time.

Continued driving without replacing the
fluid or not having the system repaired will
result in:
• Vehicle speed being limited. Prior to
this occurring a message will appear in
the information display.
• Further vehicle operation without
replacing contaminated diesel exhaust
fluid will cause the engine to run at idle
speed.

117

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuel and Refueling

Driving conditions

Approximate diesel exhaust fluid usage per
tank mi (km)

Primary trailer tow, aggressive driving

1100–4100 (1,770–6,600)

City drive

4100–6500 (6,600–10,460)

Steady highway drive

6500–10500 (10,460–16,900)
Do not attempt to start the engine if you
have refueled the fuel tank with the
incorrect fuel. This can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty. Have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer
immediately.

REFUELING
WARNINGS
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the filler neck.
Never smoke or use a cell phone while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.

If you use a high pressure spray to wash
your vehicle, only spray the fuel tank filler
door briefly from a distance not less than
8 in (200 mm).

Do not attempt to refuel using a fuel
pump nozzle that does not fit
through both closing flaps of the
capless fuel filler neck.
Wait at least 10 seconds before
removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into
the fuel tank.
Stop refueling after the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
second time. Failure to follow this
will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank
and could lead to fuel overflowing.
Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when
refueling.

E162791

Note: The front door must be open before
you can open and close the fuel tank filler
door.

Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.

Apply the parking brake and switch the
ignition off.
2. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
it engages.

118

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuel and Refueling

E139202

Note: When you insert the correct size fuel
pump nozzle a spring loaded inhibitor will
open. This helps to avoid refueling with the
incorrect fuel.

E162792

5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within
the area shown.

3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it
resting on the cover of the fuel tank
filler pipe opening.

E154765

E139203

6. Slightly raise the fuel pump nozzle and
remove it slowly.
7. Close the fuel tank filler door.

4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position
B during refueling. Holding the fuel
pump nozzle in position A may affect
the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel
pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.

119

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuel and Refueling
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System

4. After you are done pumping fuel, slowly
remove the fuel filler nozzle, allow
about five to ten seconds after
pumping fuel before removing the fuel
filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel
to drain back into the fuel tank and not
spill onto the vehicle.
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if
overfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill the
tank to the point that the fuel is able to
bypass the fuel filler nozzle. The overfilled
fuel may run down the drain located below
and in front of the fuel filler door.

WARNING
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door, do not refuel
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
When fueling your vehicle:
1.

Apply the parking brake and switch the
ignition off.
2. Open the fuel filler door.

If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed,
a service engine warning lamp may appear
on the instrument cluster.
At the next opportunity, do the following:
1. Safely pull off the road.
2. Put the vehicle in P (Park) and turn the
ignition off.
3. Open the fuel filler door and remove
any visible debris from the fuel fill
opening.
4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the
fuel fill funnel provided with the vehicle
several times to allow the inlet to close
properly. This will dislodge any debris
preventing the inlet from sealing.

E156032

3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully
into the fuel system, and leave the
nozzle fully inserted to open both doors
until you are done pumping. Hold
handle higher during insertion for easier
access.

If this action corrects the problem, the
warning lamp may not reset immediately.
It may take several driving cycles for the
warning lamp to turn off. A driving cycle
consists of an engine start-up (after four
or more hours with the engine off) followed
by city or highway driving.

FUEL CONSUMPTION
Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge
indicates empty. The amount of usable
fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range.

E154765

120

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuel and Refueling
•

•

The usable capacity of the fuel tank is
the amount of fuel that can be added
into the tank after the gauge indicates
empty
The advertised capacity is the total fuel
tank size. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 265). It is the
combined usable capacity plus the
empty reserve.
Due to the empty reserve, you may not
be able to refuel the full amount of the
advertised capacity of the fuel tank
even when the fuel gauge reads empty.

3. After at least 3 to 5 tank fill ups, fill the
fuel tank and record the current
odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy by dividing
miles traveled by gallons used (For
Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then
divide by kilometers traveled).
Keep a record for at least 1 month and
record the type of driving (city or highway).
This provides an accurate estimate of the
vehicle’s fuel economy under current
driving conditions. Additionally, keeping
records during summer and winter show
how temperature impacts fuel economy.
In general, lower temperatures mean lower
fuel economy.

Filling the Tank
For consistent results when filling the fuel
tank:
•

•

Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine
is left running.
Use the same fill rate
(low-medium-high) each time the tank
is filled.
Allow no more than two automatic
click-offs when filling.

Conditions
•

•

Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
•

Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the
first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers) of
driving (this is your engine’s break-in
period); a more accurate measurement is
obtained after 2000 miles - 3000 miles
(3200 kilometers - 4800 kilometers). Also,
fuel expense, frequency of fill ups or fuel
gauge readings are not accurate ways to
measure fuel economy.

•
•

•

Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the
amount of fuel added.

121

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
speed.
Carrying unnecessary weight may
reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400
pounds [180 kilograms] of weight
carried).
Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks) may reduce fuel economy.
Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures during the first 8–10
miles (12–16 kilometers) of driving.
Driving on flat terrain offers improved
fuel economy as compared to driving
on hilly terrain.

Fuel and Refueling
•

•

Transmissions give their best fuel
economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure
on the gas pedal.
Close windows for high speed driving.

If you use parts other than Ford, Motorcraft
or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance
replacements, or for service of
components affecting emission control,
such non-Ford parts should be the
equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company
parts in performance and durability.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

Illumination of any of the following warning
lamps, indicators or vehicle symptoms
could indicate that the emission control
system is not working correctly.
• Coolant temperature warning lamp.
• Charging system warning lamp.
• Service engine soon indicator.
• Fluid leaks.
• Strange odors.
• Excessive exhaust smoke.
• Loss of engine power.

WARNINGS
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle
in dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system,
which can start a fire.
An incorrectly operating or damaged
exhaust system may result in entry
of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger compartment.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have an authorized dealer inspect
your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if
you smell exhaust fumes.

Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement.

Your vehicle has various emission control
components and a catalytic converter that
will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards.
To make sure that the catalytic converter
and other emission control components
continue to work correctly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving, especially at high
speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information carried out
according to the specified schedule.

Please see your warranty information for
complete details.

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has an on-board diagnostics
system (OBD-II) that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system
protects the environment by making sure
that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The
OBD-II system also assists an authorized
dealer in correctly servicing your vehicle.

The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.

122

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuel and Refueling
Readiness for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
Testing

When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate.

Some state/provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.

Examples of temporary malfunctions are:
• The vehicle has run out of fuel.
• Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel.
• The engine may misfire or run rough.
• The fuel filler door may not have been
closed correctly. See Refueling (page
118).
• Driving through deep water. The
electrical system may be wet.

If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, you may need to have
your vehicle serviced. See On-Board
Diagnostics (OBD-II).
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, your vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.

You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel, correctly closing the fuel
filler door or letting the electrical system
dry out. After three driving cycles without
these or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the service engine soon indicator
should not illuminate. A driving cycle
consists of a cold engine startup followed
by mixed city or highway driving. No
additional vehicle service is required.

If the vehicle engine or transmission has
just been serviced or the battery has
recently run out of charge or been
replaced, the OBD-II system may indicate
that your vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing. To determine if the vehicle is ready
for I/M testing, switch the ignition on for 15
seconds without cranking the engine. If the
service engine soon indicator flashes on
and off eight times, it means that your
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if the
service engine soon indicator illuminates
and remains on, it means that your vehicle
is ready for I/M testing.

If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness, and
lead to more costly repairs.

The OBD-II system monitors the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.

123

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuel and Refueling
If your vehicle is not ready for I/M testing,
you may need to:
• Drive on an expressway or highway for
a steady 15 minutes, followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
• Allow your vehicle to sit for at least
eight hours without starting the engine.
Then complete the above driving cycle.

Diesel Particulate Filter Maintenance
Failure to carry out active or operator
commanded regeneration when advised
could result in a clogged diesel particulate
filter. If the diesel particulate filter fills
beyond the regeneration threshold, your
vehicle will disable the ability for active
and operator commanded regeneration.
This could result in irreversible damage to
the diesel particulate filter requiring
replacement that the Ford Warranty may
not cover. If your vehicle is not fitted with
operator commanded regeneration, check
with an authorized dealer for availability.

The engine must warm up to its normal
operating temperature. Do not switch the
ignition off until the above driving cycle is
complete. If your vehicle is still not ready
for I/M testing, you will have to repeat the
above driving cycle.

Passive Regeneration

Diesel Exhaust System: Oxidation
Catalyst And Diesel Particulate
Filter System

During passive regeneration, the exhaust
system temperature and constituents
automatically clean the diesel particulate
filter, or reduce the soot level, by oxidizing
the soot. Cleaning occurs naturally during
normal engine operating conditions, at
varying levels depending on driving
conditions.

Your vehicle is fitted with a diesel
particulate filter. The diesel particulate
filter is an inline filter in the exhaust system
that reduces carbon emissions by trapping
exhaust particles before they reach the
tailpipe. The diesel particulate filter looks
similar to a traditional exhaust catalyst,
except it is larger, and is part of the exhaust
system under the vehicle. The filter couples
to a diesel oxidation catalyst that reduces
the amount of harmful exhaust emitted
from the tailpipe. As soot gathers in the
system it begins to restrict the filter. The
soot that gathers inside the filter is cleaned
in two different ways, passive regeneration
and active regeneration. Both methods
occur automatically and require no actions
from the driver. During either one of these
regeneration methods, you may notice a
change in exhaust tone. At certain times,
the information display will display various
messages related to the diesel particulate
filter.

Active Regeneration
Once the diesel particulate filter is full of
exhaust particles, the engine control
module will command the exhaust system
to clean the diesel particulate filter through
a process called active regeneration. Active
regeneration requires the engine computer
to raise the exhaust temperature to
eliminate the particles. During cleaning,
the particles convert to harmless gasses.
Once cleaned the diesel particulate filter
will then be ready to continue trapping
exhaust particles.
The regeneration process operates more
efficiently when you drive your vehicle at
a steady speed of 30 mph (48 km/h) or
above for approximately 20 minutes to
complete the process. The frequency and
duration of regeneration will fluctuate by
how you drive your vehicle, outside air
temperature, and altitude. For most driving,

124

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuel and Refueling
When the engine control module detects
that the diesel particulate filter is nearly
full of particulates, and you are not driving
your vehicle in a manner to allow effective
automatic cleaning, the information
display will show the following messages
as a reminder for you to drive in a manner
to clean the diesel particulate filter. If you
drive your vehicle in a manner to allow
effective automatic cleaning, the
information display will show a cleaning
exhaust filter message, which is the normal
regeneration process.

regeneration frequency will vary from
100 mi (160 km) - 310 mi (500 km)
between occurrences and each occurrence
will last between 10 and 20 minutes. You
can usually reduce the duration of
regeneration if you maintain a constant
speed above 30 mph (48 km/h).

System Messages
Message

Action and Description

Exhaust filter overloaded You must maintain the diesel particulate filter for it to
continue to function correctly. Drive in a manner to clean the
Drive to clean
diesel particulate filter. Do not disregard a system maintenance message. The Ford Warranty may not cover damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of disregarding these
messages.
Exhaust filter at limit
Clean now

You must maintain the diesel particulate filter for it to
continue to function correctly. Drive in a manner to clean the
diesel particulate filter. Do not disregard a system maintenance message. The Ford Warranty may not cover damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of disregarding these
messages.
Operator Commanded Regeneration
(If Equipped)

You can also choose operator commanded
regeneration to clean the exhaust system
at this point. See the following Operator
Commanded Regeneration.

If your vehicle is operated with significant
stationary operation, low speed drive
cycles less than 25 mph (40 km/h), short
drive cycles, drive time less than 15 minutes
or the vehicle does not fully warm up,
passive and active regeneration may not
sufficiently clean the diesel particulate
filter system. Operator commanded
regeneration allows you to manually start
diesel particulate filter cleaning while the
engine is idling. If you are not sure whether
your vehicle is fitted with this feature,
contact an authorized dealer.

If you are not able to drive in a manner that
allows effective automatic cleaning or you
choose to carry out regeneration of the
diesel particulate filter while the engine is
idling, then operator commanded
regeneration must be carried out.

125

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuel and Refueling
When to Carry Out Operator Commanded
Regeneration

•

Use the operator commanded
regeneration feature when the following
message appears in the information
display and:

•

You are not able to drive in a manner
that allows effective automatic
cleaning.
You choose to manually start cleaning
the diesel particulate filter while the
engine is idling.

System Message
Message

Action and Description

Exhaust filter overloaded You must maintain the diesel particulate filter for it to
continue to function correctly. Do not disregard a system
Drive to clean
maintenance message. The Ford Warranty may not cover
damage caused to your vehicle as a result of disregarding
this message.
•

Operator Commanded Regeneration
Precautions and Safe Exhaust Position

•

WARNING
Failure to comply with the following
instructions for operator
commanded regeneration may result
in fire, serious injury, death or property
damage.

Make sure all fluids are at the correct
levels.
Make sure that the louvers located at
the tip of the exhaust are clear of any
obstructions as they are used to
introduce fresh air into the tailpipe to
cool the exhaust gas as it leaves.

How to Start Operator Commanded
Regeneration
WARNING

Before you start operator commanded
regeneration, do the following:
• You must park your vehicle outside of
any structure.
• Move the gearshift lever to park (P)
with the parking brake set on stable,
level ground.
• Your vehicle must be 9.8 ft (3 m) 16.4 ft (5 m) away from any
obstructions and must be away from
materials that can easily combust or
melt, for example, paper, leaves,
petroleum products, fuels, plastics and
other dry organic material.
• Make sure there is a minimum of 3.2 gal
(12 L) of fuel in the fuel tank.

Stay clear of exhaust tip during
regeneration. You or others can be
burned.
Note: You cannot use the operator
commanded regeneration until the diesel
particulate filter load percentage has
reached 100 percent. The diesel particulate
filter load percentage will fluctuate up and
down when driving your vehicle due to active
and passive regenerations.
Note: During the use of operator
commanded regeneration, you may observe
a light amount of white smoke. This is
normal.

126

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuel and Refueling
Using the Information Display

You cannot use the operator
commanded regeneration if the
service engine soon light is
illuminated.

You can start operator commanded
regeneration using the information display.
See General Information (page 78).

To start operator commanded regeneration, run the engine at normal operating
temperature and scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

Settings

Press the OK button.

Exhaust Filter

Press the OK button.

Full
OK = Cleaning
Select one of the following:
Exhaust Filter
Full

Exhaust Filter
Overloaded

Press the OK button and then follow the prompts regarding
exhaust position as needed to initiate operator commanded
regeneration. Be sure to understand each prompt. If you are
not sure what is being asked by each prompt, contact an
authorized dealer. The display will confirm the operation has
started and when it has finished.
Press the OK button and then follow the prompts regarding
exhaust position as needed to initiate operator commanded
regeneration. Be sure to understand each prompt. If you are
not sure what is being asked by each prompt, contact an
authorized dealer. The display will confirm the operation has
started and when it has finished.

If the diesel particulate filter is near or at saturation, a message requesting
permission to initiate filter cleaning will display.
Message

Exhaust Filter
At Limit

Action and Description

127

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuel and Refueling
Once operator commanded regeneration
starts, engine rpm will rise to
approximately 2,000 - 2,500 rpm and the
cooling fan will increase speed; you will
hear a change in audible sound due to the
fan and engine speed increase.

regeneration is complete. Do not reposition
the vehicle over materials that could burn
until the exhaust system has had sufficient
time to cool. Depending on the amount of
soot collected by the diesel particulate
filter, ambient temperature, and altitude,
operator commanded regeneration may
last up to 30 minutes.

It is not necessary to open the hood on the
engine compartment. Once operator
commanded regeneration is complete, the
engine rpm and fan will return to normal
idling. The exhaust system will remain very
hot for several minutes even after

When the system is at the point
of over saturation, the service
engine soon light will illuminate
and the following message will appear.

System Message
Message

Exhaust filter over limit
Service now

Action and Description

You will not be able to allow cleaning. You must have your
vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer.
sufficiently clean the diesel particulate
filter system. You can switch off automatic
regeneration until better driving conditions
are available, for example steady high
driving. You can then switch automatic
regeneration back on to clean the diesel
particulate filter.

Operator Commanded Regeneration
with Automatic Regeneration Control
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle is operated with significant
stationary operation, low speed drive
cycles less than 25 mph (40 km/h), short
drive cycles, drive time less than 15 minutes
or the vehicle does not fully warm up,
passive and active regeneration may not

Switching the Automatic Regeneration Control On and Off
To switch the automatic regeneration control on and off, scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

Information

Press the OK button.

Driver Assist

Press the OK button.

Auto Exh.Clean

Uncheck the box to switch automatic regeneration off.
Check the box to switch automatic regeneration on.

When you switch automatic regeneration off, one of the following warning
messages may be displayed.

128

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuel and Refueling
Message

Action and Description

Exhaust Filter Full Clean
Soon

The diesel particulate filter is full and you should switch the
automatic regeneration control on as soon as possible.

Exhaust Filter Overloaded Clean Now

The diesel particulate filter is overloaded you must switch
the automatic regeneration control on as soon as possible.

Exhaust filter at limit
Clean now

You must clean the diesel particulate filter immediately.
Failing to do so would cause the diesel particulate filter to
become blocked.
In both cases, the engine control system
will set a service light to inform you to have
your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.

How to Interrupt or Cancel Operator
Commanded Regeneration
If you need to cancel the operator
commanded regeneration, press the brake
pedal or switch the ignition off to stop the
procedure. Depending on the amount of
time you allowed the operator
commanded regeneration to operate, soot
may not have had sufficient time to be
eliminated, but the exhaust system and
exhaust gas may still be hot. If you shut
your vehicle off during operator
commanded regeneration, you will notice
turbo flutter. This is a normal consequence
caused by shutting off a diesel engine
during boosted operation and is considered
normal.

If there are any issues with the diesel
particulate filter, the engine control system
will turn on a service light to inform you to
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
Powertrain fault indicator.

Service engine soon indicator.

Resonator and Tailpipe Assembly
Maintenance

Filter Service and Maintenance

WARNINGS
Failure to maintain the functional
holes, in the tailpipe section of the
exhaust, clean and free of debris or
foreign material may result in the holes
becoming blocked or plugged. Do not
modify or remove the tail-pipe section.
Blocked or plugged holes or
removal/modification of the system could
result in elevated exhaust gas
temperatures which may result in
vehicle/property damage or personal
injury.

Over time, a slight amount of ash will build
up in the diesel particulate filter, which is
not removed during the regeneration
process. The filter may need to be removed
for ash cleaning at approximately
119900 mi (193,000 km) or greater, actual
mileage can vary greatly depending upon
engine and vehicle operating conditions.
The filter may need to be replaced at
approximately 248500 mi (400,000 km)
depending upon vehicle operating
conditions.

129

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuel and Refueling
Emission Control System Laws

WARNINGS
The normal operating temperature
of the exhaust system is very high.
Never work around or attempt to
repair any part of the exhaust system until
it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the diesel oxidation
catalytic converter and/or the diesel
particulate filter (DPF). The diesel
oxidation catalytic converter and/or the
DPF heats up to a high temperature after
only a short period of engine operation and
can stay hot even after the engine is turned
off. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.

WARNING
Do not remove or alter the original
equipment floor covering or
insulation between it and the metal
floor of the vehicle. The floor covering and
insulation protect occupants of the vehicle
from the engine and exhaust system heat
and noise. On vehicles with no original
equipment floor covering insulation, do not
carry passengers in a manner that permits
prolonged skin contact with the metal
floor. Provide adequate insulation. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in
fire or personal injury.

Note: Additions of aftermarket devices or
modifications to the exhaust system can
reduce the effectiveness of the exhaust
system as well as cause damage to the
exhaust system or engine. These actions
may also affect your vehicle’s warranty. See
the Warranty Guide for more information.

In the U.S. federal law and certain state
laws prohibit removing or rendering
inoperative emission control system(s).
Similar federal or provincial laws may
apply in Canada. Ford recommends
against any vehicle modification without
determining applicable law.

The diesel resonator tail-pipe assembly is
a uniquely functioning device that
accompanies the diesel particulate filter
assembly. The tail-pipe assembly serves
multiple functions. First, it serves as an
acoustic device to attenuate exhaust noise.
Second, it provides an exit path for the
exhaust from your vehicle. It also helps
control the temperature of the exhaust
during diesel particulate filter regeneration
events. The visible holes in each leg of the
twin tip and the holes under the shield just
inboard of the right rear tire(s) are
functional. You need to keep the holes
clear of mud, debris or foreign material to
maintain proper function of the exhaust
system. Clean and remove debris or foreign
material if present as needed. Spraying
with a hose during regular washing of your
vehicle should help keep holes clean and
clear of debris or foreign material.

Tampering with emissions
control systems (including
related sensors and the Diesel
Exhaust Fluid (DEF) injection system) can
result in reduced engine power and the
illumination of the service engine soon
light.

130

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuel and Refueling
Tampering With a Noise Control
System

•
•
•
•

Federal law prohibits the following acts:
• The removal or rendering inoperative
by any person other than for purposes
of maintenance, repair or replacement
of any device or element of design
incorporated into any new vehicle for
the purpose of noise control prior to its
sale or delivery to the ultimate
purchaser or while it is in use
• The use of the vehicle after such device
or element of design has been removed
or rendered inoperative by any person.

An open or pinched sensor hose.
Incorrect engine oil level.
Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.
Incorrect engine oil viscosity for
climactic conditions.

Note: If these checks do not help you
correct the concern, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer.

Noise Emissions Warranty,
Prohibited Tampering Acts and
Maintenance
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation
became effective governing the noise
emission on trucks over 10,000 lbs. (4,536
kg) GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating).
The preceding statements concerning
prohibited tampering acts and
maintenance, and the noise warranty
found in the Warranty Guide, are
applicable to complete chassis cabs over
10,000 lbs. (4,536 kg) GVWR.

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
may presume to constitute tampering as
follows:
• Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
absorbers, fender apron barriers,
underbody noise shields or acoustically
absorptive material.
• Tampering or rendering inoperative the
engine speed governor, to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer’s
specifications.
The complexity of the diesel engine makes
it so you are not encouraged to carry-out
maintenance other than the services
described in this Owner's Manual.
If the engine does not start, runs rough,
experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive
exhaust smoke, check for the following:
• A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
• A plugged engine air filter element.
• Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
• A clogged fuel filter.
• Contaminated fuel.
• Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
131

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure you shift the gearshift
lever to park (P). Switch the ignition
off and remove the key whenever you leave
your vehicle.

Manual upshift

Manual downshift

Tow/Haul (T/H) (If Equipped)
Tow/Haul delays transmission upshift to
reduce the frequency of transmission
shifting.

Do not apply the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal simultaneously.
Applying both pedals simultaneously
for more than three seconds will limit
engine rpm, which may result in difficulty
maintaining speed in traffic and could lead
to serious injury.

The system provides engine braking in all
forward gears when the gearshift lever is
in drive (D). Engine braking helps you to
slow and control your vehicle when
descending a grade.
Depending on trailer load and driving
conditions, the transmission may
downshift when descending a grade.
Downshifting will depend on the amount
of vehicle braking applied.

Understanding the Gearshift Lever
Positions of the Automatic
Transmission

Switching Tow/Haul On and Off
To activate tow/haul, press the
button on the gearshift lever
E161509
once. The TOW HAUL indicator
light will illuminate in the instrument
cluster.
To deactivate the tow haul feature and
return to normal driving mode, press the
button on the gearshift lever twice. The
tow haul indicator lamp will deactivate.
Tow haul will also deactivate when you
power down your vehicle.
Park (P)

E175317

T/H

WARNINGS
Do not shift the gearshift lever to
park (P) when your vehicle is moving.
This can cause damage to the
transmission not covered by the vehicle
warranty, and can result in a crash or
serious injury.

Tow/Haul button

Park

Reverse

Neutral

Drive

Manual shifting

132

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Transmission
WARNINGS
Apply the parking brake, shift the
gearshift lever to park (P) and switch
the ignition off before leaving your
vehicle. Make sure that the gearshift lever
fully latches into position.

The transmission shifts to the appropriate
gear for optimum performance based on
ambient temperature, road gradient,
vehicle load and your input.

When the gearshift lever is in this position,
it will lock the transmission. The engine
does not transmit power to the driven
wheels. You can start the engine with the
gearshift lever in this position.

Note: You can temporarily override the
selected gear by pressing the + or - buttons
on the side of the gearshift lever.

Note: A warning tone will sound if you open
the driver door and you have not shifted the
gearshift lever to park (P).

WARNING

Note: A shift will occur only when your
vehicle speed and the engine speed are
appropriate.

Manual (M)

Do not hold the + or - buttons
permanently in.

Reverse (R)
Shift the gearshift lever to manual (M) to
allow your vehicle to move forward and
allow you to shift manually through the
forward gears. Press the + or - buttons on
the side of the gearshift lever to shift
manually through the forward gears. The
instrument cluster will display the selected
gear, and a shift indicator arrow to assist
optimum shifting.

WARNINGS
Do not shift the gearshift lever to
reverse (R) when your vehicle is
moving. This can cause damage to
the transmission not covered by the vehicle
warranty, and can result in a crash or
serious injury.
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting the gearshift lever out
of reverse (R).

•
•

Press the + button to upshift.
Press the - button to downshift.

Shift the gearshift lever to reverse (R) to
allow your vehicle to move backward.

You can skip gears by pressing a button
repeatedly at short intervals.

Neutral (N)

Upshift at the recommended shift
speeds according to the following
chart:

When the gearshift lever is in this position,
the transmission does not lock. The engine
does not transmit power to the driven
wheels. You can start the engine with the
gearshift lever in this position.

Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)
Upshift from:

Vehicle speed mph
( km/h):

1-2

15 (24)

Drive (D)
Shift the gearshift lever to drive (D) to
allow your vehicle to move forward and
shift automatically through the forward
gears.

133

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

2-3

25 (40)

3-4

40 (64)

Transmission
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow

Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)
Upshift from:

Vehicle speed mph
( km/h):

4-5

45 (72)

5-6

50 (80)

If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, shift
between drive (D) and reverse (R) pressing
lightly on the accelerator pedal in each
gear. Stop between shifts in a steady
pattern to rock your vehicle.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature,
damage to the transmission may occur.

Note: Engine damage may occur if you
maintain an excessive engine speed without
shifting.

Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute, damage to the transmission
or tires may occur and the engine may
overheat.

Hints on Driving with an Automatic
Transmission
WARNING

Brake-Shift Interlock

Do not idle the engine for long
periods in drive (D) with the brakes
applied.

WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are
working.

Putting Your Vehicle in Gear

This procedure requires you to shift
the gearshift lever out of park (P)
causing your vehicle to roll. Make
sure you fully set the parking brake before
attempting to shift the gearshift lever out
of park (P).

1. Start the engine.
2. Press the brake pedal.
3. Shift the gearshift lever to drive (D),
reverse (R) or manual (M).
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Release the brake pedal and press the
accelerator pedal.

If you release the parking brake and
the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working correctly. The system has
detected a fault that requires service.

Stopping Your Vehicle
1.

Release the accelerator pedal and
press the brake pedal.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Shift the gearshift lever to neutral (N)
or park (P).
4. Switch the ignition off.

Your vehicle has a brake-shift interlock
feature. This prevents you from shifting the
gearshift lever from the park (P) position,
unless the brake pedal is pressed.
In the event of an electrical malfunction,
or if the vehicle battery has run out of
charge, use the following procedure to shift
the gearshift lever from the park (P)
position.
1.

134

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Apply the parking brake and switch the
ignition off.

Transmission

E182198

2. Use a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, to carefully remove the
housing cover.

E174827

4. Move the white lever toward the rear
of your vehicle.
5. Shift the gearshift lever out of park (P)
and into neutral (N).
6. Replace the gearshift lever housing
cover, apply the brake pedal, switch
the ignition on and release the parking
brake.
Note: See an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.

E182199

3. Locate the white lever, situated on the
left hand side of the gearshift lever.

135

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Brakes
Anti-lock Brake System

GENERAL INFORMATION

This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.

Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. If
your vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have it checked by an authorized dealer.

This lamp momentarily
illuminates when you turn the
ignition on. If the light does not
illuminate during start up, remains on or
flashes, the system may be disabled. Have
the system checked by an authorized
dealer.

Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy
Wheels (page 230).

If the system is disabled, normal
braking is still effective. If the
brake warning lamp illuminates
when you release the parking brake, have
the system checked by an authorized
dealer.

See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 74).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.

HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating, the
brake pedal will pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake
pedal. You may also hear a noise from the
system. This is normal.

Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Move the gearshift lever to park (P),
switch the engine off and apply the parking
brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for
any interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.

The anti-lock braking system will not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.

Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake
rapidly by measuring the rate at which you
press the brake pedal. It provides
maximum braking efficiency as long as you
press the pedal, and can reduce stopping
distances in critical situations.

136

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Brakes
Note: Do not press the release button while
pulling the parking brake lever up.

PARKING BRAKE
Center Parking Brake

E172225

To apply the parking brake:
1. Press the foot brake pedal firmly.
2. Pull the parking brake lever up to its
fullest extent.
To release the parking brake:
1. Press the foot brake pedal firmly.
2. Pull the parking brake lever up slightly.
3. Press the release button and push the
parking brake lever down.
Note: If you park your vehicle facing uphill
turn the steering wheel away from the curb.
Note: If you park your vehicle facing
downhill turn the steering wheel toward the
curb.

137

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Traction Control
Note: A MyKey can be set up to prevent the
MyKey user from switching the traction
control system off. See MyKey™ (page
46).

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.

E179110

USING TRACTION CONTROL

Press the traction control button located
on the instrument panel. It illuminates
when you switch the system off.

In certain situations, for example stuck in
snow or mud, it may be beneficial for you
to switch the traction control system off.
This allows the wheels to spin with full
engine power.

AdvanceTrac with RSC Features

Button functions

Electronic
stability
control off
warning lamp

Roll stability
control

Electronic
stability
control

Traction
control system

Default at
Illuminated
engine start-up during bulb
check

Enabled

Button pressed
momentarily

Illuminated

Enabled

Disabled

Button pressed
again after
deactivation

Not illuminated Enabled

Enabled

Engine traction control and two-wheel spin brake traction control functions are disabled.
Single-wheel spin traction control is always enabled.

138

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Traction Control
WARNING
If a malfunction occurs within the
AdvanceTrac system, the traction
control off lamp will illuminate. Make
sure the traction control system was not
manually switched off using the traction
control button. If the traction control lamp
stays on, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer immediately. Operating
your vehicle with traction control disabled
could lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
The traction control lamp
temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and flashes
when a driving condition turns the traction
control system on.
E138639

The traction control off lamp
temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and stays on
when you switch the traction control
system off, or if a malfunction occurs in
the traction control system.

139

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Stability Control
The AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability
Control system helps you keep control of
your vehicle when on a slippery surface.
The electronic stability control portion of
the system helps avoid skids and lateral
slides and roll stability control helps avoid
a vehicle rollover. The traction control
system helps avoid drive wheel spin and
loss of traction. See Using Traction
Control (page 138).

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving
braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system,
tire construction and wheel and tire size
may change the handling characteristics
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the AdvanceTrac
system. In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and
adversely affect the AdvanceTrac system.
Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker
as far as possible from the front center
console, the tunnel, and the front seats in
order to minimize the risk of interfering with
the AdvanceTrac sensors. Reducing the
effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac system
could lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.

B
B
A

Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’s always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or
property damage. Activation of the
AdvanceTrac system is an indication that
at least some of the tires have exceeded
their ability to grip the road; this could
reduce the operator’s ability to control the
vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death. If your AdvanceTrac
system activates, SLOW DOWN.

E72903

140

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Vehicle without AdvanceTrac
with RSC skidding off its
intended route.

Vehicle with AdvanceTrac with
RSC maintaining control on a
slippery surface.

Stability Control
USING STABILITY CONTROL
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability
Control™ (RSC®)
The system automatically activates when
you start your vehicle. The AdvanceTrac
with RSC system cannot be completely
turned off, but the electronic stability
control and roll stability control portions
of the system are disabled when the
transmission is in position R. You can turn
off the traction control portion of the
system independently. See Using
Traction Control (page 138).

141

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Parking Aids (If Equipped)
Note: The outer sensors may detect the
side walls of a garage. If the distance
between the outer sensors and the side wall
remains constant for three seconds, the
alert will turn off. As you continue the inner
sensors will detect objects directly behind
your vehicle.

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.
If your vehicles has a non-Ford
approved trailer tow module the
system may not correctly detect
objects.

PARKING AID

The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic
waves.

WARNINGS
The parking aid system can only
assist you to detect objects when
your vehicle is moving at parking
speeds. To help avoid personal injury you
must take care when using the parking aid
system.

The system does not detect objects
that are moving away from your
vehicle. They will only be detected
shortly after they start to move toward
your vehicle.

Traffic control systems, inclement
weather, air brakes, external motors
and fans may affect the correct
operation of the sensing system.This may
cause reduced performance or false alerts.

Take particular care when reversing
with a tow ball arm or a rear fitted
accessory. For example, a bicycle
carrier. The rear parking aid will only
indicate the approximate distance from
the rear bumper to an object.

The system may not detect small or
moving objects, particularly those
close to the ground.

The sensors may not detect objects
in heavy rain or other conditions that
cause disruptive reflections.

The system warns you of objects that are
within the detection zone of the bumper
areas. When you switch the ignition on,
the system automatically turns on. The
system becomes active when you shift into
reverse (R) and the speed of your vehicle
is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.

If you use a high pressure spray to
wash your vehicle, only spray the
sensors briefly from a distance not
less than eight inches (20 centimeters).
Note: If your vehicle has a tow ball arm,
switch the system off when you connect
trailer lamps (or lighting boards) to the
13-pin socket through a Ford approved
trailer tow module.
Note: Keep the sensors free from dirt, ice
or snow. Do not clean with sharp objects.
Note: The system may emit false alerts if
it detects a signal using the same frequency
as the sensors or if your vehicle is fully
loaded.

142

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Parking Aids (If Equipped)
The system detects objects when you shift
into reverse (R) and:
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is stationary but an object
is approaching your vehicle at a speed
of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of
3 mph (5 km/h) or less, and an object
is approaching your vehicle at a speed
of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
Note: The rate of the tone increases as your
vehicle moves closer to an object.

E130178

When the parking aid system sounds a
tone, the audio system may reduce the set
volume. When the warning ends, the audio
system returns to the previously set
volume.

Rear detection zone: Up to 72 in
(183 cm) from the rear bumper.

Note: Accessories that block the detection
zone of the system may create false alerts.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.

Note: Volume reduction is not a standard
feature of all audio systems.

Note: If your vehicle sustains damage
leaving the sensors misaligned, this will
cause inaccurate measurements or false
alerts.

Switching the Parking Aid System
Off

A tone will sound in the following manner
when objects are near the rear bumper:
• Objects detected by the rear sensors
produce a low-pitched tone.
• An alert will only sound for three
seconds if an object is further than 10 in
(25 cm) from the side of your vehicle.

E177143

Press the button to switch the system off.
The system remains off until you switch
the ignition off. The button is located on
the instrument panel.

REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNINGS
Objects in the display are closer than
they appear.

143

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Parking Aids (If Equipped)
Using the Display

WARNINGS
The operation of the camera may
vary depending on the ambient
temperature, vehicle and road
conditions.

WARNING
Objects above the camera may not
be visible. Check the area behind
your vehicle when necessary.

Do not place objects in front of the
camera.

The lines show a projected vehicle path
and the approximate distance from the
rear bumper to an object.

The camera may not detect objects
that are very close to your vehicle.

Distance markers are only a guide and are
calculated for unloaded vehicles on an
even road surface.

E170301

The camera is on the rear cargo door.

Switching the Rear View Camera
On
Switch the ignition on and shift into reverse
(R). The image will display in the interior
mirror or in the information and
entertainment display.
The camera may not operate correctly in
any of the following conditions:
• Dark areas.
• Intense light areas.
• If there is a sudden change to the
ambient temperature.
• If the camera is wet.
• If the camera is dirty.
• If the camera is obstructed.

144

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Parking Aids (If Equipped)
C

Green - 24 inches to 35 inches
(0.6 meter to 0.9 meter).

Black - center line of the
projected vehicle path.

Note: The green line is extended from 35 in
(0.9 m) up to a distance of 126 in (3.2 m).
Note: When reversing with a trailer the
camera will show the direction of your
vehicle and not the direction of the trailer.

Note: When reversing with a trailer the
screen does not display the lines.

Switching the Rear View Camera
Off
Move the gearshift lever from reverse (R).
Note: The system will automatically switch
once your vehicle speed has reached
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or after a
short period of time.

Vehicles with Parking Aid
The display will show a colored distance
bar. This indicates the approximate
distance from the rear bumper to an
object.
These are color coded as follows:
• Red - up to 12 in (0.3 m).
• Amber - 12 in (0.3 m) to 24 in (0.6 m).
• Green - 24 in (0.6 m) to 71 in (1.8 m).

E142132

Red - up to 12 inches (0.3 meter).

Amber - 12 inches to 24 inches
(0.3 meter to 0.6 meter).

145

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Cruise Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.
Cruise control allows you to control your
speed using the switches on the steering
wheel. You can use cruise control when
you exceed approximately 20 mph (30
km/h).

E142437

The cruise controls are located on the
steering wheel.

USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control in heavy
traffic, on winding roads or when the
road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.

Switching Cruise Control On

When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed may increase above
the set speed. The system will not
apply the brakes. Change down a gear to
assist the system in maintaining the set
speed. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control, serious injury or death.

Setting a Speed

Press and release ON.
The indicator will display in the
instrument cluster.
E71340

1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Changing the Set Speed

Note: Cruise control will disengage if your
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below your set speed while
driving uphill.

•

Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
Press and release SET+ or SET-. The
set speed will change in approximately
1 mph (2 km/h) increments.
Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
and release SET+.

Canceling the Set Speed
Pull CAN toward you and release, or tap
the brake pedal. The set speed will not be
erased.

146

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Cruise Control
Resuming the Set Speed
Pull RES toward you and release.

Switching Cruise Control Off
Note: You will erase the set speed if you
switch the system off.
Press and release OFF or switch the
ignition off.

147

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Driving Aids
SPEED LIMITER

WARNINGS
The system may not operate in areas
during roadwork construction.

Engine Speed Limiter
Engine speed is limited to protect the
engine.

The system may not operate on
roads with sharp bends or narrow
lanes.

Vehicle Speed Limiter - Fixed

Do not carry out windshield repairs
in the immediate area surrounding
the sensor.

The system prevents you from driving
faster than a programmed speed.

If your vehicle has a suspension kit
not approved by us, the system may
not function correctly.

DRIVER ALERT
Principle of Operation

Note: Keep the windshield free from
obstructions such as bird droppings, insects
and snow or ice.

WARNINGS
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.

Note: The system assists you when driving
on fast main roads and freeways.

At all times you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening if
required.

Note: The system calculates an alertness
level at vehicle speeds above approximately
40 mph (65 km/h).
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior.

If the sensor becomes blocked the
system may not function.

The system is designed to alert you if it
detects that you are becoming drowsy or
if your driving deteriorates.

Take regular rest breaks as required
and do not wait for the system to
warn you if you feel tired.
Take rest breaks only where it is safe
to do so.

Using Driver Alert

Certain driving styles and behavior
may result in the system issuing a
warning even if you are not feeling

Note: The system will remain on or off
depending on how it was last set.

Switching the System On and Off

Switch the system on using the information
display. See Information Displays (page
78).

tired.
In cold and severe weather
conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow, spray and large
contrasts in lighting can all influence the
sensor.

The system will calculate your alertness
level based upon your driving behavior in
relation to the lane markings and other
factors.

The system will not operate if the
sensor cannot track the road lane
markings.

148

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Driving Aids
System Warnings

Alertness level is critical, indicating that
you should take a rest as soon as it is safe
to do so.

Note: The system will not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (65 km/h).

The status bar will travel from left to right
as the calculated alertness level
decreases. As the rest icon is approached
the color turns from green to yellow and
then finally red when a rest break must be
taken.

The warning system has two stages:
1. A temporary warning is issued to advise
you to take a rest. This message only
appears for a short time.
2. If you do not rest and the system
continues to detect that your driving
deteriorates, it will issue a further
warning. This will remain in the
information display until you cancel it.
See Information Messages (page
83).

•
•
•

Green: No rest required.
Yellow: First (temporary) warning.
Red: Second warning.

Your alertness level will be shown in grey
if:
• the camera sensor cannot track the
road lane markings
• your vehicle speed drops below
approximately 40 mph (65 km/h).

Press OK on the steering wheel control to
remove the warning.
System Display
When active the system will run
automatically in the background and only
issue warnings if required. You can view
the status at any time using the
information display. See General
Information (page 78).

Resetting the System
You can reset the system by:
• switching the ignition off and on
• stopping your vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver's door.

The alertness level is shown by six steps
as a colored bar.

LANE KEEPING SYSTEM
Lane Keeping Alert
Principle of Operation
WARNINGS
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.

E131358

Alertness level is fine, no rest required.

At all times you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening if
required.
If the sensor becomes blocked the
system may not function.
E131359

149

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Driving Aids
The system will automatically detect and
track the lane markings on the road. If your
vehicle unintentionally drifts toward the
road lane markings, you will see a warning
in the information display. There is also a
warning given in the form of a vibration felt
through the steering wheel.

WARNINGS
The sensor may incorrectly track lane
markings such as other structures or
objects. This can result in a false or
missed warning.
In cold and severe weather
conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow, spray and large
contrasts in lighting can all influence the
sensor.

Note: The vibration intensity from the
steering wheel may decease depending on
the quality of the road surface.
Using Lane Keeping Alert

The system will not operate if the
sensor cannot track the road lane
markings.

Switching the System On and Off

The system may not operate in areas
during roadwork construction.
The system may not operate on
roads with sharp bends or narrow
lanes.
Do not carry out windshield repairs
in the immediate area surrounding
the sensor.

E132099

Turn the system on and off using the
button on the direction indicator stalk.

If your vehicle has a suspension kit
not approved by us, the system may
not function correctly.

Press the button twice to turn the system
on. Press the button once to turn the
system off.

Note: Keep the windshield free from
obstructions such as bird droppings, insects
and snow or ice.
Note: The system may assist you when
driving on fast main roads and freeways.

Note: When you switch the system off, a
warning indicator will remain illuminated in
the information display. See Warning
Lamps and Indicators (page 74).

Note: The system may not operate during
hard braking or acceleration and when you
are intentionally steering your vehicle.

Note: The system status and settings will
remain unchanged when you switch the
ignition on and off.

Note: The system will operate with a
minimum of one tracked lane marking.

Setting the Steering Wheel Vibration
Level

Note: The system will only operate above
vehicle speeds of approximately 40 mph
(65 km/h).

The system has three intensity levels which
you can set using the information display.
See (page 78).

The sensor is located behind the interior
mirror. It continuously monitors conditions
to alert you of unintentional lane drifting
at high speeds.

150

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Driving Aids
Setting the System Sensitivity

•

You can adjust how quickly the system
warns you of a dangerous situation. The
system has two sensitivity levels which you
can set using the information display. See
(page 78).

•
•
•

System Warnings

If you apply direct steering, accelerate
fast or brake hard.
Your vehicle speed is outside the
operating limits.
If there is an anti-lock brake or stability
control intervention.
Narrow lane width.

If the lane markings in the display turn red
or you feel a vibration through the steering
wheel you must take immediate and safe
action to align your vehicle. Correct any
unintended lane drift immediately.

E152382

A column of lane markings are displayed
either side of the vehicle graphic.
The lane markings are color coded as
follows:
• Green: The system is ready to warn you
of any unintentional lane departure.
• Red: Your vehicle is approaching or is
too close to the detected lane
boundary. Take immediate safe action
to reposition your vehicle.
• Gray: The system will suppress the
relevant lane boundary.
Instances where a lane boundary may be
suppressed:
• The sensor may not detect the lane
markings on the road.
• You turn the direction indicator for that
side of your vehicle on.

151

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Load Carrying
LOAD RETAINING FIXTURES

LOAD LIMIT

Securing Cargo

Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer or both, to keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle will provide maximum
return of vehicle design
performance. Before loading your
vehicle, familiarize yourself with
the following terms for
determining your vehicle’s weight
ratings, with or without a trailer,
from the vehicle’s Tire Label or
Safety Compliance Certification
Label:
Base Curb Weight - is the weight
of the vehicle including a full tank
of fuel and all standard
equipment. It does not include
passengers, cargo, or optional
equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight - is the
weight of your new vehicle when
you picked it up from your
authorized dealer plus any
aftermarket equipment.

E175810

Variant

Maximum Load
Value

All

1125 lb (510 kg)

Note: The number of load retaining fixtures
may vary depending on your vehicle model.

PAYLOAD

E143816

152

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Load Carrying
Payload - is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle can be
found on the Tire Label on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver
door (vehicles exported outside
the US and Canada may not have
a Tire Label). Look for “THE
COMBINED WEIGHT OF
OCCUPANTS AND CARGO
SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX
kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by
the assembly plant. If you install
any aftermarket or

authorized-dealer installed
equipment on the vehicle, you
must subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire Label in order to
determine the new payload.
WARNING
The appropriate loading
capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume
capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity
(how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have
reached the maximum payload of
your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.

Example only:

E142516

153

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Load Carrying

E142517

CARGO

E143817

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or
rear). These numbers are shown
on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating
position. The total load on each
axle must never exceed its
Gross Axle Weight Rating.

Cargo Weight - includes all
weight added to the Base Curb
Weight, including cargo and
optional equipment. When towing,
trailer tongue load or king pin
weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is
the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) including
vehicle curb weight and all
payload.

154

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Load Carrying
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.

GVW

E143818

Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The label shall be affixed
to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position.
The Gross Vehicle Weight must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) is the Vehicle Curb Weight, plus
cargo, plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully
loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers
and cargo). It is shown on the
Example only:

E142523

155

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Load Carrying

E142524

WARNING
Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification
Label vehicle weight rating limits
could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance,
engine, transmission and/or
structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.

GCW

GVW

E143819

GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle
and the loaded trailer, including
all cargo and passengers, that the
vehicle can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated

GCW (Gross Combined Weight)
- is the Gross Vehicle Weight plus
the weight of the fully loaded
trailer.

156

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Load Carrying
Examples: For a 5000 pound
(2268 kilogram) conventional
trailer, multiply 5000 by 0.10 and
0.15 to obtain a proper tongue
load range of 500 to 750 pounds
(227 to 340 kilograms). For an
11500 pound (5216 kilogram) fifth
wheel trailer, multiply by 0.15 and
0.25 to obtain a proper king pin
load range of 1725 to 2875 pounds
(782 to 1304 kilograms).

for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle. The
Gross Combined Weight must
never exceed the Gross
Combined Weight Rating.
Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight - is the highest possible
weight of a fully loaded trailer the
vehicle can tow. It assumes a
vehicle with mandatory options,
driver and front passenger weight
(150 pounds [68 kilograms]
each), no cargo weight (internal
or external) and a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or
king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth
wheel trailer). Consult an
authorized dealer (or the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer) for more
detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel
King Pin Weight - refers to the
amount of the weight that a trailer
pushes down on a trailer hitch.

WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label.
Do not use replacement tires
with lower load carrying
capacities than the original tires
because they may lower the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original
tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result
in serious damage to the vehicle
and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.

157

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Load Carrying
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few
examples on how to calculate the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity:

*Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
*Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and
one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
158

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Load Carrying
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load
calculation would be:1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the Front or the Rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating
position.

Special Loading Instructions
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING
Loaded vehicles may handle
differently than unloaded
vehicles. Extra precautions, such
as slower speeds and increased
stopping distance, should be
taken when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo
and people than most passenger
cars. Depending upon the type
and placement of the load,
hauling cargo and people may
raise the center of gravity of the
vehicle.

159

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Towing
Load Placement

TOWING A TRAILER

To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a tow bar with the
correct rise or drop. When both
the loaded vehicle and trailer
are connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
or shudder may be present due to
the increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
correct trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is
located in another chapter of this
Owner's Manual. See Load Limit
(page 152). You can also find the
information in the RV & Trailer
Towing Guide. See an authorized
dealer.

WARNINGS
Do not exceed the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating
specified on the certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the
limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage,
transmission damage, structural
damage, loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Your vehicle may have electrical
items, for example fuses or relays,
related to towing. See Fuses
(page 186).
Your vehicle's load capacity
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
loading your vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an extra
load on your vehicle's engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires
and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.

160

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Towing
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS

TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If
Equipped)

Note: Make sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area.
Vehicles equipped with the Trailer
Tow Package or the Heavy Duty
Payload Package should not
exceed 55 ft² (5.1 m²) trailer frontal
area.
Note: Exceeding this limitation
may significantly reduce the
performance of your towing
vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a
low aerodynamic drag and rounded
front design helps optimize
performance and fuel economy.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight
by 2% per 1000 ft (300 m) starting
at the 1000 ft (300 m) elevation
point.
Note: Certain states require
electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. Be sure to
check state regulations for this
specified weight. The maximum
trailer weights listed may be limited
to this specified weight, as your
vehicle's electrical system may not
include the wiring connector
needed to use electric trailer
brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a trailer
provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight listed for
your vehicle configuration on the
following charts.

WARNING
Switching off trailer sway control
increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. We
do not recommend disabling this feature
except in situations where speed reduction
may be detrimental, for example
ascending a grade, and the driver has
significant trailer towing experience and
can control trailer sway to maintain safe
operation.
This feature applies your vehicle's brakes
at individual wheels and, if necessary,
reduces engine power. If the trailer begins
to sway, the stability control light flashes
and a message appears in the information
display.
Message

Trailer
sway
Reduce
speed

Action

Slow your vehicle down,
then pull safely to the side
of the road and check for
correct tongue load and
trailer load distribution. See
Load Carrying (page 152).

Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it once it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too
high, the system may turn on multiple times
to gradually reduce vehicle speed.

161

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Towing

Van and Chassis Cab
Powertrain

Axle
Ratio

Maximum GCWR Maximum Loaded
*
Trailer Weight

3.2L Power
Stroke Diesel

3.31

10600 lb (4808 kg)

4750 lb (2155 kg)

3.2L Power
Stroke Diesel

3.73

13500 lb (6123 kg)

7500 lb (3402 kg)

3.5L V6 GTDI

3.31

11200 lb (5080 kg)

5700 lb (2585 kg)

3.5L V6 GTDI

3.73

12600 lb (5715 kg)

7150 lb (3243 kg)

3.7L V6 TiVCT

3.73

10800 lb (4899 kg)

5350 lb (2427 kg)

3.7L V6 TiVCT

4.10

12000 lb (5450 kg) 6700 lb (3039 kg)

Calculated with SAE J2807 method.

Wagon
Powertrain

Axle
Ratio

Maximum GCWR Maximum Loaded
*
Trailer Weight

3.2L Power
Stroke Diesel

3.31

10600 lb (4808 kg) 4200 lb (1905 kg)

3.2L Power
Stroke Diesel

3.73

11200 lb (5080 kg)

4650 lb (2109 kg)

3.5L V6 GTDI

3.31

11200 lb (5080 kg)

5150 lb (2336 kg)

3.7L V6 TiVCT

3.73

10800 lb (4899 kg)

4800 lb (2177 kg)

3.7L V6 TiVCT

4.10

11200 lb (5080 kg)

5200 lb (2359 kg)

Calculated with SAE J2807 method.

162

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Towing
Calculating the Maximum
Loaded Trailer Weight for Your
Vehicle

ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle
has covered at least 1000 mi
(1,600 km). See Breaking-In (page
172).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the correct
installation and adjustment
specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 440).
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.

1. Start with the gross combined
weight rating for your vehicle
model and axle ratio. See the
previous charts.
2. Subtract all of the following
that apply to your vehicle:
• Vehicle curb weight
• Hitch hardware weight, such as
a draw bar, ball, locks or weight
distributing hardware
• Driver weight
• Passenger(s) weight
• Payload, cargo and luggage
weight
• Aftermarket equipment weight.
This equals the maximum loaded
trailer weight for this combination.
Note: The trailer tongue load is
considered part of the payload for
your vehicle. Reduce the total
payload by the final trailer tongue
weight.
Note: Consult an authorized dealer
to determine the maximum trailer
weight allowed for your vehicle if
you are not sure.

For load specification terms found on the
tire label, Safety Compliance label and
instructions on calculating your vehicle's
maximum load. See Load Limit (page
152).
Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.

Trailer Towing Connector (If Equipped)

E163167

Your vehicle is fitted with both a 7 pin and
4 pin trailer wiring connector.

163

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Towing
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a correctly fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions. Some seven-position
connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the correct wiring
connector and works correctly with your
vehicle.
Color

To connect the safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
not allow the chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not connect trailer hydraulic
brake systems directly to the vehicle
brake system. Your vehicle may not
have enough braking power and your
chances of having a crash greatly increase.

Function

Yellow

Left turn signal and brake
lamp.

White

Ground (-).

Blue

Electric brakes.

Green

Right turn signal and brake
lamp.

Orange

Battery (+).

Brown

Running lamps.

Grey

Reverse lamps.

Electric, manual, automatic or surge-type
trailer brakes are safe if you install them
correctly and adjust them to the
manufacturer's specifications. Trailer
brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems are
required for safe control of towed vehicles
and trailers weighing more than 1500 lb
(680 kg) when loaded.

Tow Hitch
Do not use a tow hitch that either clamps
on to the bumper or attaches to the axle.
You must distribute the load in your trailer
so that between 10% and 15% of the total
weight of the trailer is on the tongue.

Integrated Trailer Brake Controller
WARNING

Weight Distributing Hitches

The Ford trailer brake controller has
been verified to be compatible with
trailers having electric-actuated
drum brakes (one to four axles) and
electric-over-hydraulic brakes. It will not
turn on the hydraulic surge-style trailer
brakes. It is the responsibility of the
customer to make sure that the trailer
brakes are adjusted appropriately,
functioning normally and all electric
connections are correctly made. Failure to
do so may result in loss of vehicle control,
crash or serious injury.

A weight distribution hitch is not
recommended for use with your vehicle.

Safety Chains
WARNING
Do not attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the
frame or hook retainers of your vehicle's
tow hitch.

164

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Towing
1.

B
A

Press the + and - buttons to adjust the
brake controller's power output to the
trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. You
can increase the gain setting to 10
(maximum trailer braking) or decrease
it to zero (no trailer braking). Pressing
and holding a button raises or lowers
the setting continuously.

The gain setting displays in the
information display as:
E166403

Message

Manual control lever.

Gain adjustment buttons.

Trailer Brake
Gain:

When used correctly, the trailer brake
controller assists in smooth and effective
trailer braking by powering the trailer’s
electric or electric-over-hydraulic brakes
with a proportional output based on the
towing vehicle’s brake pressure

Note: Using the manual control lever
illuminates the trailer's brake lamps and
your vehicle's brake lamps, except the
center high-mounted brake lamp, if you
make the correct electrical connection to
the trailer.

Slide the manual control lever to the left
to turn on the trailer's electric brakes. They
work independently of the tow vehicle's
braking system. See the following;
Procedure for adjusting the gain
setting for instructions on correct use of
this feature. If you use the manual control
while the brake is also applied, the greater
of the two inputs determines the power
sent to the trailer brakes.

165

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Towing

The controller shows gain setting, output bar graph and the trailer connectivity
status in the information display as follows:
Message

Trailer Brake
Gain:
No Trailer
Trailer Brake
Gain:
Output:

Action and Description

Displays the current gain setting during a given ignition cycle
and when adjusting the gain setting. This also displays if you
use the manual control lever or make gain adjustments with
no trailer connected.
Displays when you press your vehicle's brake pedal, or upon
use of the manual control lever. Bar indicators illuminate in
the information display to indicate the amount of power going
to the trailer brakes relative to the brake pedal or manual
control input. One bar indicates the least amount of output;
six bars indicate maximum output.

Trailer Connected

Displays when the system senses a correct trailer wiring
connection during a given ignition cycle. For example a trailer
with electric trailer brakes.

Trailer Disconnected

Displays when the system senses a trailer connection and
then a disconnection, either intentional or unintentional,
during a given ignition cycle, this is accompanied by a single
audible tone. It also displays if a vehicle or trailer-wiring fault
occurs causing the trailer to appear disconnected. This
message can also display if you use the manual control lever
without a trailer connected.
1.

Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally
and correctly adjusted. See a trailer
dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the
electrical connections according to the
trailer manufacturer's instructions.
3. Use the gain adjustment + and buttons to increase or decrease the
gain setting to the desired starting
point. A gain setting of six is a good
starting point for heavier loads.
4. In a traffic-free environment, tow the
trailer on a dry, level surface at a speed
of 20-25 mph (30-40 km/h) and slide
the manual control lever completely.

Procedure for Adjusting the Gain Setting
The gain setting sets the trailer brake
controller for the specific towing condition.
You should change the setting as towing
conditions change. Changes to towing
conditions include trailer load, vehicle load,
road conditions and weather.
The gain should be set to provide the
maximum trailer braking assistance while
making sure the trailer wheels do not lock
when using the brakes. Locked trailer
wheels may lead to trailer instability.
Note: Only carry out this procedure in a
traffic-free environment at speeds of
approximately 20-25 mph (30-40 km/h).

166

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Towing
5. If the trailer wheels lock, indicated by
squealing tires, reduce the gain setting.
If the trailer wheels turn freely, increase
the gain setting. Repeat steps four and
five until the gain setting is at a point

just below trailer wheel lock. If towing
a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lock may
not be attainable even with the
maximum gain setting of 10.

System Warning Messages
Message

Action and Description

Trailer Brake Module
Fault

Displays in response to faults sensed by the trailer brake
controller, accompanied by a single tone. If this message
appears, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible
for diagnosis and repair. The controller may still function, but
performance may be degraded.

Wiring Fault on Trailer

Displays when there is a short circuit on the electric brake
output wire. If the message displays, accompanied by a single
tone, with no trailer connected, the problem is with your
vehicle wiring between the trailer brake controller and the 7pin connector. If the message only displays with a trailer
connected, the problem is with the trailer wiring. Consult a
trailer dealer for assistance. This can be a short to ground,
for example a chaffed wire, short to voltage, for example a
pulled pin on trailer emergency breakaway battery or the
trailer brakes may be drawing too much current.

Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose the trailer brake controller to determine exactly
which trailer fault has occurred. However, the Ford Warranty does not cover this diagnosis
if the fault is with the trailer.
•

Points to Remember
•

•
•

Do not attempt removal of the trailer
brake controller without consulting the
Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit
may result.
Adjust gain setting before using the
trailer brake controller for the first time.
Adjust gain setting, using the procedure
above, whenever road, weather and
trailer or vehicle loading conditions
change from when the gain was initially
set.

•

167

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Only use the manual control lever for
correct adjustment of the gain during
trailer setup. Misuse, such as
application during trailer sway, could
cause instability of trailer or tow
vehicle.
Avoid towing in adverse weather
conditions. The trailer brake controller
does not provide anti-lock control of
the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can
lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting
in instability of trailer or tow vehicle.

Towing
•

•

The trailer brake controller is fitted with
a feature that reduces output at vehicle
speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h) so
trailer and vehicle braking is not jerky
or harsh. This feature is only available
when applying the brakes using your
vehicle's brake pedal, not the
controller.
The controller interacts with the brake
control system and powertrain control
system of your vehicle to provide the
best performance on different road
conditions.
Your vehicle's brake system and the
trailer brake system work
independently of each other. Changing
the gain setting on the controller does
not affect the operation of your
vehicle's brake system whether you
attach a trailer or not.
When you switch the engine off, the
controller output is disabled and the
display and module shut down. The
controller module and display turn on
when you switch the ignition on.
The trailer brake controller is only a
factory-installed or dealer-installed
item. Ford is not responsible for
warranty or performance of the
controller due to misuse or customer
installation.

Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lamps,
brake lamps, turn signals and hazard
warning lamps are working.

Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other
obstacles.

When Towing a Trailer
•

•
•

•

Trailer Lamps
WARNING

•

Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system
resulting in fire. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible for assistance
in correct trailer tow wiring installation.
Additional electrical equipment may be
required.

•

168

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Do not drive faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) until you drive your vehicle
at least 495 mi (800 km). See
Breaking-In (page 172).
Do not make full-throttle starts.
Check the tow hitch, electrical
connections and trailer wheel lug nuts
thoroughly after you have traveled
50 mi (80 km).
When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in position park (P) to aid
engine and transmission cooling and
to help A/C performance.
Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or on hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
If the transmission is fitted with a
Grade Assist, Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.

Towing
•

•

Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after the trailer is removed from the water.

If your vehicle is fitted with
AdvanceTrac with roll stability control
(RSC), this system may turn on during
typical cornering maneuvers with a
heavily loaded trailer. This is normal.
Turning the corner at a slower speed
while towing may reduce this tendency.
If you are towing a trailer frequently in
hot weather, hilly conditions, at the
gross combined weight rating (or any
combination of these factors), consider
refilling your vehicle's rear axle with
synthetic gear lubricant (if the axle is
not already filled with it). See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 440).
Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
• Turn the steering wheel to point
your vehicle tires away from traffic
flow.
• Set your vehicle parking brake.
• Place the automatic transmission
in position park (P).
• Place wheel chocks in front of and
at the back of the trailer wheels.
(trailer wheel chocks are not
included with your vehicle.)

Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
the rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear
axle lubricant, which is not normally
checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required.

TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE

Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Water Craft (PWC)
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom
edge of the rear bumper.

E143886

Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.

169

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Towing
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or,
if you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, your roadside
assistance service provider.

TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS

We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle
damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or
by any other means.

If your vehicle is disabled and you have no
access to a tow dolly, car-hauling trailer or
a flatbed transport vehicle, it can only be
flat-towed with all wheels on the ground
under the following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward so that
it is towed in a forward direction.
• The transmission selector lever is
placed in position N. If the transmission
gear shift lever cannot be moved to
position N, it may need to be
overridden. See Automatic
Transmission (page 132).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80
kilometers).

Emergency Towing

Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck
operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your two-wheel
drive vehicle towed with the front wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and the
rear wheels off the ground.
We recommend towing a four-wheel drive
vehicle with all wheels off the ground, such
as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. However, it is acceptable to
use a wheel lift to raise the rear of your
vehicle so long as, depending on vehicle
configuration, you perform the following
before towing.

Drive off slowly and smoothly without
jerking the vehicle that is being towed.
Tow ropes or rigid towing bars must be
placed on the same side. For example; right
hand rear towing point to right hand front
towing point.
You must use a tow rope or rigid towing
bar that is of the correct strength for the
weight of the towing vehicle and the
vehicle that is being towed.
Note: Using a rigid towing bar is the safest
way to tow a vehicle.
The weight of the vehicle that is being
towed must not exceed the weight of the
towing vehicle.

Recreational Vehicle Towing
Follow these guidelines to prevent damage
to your vehicle’s transmission if you have
a need for recreational vehicle towing. For
example; towing your vehicle behind a
motorhome.

170

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Towing
Your vehicle cannot be flat-towed with all
wheels on the ground beyond the limits
set out above as vehicle or transmission
damage may occur. See Emergency
Towing. You must place your vehicle on
a car-hauling trailer, or place the front
wheels of your vehicle on a tow dolly. If you
are using a tow dolly, follow the
instructions specified by the equipment
provider.
Note: Put your vehicle's climate control
system in recirculated air mode to prevent
exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle.
See Climate Control (page 88).

171

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Driving Hints
5. Have your vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.

BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 miles (480
kilometers). During this time, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics. The engine also needs to
break in. Avoid hard accelerations and
driving too fast for the first 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers). If possible, avoid
carrying heavy loads up steep grades
during the break-in period.

ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things
such as how you drive, the conditions you
drive under and how you maintain your
vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that
may improve your fuel economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
• When running errands, go to the
furthest destination first and then
work your way back home.
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds. (Traveling
at 65 mph/105 kph uses about 15%
less fuel than traveling at 75 mph/121
kph).
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.

REDUCED ENGINE
PERFORMANCE
WARNING
Continued operation will increase the
engine temperature and cause the
engine to shut down completely.
If the engine coolant temperature gauge
needle moves to the upper limit position,
the engine is overheating. See Gauges
(page 72).
You must only drive your vehicle for a short
distance if the engine overheats. The
distance you can travel depends on
ambient temperature, vehicle load and
terrain. The engine will continue to operate
with limited power for a short time.
If the engine temperature continues to rise,
the fuel supply to the engine will reduce.
The air conditioning will switch off and the
engine cooling fan will operate continually.

There are also some things you may want
to avoid doing because they reduce your
fuel economy:
• Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.
• Avoid revving the engine before turning
off the car.
• Avoid long idle periods.
• Do not warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.

Reduce your speed gradually and stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
2. Switch the engine off immediately to
prevent severe engine damage.
3. Wait for the engine to cool down.
4. Check the coolant level. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 206).

172

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Driving Hints
•
•
•
•

•

Reduce the use of air conditioning and
heat.
Avoid using speed control in hilly
terrain.
Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving.
Avoid carrying unnecessary weight
(approximately 1 mpg [0.4
kilometers/liter] is lost for every 400
lbs [180 kilograms] of weight carried).
Avoid adding particular accessories to
your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks).
Avoid driving with the wheels out of
alignment.

E176913

When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
•

COLD WEATHER
PRECAUTIONS

•
•
•

The functional operation of some
components and systems can be affected
at temperatures below -13°F (-25°C).

Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
Check that the horn works.
Check that the exterior lights work.
Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.

FLOOR MATS

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle. Only use floor mats that
leave the pedal area unobstructed. Only
use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
other ways.

WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.

Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal
injury.

Before driving through standing water,
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the wheel
hubs.

173

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Driving Hints
WARNINGS
Always make sure that the floor
mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are
supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats must
be properly secured to both retention posts
to make sure mats do not shift out of
position.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering in the vehicle foot well that
cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering
with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.

E142666

To install floor mats, position the floor mat
so that the eyelet is over the retention post
and press down to lock in.

Never place floor mats or any other
covering on top of already installed
floor mats. Floor mats should always
rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and
not another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering
will reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal operation.

To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.

Check attachment of floor mats on
a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning or
replacement.
Always make sure that objects
cannot fall into the driver foot well
while the vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped under
the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
Failure to properly follow floor mat
installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause
interference with pedal operation causing
a loss of vehicle control.

174

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Roadside Emergencies
authorized dealer. If a member
requests a tow to an authorized dealer
that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. The service is available:
•
•

Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible
vehicle requires service at the nearest
authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle is
operational but the trailer is not, then the
trailer does not qualify for any roadside
services.

24 hours a day, seven days a week.
For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.

Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance

Roadside Assistance covers:
• A flat tire change with a good spare, if
provided with the vehicle (except
vehicles supplied with a tire inflation
kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
to 2 gal (7.6 L) of gasoline or 5 gal
(18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel
delivery service to two no-charge
occurrences within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30.5 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest

Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is in
the owner's information portfolio in the
glove compartment.
United States Ford vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States Ford vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.

Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
Canadian customers who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.

Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance
For your convenience, you may complete
the roadside assistance identification card
found in the centerfold of your warranty
guide and retain for future reference.

175

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Roadside Emergencies
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage. If you
require more information, please refer to
the coverage section of your warranty
guide, call us in Canada at
1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at
www.ford.ca.

The hazard warning button is located on
the instrument panel. Switch the hazard
warning flashers on when your vehicle is
creating a safety hazard.

Sykes Assistance Services Corporation
administers the Roadside Assistance
program. You must receive covered
services in Canada or the continental
United States. Coverage extends to
vehicles that use public, non-seasonal,
annually traveled roadways. Roadside
Assistance coverage does not extend to
vehicles involved in cross-country driving,
logging, autocross and any other form of
off-road use. Well maintained roads and
surfaces help ensure safe travel for the
supplier, and allow their representatives
to perform service as per the standard
operating procedures.

Press the button again to switch the
hazard warning flashers off.

Press the button to switch the hazard
warning flashers on. The front and rear
direction indicators will flash.

Note: Prolonged use of the hazard warning
flashers will cause the battery to run out of
charge. There may be insufficient power to
restart the engine.

FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING
Failure to inspect and, if necessary,
repair fuel leaks after a collision may
increase the risk of fire and serious
injury. Ford Motor Company recommends
that the fuel system be inspected by an
authorized dealer after any collision.

In Remote Locations
If our supplier cannot take your vehicle by
road to the nearest authorized dealership,
transportation by rail or water may be
necessary. The program covers a tow to
the dock or rail terminal and also to the
dealership at the end of the trip.

In the event of a moderate to severe
collision, this vehicle includes a fuel pump
shutoff feature that stops the flow of fuel
to the engine. Not every impact will cause
a shutoff.

For rail or water transportation, however,
contact your authorized dealer to confirm
if you are eligible for additional coverage
before you authorize or pay for the service.

Should your vehicle shut off after a
collision, you may restart your vehicle. For
vehicles equipped with a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the
fuel pump.

Call the Ford Roadside Assistance at
1-800-665-2006 for additional
information.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once your vehicle determines that the
systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow
you to restart.

E71943

176

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Roadside Emergencies
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
an authorized dealer.

The positive (+) access terminal is next to
the fuse box, under a red cap. To access
the positive (+) terminal, lift the red cap
up.

JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
The gases around the battery can
explode if exposed to flames, sparks
or lit cigarettes. An explosion could
result in personal injury or vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which
can burn skin, eyes and clothing, if
contacted.
Use only an adequate-sized cable
with insulated clamps.
E145290

Preparing Your Vehicle

The negative (-) terminal is a post, located
on the driver side, near the hood hinge. It
is a grounding connection point, so you will
need to remove the rubber covering first.

Note: Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle. Automatic
transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a
vehicle with an automatic transmission may
cause transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle's electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch, and switch off
all accessories.

E183998

Your vehicle has a positive (+) access
terminal and a negative (-) grounding
connection point that you can access
under the hood, even though the actual
battery is under the driver seat. You can
jump your vehicle using these points.

177

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Roadside Emergencies
Connecting the Jumper Cables

3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the assisting
battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to the grounding
connection point of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.

WARNING
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components
as grounding points. Stay clear of moving
parts. To avoid reverse polarity
connections, make sure that you correctly
identify the positive (+) and negative (-)
terminals on both the disabled and booster
vehicles before connecting the cables.

WARNING
Do not connect the end of the
second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped.
A spark may cause an explosion of the
gases that surround the battery.

Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.

Jump Starting
1.

Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
rpms, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once you start the disabled vehicle, run
both vehicle engines for an additional
three minutes before disconnecting the
jumper cables.

Removing the Jumper Cables

Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.

E142664

Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) access terminal of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the assisting battery.

178

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Roadside Emergencies
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the turn signal lamps
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners.

The horn and lamps will turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
• Your vehicle runs out of power.

3
E142665

Remove the jumper cable from the
grounding connection point of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle's battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle's battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) access terminal of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
After you start the disabled vehicle and
remove the jumper cables, allow your
vehicle to idle for several minutes so the
battery can recharge.

179

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Customer Assistance
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Ford Extended Service Plans.
• Ford Genuine Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.

GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.

In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8

A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.

Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca

Away From Home

Twitter

If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.

@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
@FordServiceQC (Quebec)
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:

In the United States:
Mailing address

Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling/servicing
authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.

Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are
available online at www.fordowner.com
180

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Customer Assistance
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.

California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18000 miles (29 000 km),
whichever occurs first:
1.

Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).

In some states, you must directly notify
Ford in writing before pursuing remedies
under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is
also allowed a final repair attempt in some
states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute
must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
before taking action under the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to the
extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.

In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).
You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies
not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.

IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.

181

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Customer Assistance
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.

THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.

You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201

The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.

BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.

UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)

Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.

For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
of Canada and the authorized dealer to
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.

BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
182

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Customer Assistance
In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.

If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com

CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.

For customers in Guam, the
Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana
Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the
U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel free to call
our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD
(3673).

GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel.

If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Puerto Rico,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: prcac@ford.com
www.ford.com.pr

If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only
get fuel with an anti-knock index lower
than is recommended for your vehicle,
contact our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking or
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by use
of improper fuel. Using leaded fuel may
also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the United States.

If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:

183

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Customer Assistance
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: +971 4 3326084
Toll-Free Number of the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia: 800 8971409
Local Telephone Number of Kuwait:
24810575
FAX: +971 4 3327299
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com

Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)

Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.

If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Motor Company Export
Operations & Global Growth Initiatives by
emailing expcac@ford.com.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)

If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.

E142557

If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.

Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.

ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
184

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Customer Assistance
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada.

Transport Canada Contact Information

Website

http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/menu.htm

Phone

1–800–333–0510

185

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuses
This is located behind the removable trim
panel.

FUSE BOX LOCATIONS
Engine Compartment Fuse Box

Pre-fuse Box
This is located under the driver's seat.

Body Control Module Fuse Box

E146726

For item location: See Under Hood
Overview (page 201).
E152512

Passenger Compartment Fuse Box

This is located behind the removable trim
panel.

E152513

186

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuses
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Engine Compartment Fuse Box

E148826

Fuse

Fuse rating

10A

Selective Catalytic Reduction - Diesel.

Circuits protected

15A

Selective Catalytic Reduction - Diesel.

15A

Selective Catalytic Reduction - Diesel.

10A

Selective Catalytic Reduction - Diesel.

187

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuses
Fuse

Fuse rating

Circuits protected

Diesel particulate filter vaporizer.
Glow plug monitor.

Anti-lock brake system.
Stability assist.
Ignition.

7.5A

Powertrain control module.

20A

Cooling fan - Gasoline.

30A

Left-hand windshield wiper.

F10

30A

Right-hand windshield wiper.

F11

10A

Air conditioning clutch.

F12

20A

Diesel particulate filter vaporizer glow plug.

F13

F14

F15

Not used.

F16

Not used.

F17

Not used.

F18

40A

Anti-lock brake system.
Stability assist pump.

Not used.
Selective Catalytic Reduction - ignition - Diesel.

F19

30A

Starter solenoid.

F20

60A

Glow plugs.

F21

60A

Ignition relay 3.

F22

40A

Selective Catalytic Reduction relay feed.

F22

40A

Electric vacuum pump relay feed.

F23

10A

PROTECTED CIRCUIT FUSE.

F24

10A

Fuel injection pump - Diesel.

F24

20A

Fuel injection pump - Gasoline.

F25

15A

Throttle control unit - Diesel.

F25

10A

PROTECTED CIRCUIT FUSE - Gasoline.

188

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuses
Fuse

Fuse rating

Circuits protected

F26

20A

F27

F28

7.5A

F28

10A

Injection power - Gasoline 3.7L.

F29

Ignition feed - Audio - Gasoline.

F29

7.5A

Crank case ventilation heater – Diesel.

F30

60A

Single cooling fan.

F30

40A

Twin cooling fan.

F31

40A

Twin cooling fan 2 - Gasoline.

F32

30A

Windshield wiper motor.

F32

60A

Windshield dual wiper motors.
Start-Stop auxiliary water pump.

PROTECTED CIRCUIT FUSE.
Not used.
Crankcase sensor - Diesel.

F33

20A

F34

F35

20A

Powertrain control system supply - Gasoline.

F35

15A

Powertrain control system supply - Diesel.

F36

20A

Mass air flow sensor - Gasoline.

F36

15A

Mass air flow sensor .
NOX sensor 1, 2 - Diesel.

F37

7.5A

Volume Control Valve.

F38

20A

Air conditioning clutch - Gasoline.

F38

7.5A

Air conditioning clutch - Diesel.

F39

10A

UEGO, VAP PUMP, EBYPASS, EDF, HEDF - Gasoline.

F39

15A

UEGO, VAP PUMP, EBYPASS, EDF, HEDF - Diesel.

Not used.

189

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuses

Relay

Circuits switched

Ignition 3.

Not used.

Cooling fan - Gasoline.

Windshield wiper - on and off.

Windshield wiper - low and high speed.

Electrical Vacuum Pump - Gasoline.

Starter motor.

R10

Air conditioning clutch.

R11

Fuel vaporizer system glow plug.

R12

Fuel injection pump.

R13

Not used.

R14

Not used.

R15

Low-speed and high-speed cooling fan.

R16

Selective Catalytic Reduction - Diesel.

R17

Powertrain control module.

R18

High speed cooling fan.

190

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel

E148827

Fuse

Fuse rating

Circuits protected

10A

Airbag module.

Anti-lock brake system with electronic stability
control.
Parking brake.

10A

Not used.
Trailer tow back-up lamp relay.

20A

Cutaway body connectors.

Not used.

40A

AC power outlet socket.

30A

Trailer brake module.

F10

30A

Driver power seat.

F11

30A

Passenger power seat.

F12

30A

Trailer tow park lamp relay.

191

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuses
Fuse

Fuse rating

Circuits protected

F13

25A

Anti-lock brake system with electronic stability
control valves.

F14

Powertrain control module B+ relay.

F15

40A

Powertrain control module power relay.

F16

40A

Body control module power feed.

F17

40A

Ignition relay 3.

F18

40A

Modified vehicle connections.

F19

F20

Heated exterior mirror relay.

Not used.

F21

10A

Modified vehicle ignition connections.

F22

15A

Passenger compartment fuse panel.

F23

7.5A

Air conditioning control module.

F24

10A

Cutaway body connectors.

F25

7.5A

Interior lighting.

F26

10A

Heated exterior mirrors.

F27

20A

Heated rear window.

F28

20A

Heated rear window.

F29

10A

Rear parking aid camera.
Lane keeping system.
Electro mirror.

F30

Not used.

F31

10A

Trailer brake ignition feed.

F32

10A

Interior lighting.

F33

Not used.

F34

Not used.

F35

F36

20A

Power folding mirrors.
Horn.

F37

7.5A

SYNC module.

192

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuses
Fuse

Fuse rating

F38

Circuits protected

Blower motor.
Horn relay.
Windshield wiper relay.

F39

7.5A

Remote keyless entry.
Battery.
Power windows.
Rear heating, ventilation and air conditioning.

F40

40A

Front blower motor.

F41

40A

Rear blower motor.

F42

40A

Heated rear window.

F43

30A

Trailer socket.

F44

60A

Auxiliary power points.

F45

40A

Trailer connectors B+ supply.

F46

30A

Power windows.

F47

20A

Cigar lighter socket.

F48

20A

Rear auxiliary power points.

F49

20A

Front auxiliary power points.

F50

60A

Ignition relay 1.

F51

60A

Ignition relay 2.

F52

40A

Modified vehicle connections.

F53

40A

Modified vehicle connections.

Relay

Circuits switched

Not used (spare).

Auxiliary power points.

Trailer tow parking lamp.

Ignition 2.

Power windows.

Ignition 1.

193

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuses
Relay

Circuits switched

Horn.

Trailer tow back-up lamp.

Front blower motor.

R10

Rear blower motor.

R11

Heated rear window.
Heated exterior mirrors.

R12

Not used.

R13

Modified vehicle connections.

Pre-fuse Box

E191034

Fusible link

Fusible link
rating

470A

Engine compartment fuse box.
Starter motor.
Alternator.

100A

Passenger compartment fuse panel.

Circuits protected

194

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuses

Fusible link

Fusible link
rating

Circuits protected

Body control module fuse box.
Powertrain control module.
Anti-lock brake system.

40A

200A

Passenger compartment fuse panel.

100A

Passenger compartment fuse panel.

80A

Positive temperature coefficient heater.

100A

Engine junction box feed.

100A

Passenger compartment fuse panel.

60A

Passenger compartment fuse panel supply.

Not used.

60A

Passenger compartment fuse panel supply.

60A

Auxiliary power point 1.

60A

Auxiliary power point 2.

60A

Auxiliary power point 3.

Fuse

Fuse rating

Not used.

20A

R4 relay power.

20A

R3 relay power.

20A

R2 relay power.

20A

Circuits protected

R1 relay power.
Not used.

195

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuses
Fuse

Fuse rating

F10

Not used.

F11

Not used.

F12

Relay

Circuits protected

Switch power.

Circuits switched

Upfitter 1.

Upfitter 2.

Upfitter 3.

Upfitter 4.

Not used.

196

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuses
Body Control Module

E148830

Fuse

Fuse rating

Circuits protected

15A

Central locking system 2.

15A

Central locking system 1.

15A

Ignition switch.

Parking assist control module.
Brake transmission shift interlock.

Rain sensor module.

15A

Windshield washer pump.

Not used.

197

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuses
Fuse

Fuse rating

Circuits protected

10A

Right-hand high beam.

F10

10A

Left-hand high beam.

F11

25A

Right-hand exterior lamps.
Left-hand position lamps.

F12

F13

15A

On-board diagnostic.
Battery saver.

F14

25A

Turn signal indicator.
Power windows delayed accessory.
Lane departure sensor heated windshield pad.

F15

25A

Left-hand exterior lamps.
Right-hand position lamps.
High mounted stoplamp.

F16

20A

Audio unit.
Navigation unit.

F17

7.5A

Instrument panel cluster.
Heater control.

F18

10A

Headlamp switch module.
Steering wheel module.
Stoplamp switch supply.

Not used.

F19

Front control/display interface module.

F20

Ignition passive anti-theft system.

F21

Accessory relay, customer access feed.
WARNINGS

CHANGING A FUSE

Switch the ignition and all electrical
equipment off before attempting to
change a fuse.

WARNINGS
Do not modify the electrical system
of your vehicle in any way. Have
repairs to the electrical system and
the replacement of relays and high current
fuses carried out by an authorized dealer.

Always replace a fuse with one that
has the specified amperage rating.
Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and
could start a fire.

198

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Fuses

E142430

If electrical components in your vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. A
break in the fuse wire will indicate a blown
fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before
replacing any electrical components.

199

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance
Working with the Engine Off

GENERAL INFORMATION

Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.

Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.

Working with the Engine On
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.

To help you service your vehicle, we
provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine
service easy. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 440).

Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Block the wheels

If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.

OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD

Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.

Opening the Hood

Precautions
•
•
•

•

Do not work on a hot engine.
Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.

E175221

1. Pull the hood release lever.
2. Slightly lift the hood.

200

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance

E135852

E87786

3. Move the catch to the left to release
the hood.

4. Open the hood and support it with the
hood strut.

Closing the Hood
1.

Remove the hood strut from the catch
and secure it correctly in the clip.
2. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight for the last 8-12
in (20-30 cm).
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
closed.

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L
A

E174601

201

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance
A

Air cleaner. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 223).

Engine oil dipstick . See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 204).

Brake fluid reservoir . See Brake Fluid Check (page 210).

Engine coolant reservoir . See Engine Coolant Check (page 206).

Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 186).

Engine oil filler cap . See Engine Oil Check (page 204).

Power steering fluid reservoir . See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 210).

H
*

Washer fluid reservoir . See Washer Fluid Check (page 210).

The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification.

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.7L
C

E174602

Air cleaner. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 224).

Engine oil dipstick . See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 204).

Brake fluid reservoir . See Brake Fluid Check (page 210).

Engine coolant reservoir . See Engine Oil Check (page 204).

Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 186).

Engine oil filler cap . See Engine Oil Check (page 204).

202

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance
G
H
*

Power steering fluid reservoir . See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 210).
*

Washer fluid reservoir . See Washer Fluid Check (page 210).

The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification.

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.2L POWER STROKE DIESEL
B

E174603

Air cleaner. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 225).

Engine oil dipstick . See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 204).

Engine oil filler cap . See Engine Oil Check (page 204).

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir . See Brake Fluid Check (page 210).

Engine coolant reservoir . See Engine Coolant Check (page 206).

Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 186).

Power steering fluid reservoir . See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 210).

H
*

Washer fluid reservoir . See Washer Fluid Check (page 210).

The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification.

203

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 3.2L
POWER STROKE DIESEL

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 3.5L

B
A

E71362
E174604

Minimum

Maximum

Minimum

Maximum

ENGINE OIL CHECK
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 3.7L

Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Switch off the engine and wait 10
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint free cloth. Replace the
dipstick and remove it again to check
the oil level.

If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add
oil immediately. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 265).

E174604

Minimum

Maximum

Note: Check the oil level before starting the
engine.
Note: Make sure that the oil level is
between the minimum and the maximum
marks.
Note: Do not use oil additives or other
engine treatments. Under certain conditions,
they could damage the engine.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3000 mi (5,000 km).

204

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance
Adding Engine Oil

WARNINGS
Do not remove the oil filter when the
engine is running.

WARNINGS
Only add oil when the engine is cold.
If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutes
for the engine to cool down.

Remove the oil pan drain plug and wait
for the oil to drain into a suitable
container.
2. Renew the oil filter.
3. Reinstall the oil pan drain plug.
4. Refill the engine with new oil that
meets Ford specifications. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
265).
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.

Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running.
1. Remove the engine oil filler cap.
2. Add engine oil that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 265).
3. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it until you feel a strong resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.

Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.

5. Reset the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor.
See Oil Change Indicator Reset
(page 206).

CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL
AND OIL FILTER

Engine Lubrication for Severe
Service Operation

WARNINGS
Prolonged and repeated skin contact
with mineral oil will result in the
removal of natural fats from the skin,
leading to dryness, irritation and dermatitis.
In addition, used engine oil contains
potentially harmful contaminants, which
may cause skin cancer. If skin contact
occurs, wash the area thoroughly with
soap or skin cleanser and water
immediately.

The following conditions define severe
service operation. The Intelligent Oil Life
Monitor will determine engine oil and oil
filter change intervals.
• Frequent or extended idling.
• Frequent low-speed operation at
25 mph (40 km/h) or less.
• Frequent severe dust condition
operation.
• Frequent off-road operation.
• Sustained ambient temperatures of
-9°F (-23°C) or below.
• Sustained ambient temperatures of
100°F (38°C) or above.
• Sustained towing operation above
1000 mi (1,600 km).

Do not dispose of engine oils or oil
filters in the household refuse or the
public sewage system. Use an
authorized waste disposal facility.
Do not remove the oil pan drain plug
when the engine is running.

205

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance
•

•

Sustained high-speed driving at Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (maximum
loaded weight for vehicle operation).
Sustained use of diesel fuel other than
ultra-low sulfur diesel (ULSD).

ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
Checking the Engine Coolant

OIL CHANGE INDICATOR
RESET

When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the engine
coolant at the intervals listed in the
scheduled maintenance information. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 440).

Resetting the Oil Life Monitoring
System

Note: Make sure that the level is between
the MIN and MAX marks on the coolant
reservoir.

Only reset the oil life monitoring system
after changing the engine oil and oil filter.

Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.

Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below
the MIN mark, or empty, add coolant
immediately. See Adding Engine Coolant
in this chapter.

2.
3.
4.

6.
7.
8.

Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
engine. For vehicles with push-button
start, press and hold the start button
for two seconds without pressing the
brake pedal. Do not start the engine.
Press the accelerator and brake pedals
at the same time.
Keep the accelerator and brake pedals
fully pressed.
After three seconds, a message
confirming that the reset is in progress
will be displayed.
After 25 seconds, a message
confirming that the reset is complete
will be displayed.
Release the accelerator and brake
pedals.
The message confirming that the reset
is complete will no longer be displayed.
Switch the ignition off. For vehicles with
push-button start, press the start
button to switch the ignition off.

The coolant concentration should be
maintained within 48% to 50%, which
equates to a freeze point between -29.2°F
(-34°C) and -34.5°F (-37°C).
Note: For best results, coolant
concentration should be tested with a
refractometer, for example Robinair®
coolant and battery refractometer 75240.
We do not recommend the use of
hydrometers or coolant test strips for
measuring coolant concentrations.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant,
antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside
of its specified function and vehicle location.

Adding Engine Coolant
WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Steam and scalding
liquids released from a hot cooling
system can burn you badly. Also, spilling
coolant on hot engine parts can burn you.

206

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance
•

WARNINGS
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir. If
sprayed on the windshield, engine
coolant could make it difficult to see
through the windshield.
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure
relief cap. The cooling system is under
pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened
slightly.

•

Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants or additives as they can
cause damage to the engine cooling or
heating systems. The vehicle warranty does
not cover this damage.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
engine coolant may change color from
orange to pink or light red. As long as the
engine coolant is clear and uncontaminated,
this color change does not indicate that the
engine coolant has degraded or that you
drain the engine coolant, flush the system
or replace the engine coolant.

•

Do not mix different colors or types of
coolant in your vehicle. Make sure the
correct coolant is used. Mixing of
engine coolants may harm the engine’s
cooling system. The use of incorrect
coolant may harm engine and cooling
system components and may void the
warranty. Use prediluted engine
coolant meeting the Ford specification.
See Capacities and Specifications
(page 265).
In case of emergency, you can add a
large amount of water without engine
coolant in order to reach a vehicle
service location. In this instance, you
must have the cooling system drained,
chemically cleaned with Motorcraft
Premium Cooling System Flush, and
refilled with engine coolant as soon as
possible. Water alone (without engine
coolant) can cause engine damage, for
example corrosion, overheating or
freezing.
Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or
any engine coolants mixed with alcohol
or methanol antifreeze. Alcohol and
other liquids can cause engine damage,
for example overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives
to the coolant. These can be harmful
and compromise the corrosion
protection of the engine coolant.

Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will
escape as you unscrew the cap.
Whenever you add coolant, check the
coolant level in the coolant reservoir the
next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough prediluted engine
coolant to bring the coolant level to the
correct level.

Recycled Engine Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
engine coolant since a Ford-approved
recycling process is not yet available.

207

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance
Used engine coolant should be disposed
of in an appropriate manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.

How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine
coolant temperature gauge will move to
the red area and:
The coolant temperature
warning light will illuminate.

Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to have a Ford
authorized dealer increase the coolant
concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60% will
provide improved freeze point
protection. Engine coolant
concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection
characteristics of the engine coolant
and may cause engine damage.

The service engine soon
indicator will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still
operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• This will disable the air conditioning
system.

If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It may be necessary to have a Ford
authorized dealer decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40% will
provide improved overheat protection.
Engine coolant concentrations below
40% will decrease the corrosion or
freeze protection characteristics of the
engine coolant and may cause engine
damage.

Continued operation will increase the
engine temperature and the engine will
completely shut down, causing steering
and braking effort to increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the
engine can be re-started. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to minimize engine damage.

Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted engine
coolant for optimum cooling system and
engine protection.

When Fail-Safe Mode Is Turned On
WARNING
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate the
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long
as necessary to bring the vehicle to rest in
a safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle will
have limited power, will not be able to
maintain high-speed operation, and may
completely shut down and lose power
steering assist, and power brake assist,
which may increase the possibility of a
crash resulting in serious injury.

What You Should Know About FailSafe Cooling
If you deplete the engine coolant supply,
this feature allows you to temporarily drive
your vehicle before you incur incremental
component damage. The fail-safe distance
depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle
load and terrain.

208

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance
The engine is capable of completely
shutting down automatically to prevent
engine damage, if this situation occurs:

amount of speed reduction will depend on
the vehicle loading, towing, grade, ambient
temperature and other factors. If this
occurs, there is no need to pull off the road.
You can continue to drive your vehicle
while this message is active.

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so and switch the ignition off.
2. Have your vehicle towed to an
authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish
if low.
5. Re-start the engine and take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving the vehicle without repairing
the engine problem increases the chance of
engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.

The air conditioning may also cycle on and
off during severe operating conditions to
protect overheating of the engine. When
the engine coolant temperature decreases
normal operating temperature, the air
conditioning will turn on. If you notice any
of the following:
•
•
•

Engine Fluid Temperature
Management (If Equipped)

WARNING
To reduce the risk of a crash and
injury, be prepared that the vehicle
speed may reduce and the vehicle
may not be able to accelerate with full
power until the fluid temperature reduces.

3.
When towing a trailer the vehicle’s engine
may temporarily reach a higher
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long
or steep grade in hot ambient
temperatures.

4.
5.

You may notice a reduction in vehicle
speed caused by reduced engine power.
The design of your vehicle allows it to enter
this mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place in order to
manage the engine fluid temperatures. The

The engine coolant temperature gauge
moves fully into the red area.
The coolant temperature warning light
illuminates.
The service engine soon indicator
illuminates.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so and place the vehicle in park
(P).
Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
moves away from the red area. After
several minutes, if this does not
happen, follow the remaining steps.
Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool before checking the coolant level.
If the coolant level is normal, you may
restart the engine and continue on.
If the coolant is low, add coolant,
restart the engine and take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.

209

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance
Have an authorized dealer check and
change the transmission fluid at the
correct service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 440). Your
transmission does not consume fluid.
However, if the transmission slips, shifts
slowly or if you notice a sign of leaking
fluid, contact an authorized dealer.

2. Add power steering fluid to the MAX
mark. Do not overfill.
3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you
feel a strong resistance.

Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.

Note: The reservoir supplies the front and
rear washer systems.

BRAKE FLUID CHECK

For information on fluid dilution, refer to
the product instructions.

WASHER FLUID CHECK

When adding fluid, use a mixture of washer
fluid and water to help prevent freezing in
cold weather and improve the cleaning
capability. We recommend that you use
only high quality washer fluid.

Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX
lines are within the normal operating range;
there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid
levels are outside of the normal operating
range, the performance of the system
could be compromised; seek service from
your authorized dealer immediately.

DRAINING THE FUEL FILTER
WATER TRAP
WARNING
Do not dispose of fuel in the
household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized
waste disposal facility.

POWER STEERING FLUID
CHECK

Your vehicle is fitted with a diesel fuel
conditioner module located behind the fuel
tank. A warning lamp will illuminate and a
message will be displayed when
approximately 3.38 (100 ml) of water
accumulates in the module. If you allow
the water level to exceed this level, the
water may pass through to the engine and
may cause fuel injection equipment
damage.

WARNING
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. This could cause serious
personal injury. Rinse the affected
areas immediately with plenty of water
and consult a physician.
If the power steering fluid level is not
between the MAX and MIN marks, add
power steering fluid that meets the correct
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 271).

Note: To drain the fuel filter water trap,
access the underside of your vehicle.

Adding Power Steering Fluid
1.

Remove the filler cap.

210

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance

3
2

E177378

E184430

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Rotate the housing counterclockwise
to the unlock position.
4. Remove the housing and filter.
5. Replace the housing seal and lubricate.
6. Insert the new filter into housing and
refit aligning the arrows in the unlock
position.

Attach a tube to the drain plug and
place the end of the tube into a
suitable container.
2. Loosen the drain plug by turning
counterclockwise one to two turns and
allow the water to drain.
Note: The drain plug will rise when opening.
3. Tighten the drain plug by turning
clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: The drain plug will lower when
closing.
When you start the engine the water in fuel
indicator lamp turns off after a short period
of time.

Changing the Fuel Filter
Note: To drain the fuel filter, access the
underside of your vehicle.
1.

Drain the fuel from the filter housing.

211

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance
If the Engine Does Not Start or Runs
Rough

E177379

1. Remove the Schrader valve cap.
2. Attach suitable tool with a tube to the
Schrader valve and place the end of
the tube into a suitable container.
3. Open the Schrader valve.
4. Switch the ignition on until a steady
stream of fuel can be seen coming out
of the tube.
5. Switch the ignition off.
6. Remove the tool from the Schrader
valve.
7. Refit the Schrader valve cap.
8. Switch the ignition on for at least 30
seconds then switch the ignition off.
9. Repeat this process three times.
10. Start the engine.

E184789

Rotate the housing clockwise aligning
the arrows in the lock position.
8. Purge air from the system.
Note: Only add fuel that meets the Ford
specification. See Fuel and Refueling
(page 109).

Purging Air From the Fuel System
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Switch the ignition on for at least 30
seconds then switch the ignition off.
Repeat this process six times.
Start the engine and maintain engine
speed at 1500 RPM.
Wait 20 seconds.
If the engine is running smoothly,
reduce the engine speed to idle.
Check for leaks.
Switch the ignition off.

FUEL FILTER - GASOLINE
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
is not needed.

212

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
Removing the Battery
WARNINGS
You must replace your vehicle
battery with one of exactly the same
specification.

Make sure the battery box is correctly
sealed.
Your vehicle battery is heavy; take
care when lifting and removing.
E152529

Note: If you have power seats and the
battery has no charge, jump-start your
vehicle to move the seat. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 177).

2. Unhook the cover flap and tuck it under
the seat valance.

Note: Where applicable you must
reprogram the audio system using the
keycode.
The battery is located inside your vehicle
under the driver seat.

E146781

3. Remove the seat track end caps on
both sides.
4. Remove the seat track rear bolts on
both sides.

1
E152526

Slide the seat fully forward. Remove
the cover trim by pulling up the tabs
with your fingers.

213

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance

6
E146773

5. Remove the battery clamp and cover
bolts.
6. Remove the battery clamp and cover.

E162775

8. Remove the cable securing clips from
the cover. Release the retaining clips
and remove the cover.

E162774

Remove the battery terminal cover.
E162776

9. Disconnect the battery. Remove the
negative (-) terminal first.

Installing the Battery
WARNING
Make sure that you securely fasten
the seat runner bolts before installing
the covers.

214

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance
Note: The windshield wiper blades are
different in length. If you install wiper blades
of the wrong length, the rain sensor may not
work correctly.

Install in the reverse order.

CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES

ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
If your vehicle has been involved in a crash,
have the aim of the headlamp beam
checked by an authorized dealer.
Headlamp Aiming Target

E142463

Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.

CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
Changing the Windshield Wiper
Blades

E142592

Lift the wiper arm.

8 feet (2.4 meters)

Ground to the center of the
headlamp bulb

25 feet (7.6 meters)

Horizontal reference line

Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure

Park your vehicle on level ground
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters)
from a wall or screen.
2. Measure the distance from the ground
to the center of the headlamp bulb and
mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter) long
horizontal reference line on the wall or
screen at this height.

E72899
1. Press the locking button.
2. Remove the wiper blade.
3. Install in the reverse order. Make sure
that the wiper blade locks into place.

215

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance
Note: To see a clearer light pattern while
adjusting one headlamp, you may want to
block the light from the other headlamp.

5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Use a suitable tool, for
example a screwdriver or hexagonal
socket, to turn the adjuster clockwise
or counterclockwise to adjust the
vertical aim of the headlamp. The
horizontal edge of the brighter light
should touch the horizontal reference
line.
6. Close the hood and switch off the
lamps.

3. Switch on the low beam headlamps
and open the hood.

Horizontal Aim Adjustment
The horizontal aim of the headlamp beam
on your vehicle is not adjustable.
E142465

REMOVING A HEADLAMP

4. On the wall or screen you will observe
a flat zone of high intensity light
located at the top of the beam pattern.
If the top edge of the flat zone of high
intensity light is not on the horizontal
reference line, adjust the aim of the
headlamp beam.

WARNING
Switch all of the lamps and the
ignition off. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious
personal injury.
1.

Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 200).

E169198

2. Remove the screws.

E164485

216

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance
WARNINGS
Bulbs become hot when in use. Let
them cool down before you remove
them.
Use the correct specification bulb. See
Bulb Specification Chart (page 221).
The following instructions describe how to
remove the bulbs. Install in the reverse
order unless otherwise stated.
E169199

Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See
an authorized dealer.

3. Pull the headlamp toward the front of
your vehicle to disengage it from its
locating points and then lift the
headlamp up.

Headlamp

E175739
E169200

4. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
Note: When you install the headlamp, make
sure that you correctly attach the electrical
connector.
Note: When you install the headlamp, make
sure that you correctly engage its locating
points.

Parking lamp and direction
indicator lamp.

Headlamp high beam.

Headlamp low beam and
daytime running lamp.

Side marker lamp.

Note: You may have to remove a cover to
gain access to the bulb.

CHANGING A BULB
WARNINGS
Switch all of the lamps and the
ignition off. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious
personal injury.

217

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance
Headlamp Low Beam and Daytime
Running Lamp

Side Marker Lamp

E175740
E175742

Remove the headlamp. See
Removing a Headlamp (page 216).
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.

Remove the headlamp. See
Removing a Headlamp (page 216).
2. Remove the cover.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and
remove it.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.

Parking Lamp and Direction Indicator
Lamp

Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Headlamp High Beam

2
E175741

Remove the headlamp. See
Removing a Headlamp (page 216).
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.

E175743

Remove the headlamp. See
Removing a Headlamp (page 216).
2. Remove the cover.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and
remove it.

218

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance
Side Direction Indicator (If Equipped)

4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.

Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.

Front Clearance Lamp (If Equipped)

2
E169209

3.
4.
5.

Remove the large mirror glass. Tilt the
mirror glass fully up, pull the mirror
glass toward you from the bottom.
Remove the small mirror glass. Tilt the
mirror glass fully down, pull the mirror
glass toward you from the top.
Remove the screws.
Remove the lamp lens.
Remove the bulb.

Rear Lamps

2
2
E181397

1. Carefully remove the lamp.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.

E175758

1. Remove the screws.
2. Remove the lamp.

219

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance
License Plate Lamp

2
1

3
E175745
E72789

3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.

1. Carefully release the spring clip.
2. Remove the lamp.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it. Pull the bulb straight
out.

4
A

Interior Lamp
Vehicles with Interior Sensors

2
C
E175746

Tail and brake lamp.

Reversing lamp.

Rear clearance lamp.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.

Central High Mounted Brake Lamp
E154370

This is not a serviceable item, see an
authorized dealer if it fails.

1. Carefully remove the lens.
2. Remove the bulb.

220

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance
Reading Lamps

Vehicles without Interior Sensors

Vehicles with Interior Sensors

2
3

E99453

1. Carefully remove the lamp.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb.

E72786

1. Carefully remove the lamp.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.

Sun Visor Mirror Lamp

E73939

E72785

1. Carefully remove the lamp.
2. Remove the bulb.

3. Remove the bulb.

BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Exterior Lamps
Lamp

Specification

Power (watt)

Brake, tail and direction indicator lamp

3057K

26/6

Front clearance lamp (Exterior mirror)
Front direction indicator lamp

221

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

W5W

3457NAK

Maintenance
Lamp

Specification

Power (watt)

W5W

168

High beam headlamp and Daytime
running lamp

9005

License plate lamp

Front I.D. lamp
Front side marker lamp

W5W

Low beam headlamp

H11

Rear clearance lamp

168

Reversing lamp

3057K

Side direction indicator

W5W

Note: If your vehicle is fitted with LED lamps these are not serviceable items, see an
authorized dealer if they fail.
Interior Lamps
Lamp

Specification

Power (watt)

W6W

Festoon

211 Festoon

W6W

211 Festoon

Front interior lamp
Front interior lamp - with category 1
alarm
Luggage compartment lamp
Map reading lamp
Side door entrance lamp

Note: If your vehicle is fitted with LED lamps these are not serviceable items, see an
authorized dealer if they fail.

222

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance
2. Clean the area around the air tube to
air filter cover connection to prevent
debris from entering the system and
then loosen the bolt on the air tube
clamp so the clamp is no longer snug
to the air tube. It is not necessary to
completely remove the clamp. Pull the
air tube off from the air filter cover.
3. Release the clamps that secure the air
filter cover to the air filter housing.

CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER - 3.5L
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. The vehicle warranty may be void
for any damage to the engine if the correct
air filter element is not used.
Only use the specified air filter. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
265).
Change the air filter element at the proper
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 440).

E174669

4. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
5. Install a new air filter element.
6. Replace the air filter housing cover.
Engage the clamps that secure the air
filter housing cover to the air filter
housing. Be careful not to crimp the
filter element edges between the air
filter housing and cover. Make sure that
the tabs on the edge are correctly
aligned into the slots.
7. Slip the air tube onto the air filter cover
and snugly tighten the bolt on the air
tube clamp, but do not overtighten.
8. Reconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector to the outlet tube.
Make sure the locking tab on the
connector is in the locked position.

3
E174608

Disconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector and cable from
the air filter cover.

223

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER - 3.7L
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. The vehicle warranty may be void
for any damage to the engine if the correct
air filter element is not used.
Only use the specified air filter. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
265).
Change the air filter element at the proper
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 440).

E174669

4. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
5. Install a new air filter element.
6. Replace the air filter housing. Engage
the clamps that secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.
Be careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter
housing and cover. Make sure that the
tabs on the edge are correctly aligned
into the slots.
7. Slip the air tube onto the air filter cover
and snugly tighten the bolt on the air
tube clamp, but do not overtighten.
8. Reconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector to the outlet tube.
Make sure the locking tab on the
connector is in the locked position.

3
E174608

Disconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector and cable from
the air filter cover.

224

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance
Only use the specified air filter. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
265).

CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER - 3.2L POWER STROKE
DIESEL

Change the air filter element and foam
filler at the proper interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 440).

WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.

Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. The vehicle warranty may be void
for any damage to the engine if the correct
air filter element is not used.

Note: After operating the vehicle up to
200 mi (320 km) in heavy snowfall, we
recommend that you open the hood at the
earliest opportunity and clear the snow and
ice from air filter housing. Do not remove the
foam filter.

E174609

Disconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector and cable from
the air filter cover.
2. Clean the area around the air tube to
air filter cover connection to prevent
debris from entering the system and
then loosen the bolt on the air tube
clamp so the clamp is no longer snug
to the air tube. It is not necessary to
completely remove the clamp. Pull the
air tube off from the air filter cover.
3. Release the clamps that secures the
air filter cover to the air filter housing.

E177563

The foam filter must be in place at all
times.

225

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Maintenance

E177562

4. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
5. Install a new air filter element. Make
sure that the groove seal on the
pleated paper filter traps both sides of
the vertical partition of the air box.
6. Replace the air filter housing. Engage
the clamps that secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.
Be careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter
housing and cover. Make sure that the
tabs on the edge are correctly aligned
into the slots.
7. Slip the air tube onto the air filter cover
and snugly tighten the bolt on the air
tube clamp, but do not overtighten.
8. Reconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector to the outlet tube.
Make sure the locking tab on the
connector is in the locked position.

226

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Vehicle Care
Note: Some car washes use water at high
pressure. Due to this, water droplets may
enter inside your vehicle and could also
damage certain parts of your vehicle.

CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
• Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42)
• Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal
Cleaner (ZC-15)
• Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
• Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
• Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
• Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada
only) (CXC-66-A)
• Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-101)
• Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-100)
• Motorcraft Premium Quality
Windshield Washer Fluid (Canada
only) [CXC-37-(A, B, D or F)]
• Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash
Concentrate with Bitterant (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-B2)
• Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
• Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-56)
• Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover
(U.S. only) (ZC-14)
• Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23)
• Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner
(ZC-37-A)

Note: Remove the aerial before using an
automatic car wash.
Note: Switch the heater blower off to
prevent contamination of the fresh air filter.
We recommend that you wash your vehicle
with a sponge and lukewarm water
containing a car shampoo.

Cleaning the Headlamps
Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses
or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or
chemical solvents to clean them.
Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when
they are dry.

Cleaning the Rear Window
Note: Do not scrape the inside of the rear
window or use abrasives or chemical
solvents to clean it.
Use a clean, lint free cloth or a damp
chamois leather to clean the inside of the
rear window.

Cleaning the Chrome Trim
Note: Do not use abrasives or chemical
solvents. Use soapy water.
Note: Do not apply cleaning product to hot
surfaces and do not leave cleaning product
on chrome surfaces for a period of time
exceeding that which is recommended.
Note: Industrial-strength (heavy-duty)
cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, may cause
damage over a period of time.

CLEANING THE EXTERIOR

Body Paintwork Preservation

Note: If you use a car wash with a waxing
cycle, make sure that you remove the wax
from the windshield and the wiper blades.

WARNINGS
Do not polish your vehicle in strong
sunshine.

Note: Prior to using a car wash facility
check the suitability of it for your vehicle.
227

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Vehicle Care
•

WARNINGS
Do not allow polish to touch plastic
surfaces. It could be difficult to
remove.
Do not apply polish to the windshield
or rear window. This could cause the
wipers to become noisy and they
may not clear the window properly.
We recommend that you wax the
paintwork once or twice a year.

•
•

Sliding Door Tracks (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not open or close the sliding
doors when your hands are near the
tracks or rollers.

CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.

To clean the sliding door tracks, wipe the
surface using a clean, cotton cloth with a
mild soap and water solution.

When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.

Do not use high-pressure washing.

WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
applying wax.
•
•
•

Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black)
colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
Do not apply wax to glass areas.
After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.

Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.

228

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Vehicle Care
•

•

Safety Belts

Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.

Note: Do not use abrasives, or chemical
solvents to clean them.
Note: Do not allow moisture to penetrate
the safety belt retractor mechanism.
Clean them with interior cleaner or water
applied with a soft sponge. Let them dry
naturally, away from artificial heat.

CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES

Instrument Cluster Screens, LCD
Screens and Radio Screens

Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.

Note: Do not use abrasives, alcoholic
solvents or chemical solvents to clean them.

Rear Windows
Note: Do not use any abrasive materials to
clean the interior of the rear windows.

To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner.
• For windshields contaminated with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.

Note: Do not install stickers or labels to the
interior of the rear windows.

CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or
strong detergents when cleaning the
steering wheel or instrument panel
to avoid contamination of the airbag
system.

Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.

Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp, white cotton
cloth, then use a clean and dry white
cotton cloth to dry these areas.

CLEANING THE INTERIOR
Note: Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill on interior surfaces. If a
spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage
may not be covered by your warranty.

229

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Vehicle Care
•

•

Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
Be certain to wash or wipe your hands
clean if you have been in contact with
certain products such as insect
repellent and suntan lotion in order to
avoid possible damage to the interior
painted surfaces.
Do not use household or glass cleaners
as these may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and
cluster lens.
Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Damage may not be covered by your
warranty.

5. Following this, wipe area dry with a
clean, white, cotton cloth.

REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
You should repair paintwork damage
caused by stones from the road or minor
scratches as soon as possible. A choice of
products are available from an authorized
dealer.
Remove particles such as bird droppings,
tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road
salt and industrial fallout before repairing
paint chips.
Always read and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions before using the products.

CLEANING THE ALLOY
WHEELS

If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:

Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.

Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
white, cotton cloth.
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean,
white cotton cloth. For more thorough
cleaning, use a mild soap and water
solution. If the spot cannot be
completely cleaned by this method,
the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning
product designed for automotive
interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, white, cotton cloth and press
the cloth onto the soiled area. Allow
this to set at room temperature for 30
minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not
soiled badly, use this cloth to clean the
area by using a rubbing motion for 60
seconds.

Note: Some automatic car washes may
cause damage to the finish on your wheel
rims and covers.
Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty
cleaners in combination with brush agitation
to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear
away the clear coat finish over a period time.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based
or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
wool, fuels or strong household detergents.
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs.
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:

230

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Vehicle Care
•

•

Clean the wheels weekly using
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner.
Apply using manufacturer's
instructions.
Use a sponge to remove heavy
deposits of dirt and brake dust
accumulation.
Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream
of water when you have completed the
cleaning process.
To remove tar and grease, use
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.

•
•

•

•
•

Engine

VEHICLE STORAGE

•

If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.

•

We engineer and test all motor vehicles
and their components for reliable, regular
driving. Under various conditions,
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.

•

General
•
•
•

Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
Protect from sunlight, if possible.
If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.

•

Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage.
Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.

Fuel system
•

Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.

Cooling system

Body
•

Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil.
Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.

•
•

Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
and the underside of front fenders.
Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.

231

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Protect against freezing temperatures.
When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.

Vehicle Care
Battery
•
•

•

Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect
the battery cables to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.

•

Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.

•

Brakes
•

Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.

Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.

Tires
•

Maintain recommended air pressure.

Miscellaneous
•

•

Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.

Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.

Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.

232

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
How Your Vehicle Differs from
Other Vehicles

GENERAL INFORMATION
Notice to Utility Vehicle, Van and
Truck Owners

Sport-utility vehicles, vans and trucks can
differ from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:

WARNINGS
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types
of vehicles. To reduce the risk of
serious injury or death from a rollover or
other crash you must avoid sharp turns and
abrupt maneuvers, drive at safe speeds for
the conditions, keep tires properly inflated,
never overload or improperly load your
vehicle, and make sure every passenger is
properly restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts.
Children and infants must use appropriate
restraints to minimize the risk of injury or
ejection.

E145299

•

E145298

Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.

•

233

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
All other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.

Wheels and Tires

As a result of the above dimensional
differences, sport-utility vehicles, vans and
trucks often will have a higher center of
gravity and a greater difference in center
of gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.

Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
The tire Quality Grades can be
found where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (C)(2).
Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.

These differences that make your vehicle
so versatile also make it handle differently
than an ordinary passenger car.

United States Department of
Transportation Tire Quality
Grades

TIRE CARE

The United States of America
Department of Transportation
requires Ford Motor Company to
give you the following information
about tire grades exactly as the
government has written it.

E166373

Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grades

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear 1½ times as well on
the government course as a tire

E142542

234

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.

The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.

Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.

Glossary of Tire Terminology
•

•

Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a
tire that is correctly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.

•

235

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Tire label: A label showing the
OE (Original Equipment) tire
sizes, recommended inflation
pressure and the maximum
weight the vehicle can carry.
Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the
sidewall of each tire providing
information about the tire
brand and manufacturing
plant, tire size and date of
manufacture. Also referred to
as DOT code.
Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.

Wheels and Tires
•

•

•
•
•
•

•

Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires
designed to carry a maximum
load at set pressure. For
example: for P-metric tires
35 psi (2.4 bar) or 36 psi
(2.5 bar) depending on tire size
and for Metric tires 36 psi
(2.5 bar). Increasing the
inflation pressure beyond this
pressure will not increase the
tire capability.
Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry
a heavier maximum load at
42 psi (2.9 bar). Increasing the
inflation pressure beyond this
pressure will not increase the
tire’s load carrying capability.
bar Metric unit of atmospheric
pressure.
kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit
of air pressure.
PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of
direct sunlight for an hour or
more and prior to the vehicle
being driven for 1 mi (1.6 km).

•
•
•
•

•

Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver seating position) or Tire
Label located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver door.
B-pillar: The structural
member at the side of the
vehicle behind the front door.
Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when
mounted on the vehicle.
Rim: The metal support
(wheel) for a tire or a tire and
tube assembly upon which the
tire beads are seated.

Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall
United States of America, and
Canada Federal regulations
require tire manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and

236

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a United States of
America DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard
certification and in case of a recall.

C D
B

G
H

P Type Tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below.
Note: Tire size, load index and
speed rating for your vehicle may
be different from the following
example.

E142543

C
D

237

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

P: Indicates a tire,
designated by the Tire
and Rim Association, that
may be used for service on
cars, sport utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks.
215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in
millimeters from sidewall
edge to sidewall edge. In
general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
65: Indicates the aspect
ratio which gives the tire's
ratio of height to width.
R: Indicates a radial type
tire.

Wheels and Tires
E

15: Indicates the wheel or
rim diameter in inches. If
you change the wheel
size, you will have to
purchase new tires to
match the new wheel
diameter.
95: Indicates the tire's
load index. It is an index
that relates to how much
weight a tire can carry.
You may find this
information in the Owner’s
Guide. If not, contact a
local tire dealer.
H: Indicates the tire's
speed rating. The speed
rating denotes the speed
at which a tire is designed
to be driven for extended
periods of time under a
standard condition of load
and inflation pressure.
The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and
inflation pressure. These
speed ratings may need
to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions.
The ratings range from 81
mph (130 kph) to 186 mph
(299 kph). These ratings
are listed in the following
chart.

I
J

238

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

United States of
America DOT Tire
Identification Number
(TIN): This begins with
the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire
meets all federal
standards. The next two
numbers or letters are the
plant code designating
where it was
manufactured, the next
two are the tire size code
and the last four numbers
represent the week and
year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317
mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000 the
numbers go to four digits.
For example, 2501 means
the 25th week of 2001.
The numbers in between
are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to
contact customers if a tire
defect requires a recall.
M+S or M/S: Mud and
Snow, AT: All Terrain, AS:
All Season.
Tire Ply Composition
and Material Used:
Indicates the number of
plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated
fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire

Wheels and Tires

manufacturers also must
indicate the ply materials
in the tire and the
sidewall, which include
steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
Maximum Load:
Indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and
pounds that can be
carried by the tire. Refer to
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label
(affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver
seating position), for the
correct tire pressure for
your vehicle.
Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature
Grades:Treadwear The
treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under
controlled conditions on
a specified government
test course. For example,
a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half
times as well on the
government course as a
tire graded 100. Traction:
The traction grades, from
highest to lowest are AA,
A, B, and C. The grades
represent the tire's ability
to stop on wet pavement

239

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

as measured under
controlled conditions on
specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature: The
temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire's
resistance to the
generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat
when tested under
controlled conditions on
a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the
tire manufacturer's
maximum permissible
pressure or the pressure
at which the maximum
load can be carried by the
tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the
manufacturer's
recommended cold
inflation pressure, which
can be found on the
Safety Compliance
Certification Label
(affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver
seating position), or Tire
Label which is located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of

Wheels and Tires

Letter
rating

mph ( km/h)

81 mph (130 km/h)

Note: If the tire size does not begin
with a letter, this may mean it is
designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical
Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association). You
may not find this information on all
tires because it is not required by
federal law.
Note: The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings, for example standard
load, radial tubeless, etc.

87 mph (140 km/h)

T Type Tires

99 mph (159 km/h)

106 mph (171 km/h)

112 mph (180 km/h)

118 mph (190 km/h)

124 mph (200 km/h)

130 mph (210 km/h)

149 mph (240 km/h)

T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size. T type tires have some
additional information beyond
those of P type tires. The
definitions of these items are
listed below.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.

168 mph (270 km/h)

the driver door. The cold
inflation pressure should
never be set lower than
the recommended
pressure on the vehicle
label.
Tire speed ratings

Y
186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299
km/h), tire manufacturers always
use the letters ZR.

240

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
C

B
A

D
E
D
E

80: Indicates the aspect
ratio which gives the tire's
ratio of height to width.
Numbers of 70 or lower
indicate a short sidewall.
D: Indicates a diagonal
type tire. R: Indicates a
radial type tire.
16: Indicates the wheel or
rim diameter in inches. If
you change the wheel
size, you will have to
purchase new tires to
match the new wheel
diameter.

Additional Information for LT
Type Tires
LT235/85 R16 is an example of a
tire size. LT type tires have some
additional information beyond
those of P type tires. The
definitions of these items are
listed below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.

E142545

T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire
and Rim Association, that
is intended for temporary
service on cars,
sport-utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks.
145: Indicates the
nominal width of the tire
in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the
tire.

241

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
C

D
E142544

LT: Indicates a tire,
designated by the Tire
and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended
for service on light trucks.
Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits:
Indicates the tire's
load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.

Maximum Load Dual lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold:
Indicates the maximum
load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a
dual, defined as four tires
on the rear axle (a total of
six or more tires on the
vehicle).
Maximum Load Single
lb (kg) at psi (kPa)
cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is
used as a single, defined
as two tires (total) on the
rear axle.

United States of America DOT
Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
United States of America, and
Canada Federal regulations
require tire manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a United States of
America DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard
certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
242

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.

Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that the tires are correctly
inflated.
Every day before you drive, check
the tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips inspect each tire
including the spare tire. Check the
tire pressure with a tire pressure
gauge. Inflate all tires to the
correct inflation pressure.
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. We
recommend the use of a digital or
dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold
inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns
Always inflate the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum
inflation pressure information
found on the tire. The
recommended tire inflation
pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating

Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label
containing tire inflation pressure
by tire size and other important
information located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver door.
Inflating the Tires
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most
common cause of tire failures
and may result in severe tire
cracking, tread separation or
blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat
buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control and
accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!

243

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver door. Failure to follow
the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles
Note: Do not reduce tire pressure
to change the ride characteristics
of your vehicle. If you do not
maintain the tire pressures as
specified by Ford, your vehicle may
experience a condition known as
shimmy. This will cause severe
vibration and oscillations in the
steering wheel when your vehicle
travels over a bump or dip in the
road and is unable to dampen out
by itself. Significantly
under-inflated tires, incorrect tire
usage or any vehicle modifications
such as lift-kits can cause your
vehicle to shimmy. If your vehicle
begins to shimmy, slowly reduce
the speed of your vehicle by
pressing the brake pedal or
releasing the accelerator pedal. As
your vehicle speed reduces the
shimmy will cease.
The maximum inflation pressure
is the tire manufacturer's
maximum permissible pressure or
the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by
the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s
recommended cold inflation
pressure, which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to

either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be
set lower than the recommended
pressure on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature
changes occur, tire inflation
pressures also change. A 10°F
(6°C) temperature drop can
cause a corresponding drop of
10 psi (0.7 bar) in inflation
pressure. Check the tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the
correct pressure which can be
found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the tire pressures:
1. Make sure the tires are cool,
meaning they are not hot from
driving even a mile.
2. Remove the cap from the valve
on one tire, then firmly press
the tire gauge onto the valve
and measure the tire pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended tire pressure.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each
tire, including the spare.

244

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
6. Visually inspect the tires to
make sure there are no nails or
other objects embedded that
could poke a hole in the tire
and cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make
sure there are no gouges, cuts
or bulges.
Note: If you are checking tire
pressure when the tire is hot, for
example you have driven more than
1.0 mi (1.6 km), never bleed or
reduce tire pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A
hot tire at or below recommended
cold inflation pressure could be
significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a
distance to get air for the tires,
check and record the tire pressure
first and add the appropriate air
pressure when you get to the
pump. It is normal for tires to heat
up and the tire pressure to increase
as you drive.
Note: If you over inflate the tire,
release air by pressing on the metal
stem in the center of the valve.
Then recheck the pressure with
your tire gauge.

Note: Some spare tires operate at
a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type mini-spare
tires, refer to the Dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly
information for a description. Store
and maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar).
For full-size and dissimilar spare
tires, refer to the Dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly
information for a description. Store
and maintain at the higher of the
front and rear inflation pressure as
shown on the Tire Label.
Inspecting the Tires and Wheel
Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects, for example
stones, nails or glass that may be
wedged in the tread grooves.
Check the tire and valve stems for
holes, cracks, or cuts that may
permit air leakage and repair or
replace the tire and replace the
valve stem. Inspect the tire
sidewalls for cracking, cuts,
bruises and other signs of damage
or excessive wear. If internal
damage to the tire is suspected,
have the tire removed and
inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your
safety, tires that are damaged or
show signs of excessive wear
should not be used because they
are more likely to blow out or fail.

245

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
Tire Damage

Incorrect or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all the
tires, including the spare,
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following
conditions exist:

Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage, for
example bulges in the tread or
sidewalls, cracks in the tread
groove or separation in the tread
or sidewall. If damage is observed
or suspected have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.

Tire Wear

Tire Age
WARNING
Tires degrade over time
depending on many factors,
for example weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use,
for example load, speed and
inflation pressures the tires
experience throughout their lives.

E142546

When the tread is worn down to
0.08 in (2 mm), tires must be
replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or wear bars, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will
appear on the tire when the tread
is worn down to 0.08 in (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.

In general, tires should be
replaced after six years regardless
of tread wear. However, heat
caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging process
and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace the spare tire
when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if
it has not been used.

246

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
Tire Replacement
Requirements

WARNINGS
Always inflate steel carcass
tires with a remote air fill with
the person inflating standing at a
minimum of 12.1 ft (3.7 m) away
from the wheel and tire assembly.

WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires
and wheels that are the same
size, load index, speed rating and
type, (for example P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel size
may be found on either the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating
position), or the Tire Label which
is located on the B-Pillar or edge
of the driver door. If this
information is not found on these
labels, then you should contact an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of
non-recommended tires and
wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle, transfer case or
power transfer unit failure. If you
have questions regarding tire
replacement, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.

Your vehicle is fitted with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
We recommend that the two front
tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
Note: The wheel valve stems must
also be replaced when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
Fitting Replacement Tires
WARNINGS
When mounting replacement
tires and wheels, you should
not exceed the maximum pressure
indicated on the sidewall of the
tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed
below. If the beads do not seat at
the maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
For mounting pressures
above 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum
pressure on the tire sidewall, the
tire should be replaced by a tire
professional.

247

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
Tire Safety Practices

For mounting pressures up to 1.38
bar greater than the maximum
pressure on the tire sidewall, the
following precautions must be
taken:
• Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
• Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area.
• Stand at a minimum of 12.1 ft
(3.7 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
• Use eye and ear protection.

WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., do not
rapidly spin the tires. Spinning the
tires can tear the tire and cause
an explosion. A tire can explode in
as little as three to five seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at
over 35 mph (56 km/h). The
tires may fail and injure a
passenger or bystander.

Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (If Equipped)

Driving habits have a great deal to
do with your tire mileage and
safety:
• Observe posted speed limits.
• Avoid fast starts, stops and
turns.
• Avoid potholes and objects on
the road.
• Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when
parking.

The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the
operation of the tire pressure
monitoring system. If the tire
pressure monitoring system
indicator is flashing, the tire
pressure monitoring system is
malfunctioning. The replacement
tire might be incompatible with
the tire pressure monitoring
system, or a component of the tire
pressure monitoring system may
be damaged. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 251).
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels (originally installed
on your vehicle) are not designed
to be used in aftermarket wheels.

Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive
there is always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic.
This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
important.

248

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect a tire or your vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with the spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.

Tire Rotation
WARNING
If the tire label shows
different tire pressures for the
front and rear tires and the vehicle
is fitted with a tire pressure
monitoring system, the settings
for the system sensors need to be
reset. Always carry out the system
reset procedure after tire rotation.
If the system is not reset, it may
not provide a low tire pressure
warning when necessary. See Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(page 251).

Tire and Wheel Alignment

Rotating the tires at the
recommended interval detailed in
the Scheduled Maintenance
chapter will help the tires wear
more evenly, providing better tire
performance and longer tire life.
Sometimes irregular tire wear can
be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: After rotating the tires the
inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle
requirements.
Note: If the tires show uneven
wear ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.

A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
the tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you are
driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of the tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer. Front-wheel
drive vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension may
require alignment of all four
wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
249

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
Note: Your vehicle may have a
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly is defined as a
spare wheel and tire assembly that
is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.

Rear-wheel drive and
four-wheel drive vehicles with
dual rear wheels.

Rear-wheel drive and
four-wheel drive vehicles with
single rear wheels (front tires
at left of diagram).

E166988

USING WINTER TIRES

E142548

WARNING
When you use winter tires on your
vehicle, you must make sure that you
use the correct lug nuts.
If winter tires are used, you must make sure
that you use the correct tire pressures.

250

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
•

USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING

•

Snow tires must be the same size,
load index, speed rating as those
originally provided by Ford. Use of
any tire or wheel not recommended by
Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case or power transfer unit failure.

•

•
•
•

The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires or snow chains.

Install snow chains securely, make sure
they do not touch any wiring, brake
lines or fuel lines.
S class or 15mm or less in dimension
as measured on the sidewall of the tire.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or
the maximum speed recommended by
the chain manufacturer, whichever is
less.
Purchase snow chains or cables from
a manufacturer that clearly labels the
body to tire dimension restrictions.
Remove the cables when they are no
longer needed.
Do not use snow chains on dry roads.
If you have any questions regarding
snow chains or cables, see an
authorized dealer.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (If Equipped)

If you choose to install snow tires on your
vehicle, they must be the same size,
construction, and load range as the original
tires listed on the tire inflation pressure
label (located on the edge of driver door
or the B-Pillar) and they must be installed
on all four wheels. Mixing tires of different
size or construction on your vehicle can
adversely affect your vehicle’s handling
and braking, and may lead to loss of
vehicle control.

WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system
is not a substitute for manually
checking tire pressure. The tire
pressure should be checked periodically
(at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see
Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure
to properly maintain your tire pressure
could increase the risk of tire failure, loss
of control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.

If you use snow chains, we recommended
that steel wheels of the same size and
specifications are used, snow chains may
damage aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
chains:
• Avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Only certain snow chains or cables
have been approved by Ford as safe
for use on vehicles with either 235/65
R16C or 195/75 R16C tires.
• Snow chains or cables must be
mounted in pairs on the rear tires only.

251

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)

When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

The tire pressure monitoring system
complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.

Changing Tires With a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System

Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

E142549

Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.

252

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.

When the Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed

Check the tire pressure periodically (at
least monthly) using an accurate tire
gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this
chapter.

If one of the road wheels and tire needs to
be replaced with the temporary spare
wheel and tire, the system will continue to
identify a defect. This is to remind you that
the damaged road wheel and tire must be
repaired and refitted to your vehicle.

Understanding the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System

To restore the correct operation of the
system, you must have the repaired road
wheel and tire assembly refitted to your
vehicle. For additional information, see
Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System in this section.

The system measures the pressure in the
four road tires and sends the tire pressure
readings to your vehicle. The low tire
pressure warning light will illuminate if any
of the tire pressures are significantly low.
If the warning light is illuminated, one or
more of the tires are under-inflated and
need to be inflated to the correct pressure.

When You Believe the System is Not
Operating Correctly
The main function of the system is to warn
you when the tire pressures are low. It can
also warn you in the event the system is
no longer capable of operating correctly.
See the following chart for information
concerning the system:

Low tire pressure
warning light

Possible cause

Action required

Solid warning light Tire(s) under-inflated

1. Make sure tires are at the correct pressure. See Inflating the tires in this
chapter.
2. After inflating the tires to the correct
pressure See Maintenance (page 200).
or the tire inflation pressure label
(located on the edge of driver door or the
B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven for
at least two minutes at over 20 mph (32
km/h) before the light will turn off.

Spare tire in use

Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and refit it to your vehicle to
restore correct system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When the temporary spare tire is
installed in this section.

253

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
Low tire pressure
warning light

Possible cause

Action required

Tire rotation without
sensor training

On vehicles with different front and rear
tire pressures, you must retrain the
system following every tire rotation. See
Tire Care (page 234).

Spare tire in use

Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are correctly inflated and the
system malfunction
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
decrease up to 3 psi (0.2 bar) for a drop of
30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value will be detected by
the system as being significantly lower
than the correct inflation pressure and the
warning light will illuminate.

When Inflating the Tires
When inflating the tires (for example; at a
gas station), the system may not respond
immediately to the air added to the tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.

If the warning light is on:
• Check each tire to verify that none are
flat.
• If one or more tires are flat, repair as
necessary.
• Check the tire pressures and Inflate all
the tires to the correct pressure.

How Temperature Affects the Tire
Pressures
While driving in a normal manner, tire
pressures may increase up to 4 psi (0.3
bar) from a cold start situation. If the
vehicle is stationary overnight and the
temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, tire pressures may

Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Reset Procedure
Note: The system reset procedure needs
to be carried out after each tire replacement.

254

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
Overview

Carrying Out the System Reset
Procedure

WARNING

Read the entire procedure before carrying
out a system reset.

To determine the required
pressure(s) for your vehicle, see the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver seating position), or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door.

Drive your vehicle above 20 mph (32
km/h) for at least two minutes and
then park in a safe location where you
can easily get to all four tires and have
access to a tire inflation pump.
2. Switch the ignition off.
3. Switch the ignition on with the engine
off.
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off
three times, this must be completed
within 10 seconds. If the reset mode
has been entered successfully, the horn
will chirp once and the system indicator
will flash. If this does not occur, repeat
the procedure from step 2. If after
repeated attempts to enter the reset
mode, the horn does not chirp and the
system indicator does not flash, have
your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
5. Train the system sensors in the tires
using the following reset sequence
starting with the left front tire and
following a clockwise order: Left front,
right front, right rear, left rear.
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left front tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn chirps.
Note: The single horn chirp confirms that
the sensor identification code has been
learned by your vehicle for this position. If a
double horn chirp is heard, the reset
procedure was unsuccessful and must be
repeated.

To maintain your vehicle’s load carrying
capability, this vehicle requires different
tire pressures in the front tires compared
to the rear tires. The system on your vehicle
is designed to illuminate the warning light
at different pressures for the front and rear
tires.
The tires need to be periodically rotated
to provide consistent performance and
maximum tire life, the system needs to
know when the tires have been rotated to
determine which set of tires are on the
front and rear axles. With this information,
the system can detect and correctly warn
of low tire pressures.
System Reset Tips:
• To reduce the chance of interference
from another vehicle, the system reset
procedure should be carried out at
least three feet (one meter) away from
another Ford vehicle undergoing the
system reset procedure.
• Do not wait more than two minutes
between resetting each tire sensor or
the system will time-out and the entire
procedure will have to be repeated on
all four wheels. A double horn chirp
indicates the need to repeat the
procedure.

Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right front tire. Decrease
the air pressure until the horn chirps.
8. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right rear tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn chirps.

255

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.

9. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left rear tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn chirps.
Training is complete when the horn
chirps after the last system sensor (left
rear) has been trained and the system
indicator stops flashing.
10. Switch the ignition off. If two short
horn chirps are heard, the reset
procedure was unsuccessful and
must be repeated.
Note: If after repeating the procedure two
short horn chirps are heard again, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
11.

Have a flat serviced by an authorized
dealer in order to prevent damage to the
system sensors See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 251). Replace
the spare tire with a road tire as soon as
possible. During repairing or replacing of
the flat tire, have the authorized dealer
inspect the system sensor for damage.

Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information

Set all four tires to the correct
pressure See Maintenance (page
200). or the tire inflation pressure label
(located on the edge of driver door or
the B-Pillar).

WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines
could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, injury or death.

CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL

If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that were originally provided
by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.

WARNINGS
The use of tire sealant may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system
and should only be used in roadside
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the
Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be
used. The tire pressure monitoring system
sensor and valve stem on the wheel must
be replaced by an authorized dealer after
use of the sealant.

A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:

If the tire pressure monitor sensor
becomes damaged, it will no longer
function. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 251).

1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire
begins with the letter T for tire size and
may have Temporary Use Only molded in
the sidewall.

Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on this vehicle.

2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label
on wheel: This spare tire has a label on
the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND
TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE
ONLY
256

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
When driving with one of the dissimilar
spare tires listed above, do not:
•
•

•
•
•
•
•

The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability

Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
Tow a trailer.
Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
Use commercial car washing
equipment.
Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.

When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.

Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires
listed above at any one wheel location can
lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability

Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.

Locking Lug Nuts
You can obtain replacement locking lug
nuts or a locking lug nut key using the
reference number certificate.

3. Full-size dissimilar spare without
label on wheel

Vehicles With a Spare Wheel

When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use commercial car washing
equipment.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.

Van, Bus or Wagon
The spare wheel is under the rear of your
vehicle.
If the spare wheel is the same type and
size as your vehicle road wheel, you can fit
the spare wheel and continue to drive in
the normal manner.
If the spare wheel is not the same type and
size as your vehicle road wheel, it has a
label showing the maximum driving speed
limit.

257

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
Note: If your vehicle is fitted with a tire
pressure monitoring system, the warning
indicator will flash if you fit the spare wheel
to your vehicle. To restore the correct
operation of the tire pressure monitoring
system, you must have the repaired road
wheel and tire assembly refitted to your
vehicle. See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 251). To prevent damage
occurring to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensors, make sure you have a
damage tire repaired or replaced by a tire
professional.

E146811

2. Raise the cable end cover.

E145138

Open the rear doors. Remove the
grommet and insert the flat end of the
lug wrench into the socket. Turn
counterclockwise until the spare wheel
rests on the ground and the cable is
loose.

E146812

3. Rotate the cable through 90 degrees.
Slide the cable through the slot to
release the spare wheel bracket from
the winch.

258

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires

E184880

1.
E146813

4. Remove the retaining nut to release
the spare wheel bracket.

Insert the flat end of the lug wrench
into the socket. Turn counterclockwise
until the spare wheel rests on the
ground and the cable is loose.

Vehicles With a Spare Wheel
Chassis Cab and Cutaway
The spare wheel is under the rear of your
vehicle.
If the spare wheel is the same type and
size as your vehicle road wheel, you can fit
the spare wheel and continue to drive in
the normal manner.
If the spare wheel is not the same type and
size as your vehicle road wheel, it has a
label showing the maximum driving speed
limit.
Note: If your vehicle is fitted with a tire
pressure monitoring system, the warning
indicator will flash if you fit the spare wheel
to your vehicle. To restore the correct
operation of the tire pressure monitoring
system, you must have the repaired road
wheel and tire assembly refitted to your
vehicle. See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 251). To prevent damage
occurring to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensors, make sure you have a
damage tire repaired or replaced by a tire
professional.

E146811

2. Raise the cable end cover.

259

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
Vehicle Jack

WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is off
the ground, the transmission alone
will not prevent the vehicle from
moving or slipping off the jack.

To help prevent the vehicle from
moving when you change a tire, be
sure to place the transmission in park
(P), set the parking brake and block (in
both directions) the wheel that is
diagonally opposite (other side and end of
the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
Never get underneath a vehicle that
is supported only by a jack. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you or
someone else could be seriously injured.

E146812

3. Rotate the cable through 90 degrees.
Slide the cable through the slot to
release the spare wheel bracket from
the winch.

Do not attempt to change a tire on
the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your vehicle.
If using a jack other than the one
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including
any vehicle cargo or modifications.
Disable the power running boards
before jacking, lifting, or placing any
object under the vehicle. Never place
your hand between the power running
board and the vehicle as extended power
running boards will retract when the doors
are closed. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.

E146813

4. Remove the retaining nut to release
the spare wheel bracket.

Note: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Note: Vehicles with a Temporary Mobility
Kit do not have a vehicle jack or a lug
wrench.

260

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
Vehicle Jack Storage
The vehicle jack is under the passenger
seat. The jack handle and lug wrench are
located in a storage compartment in the
front right-hand side stepwell.
Note: The vehicle jack is in the load space
area on vehicles with rear climate control.

E171405

Position the head of the vehicle jack under
the protrusions at the rear of front
sub-frame.

E70959

1. Assemble the jack handle.
2. Insert the jack handle onto the release
valve and rotate clockwise until you
feel a strong resistance.
3. Insert the jack handle into the pump
and use a pumping action to raise your
vehicle.
4. Insert the jack handle into the release
valve and rotate counterclockwise to
lower your vehicle.

Rear Jacking Points
WARNING
You must use the specified jacking
points.

Front Jacking Points
WARNING
You must use the specified jacking
points.
Note: If your vehicle has rear air
conditioning make sure the vehicle jack does
not come in contact with the air conditioning
lines.

261

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
Chock the diagonally opposite wheel
to the punctured tire with an
appropriate block or wheel chock. A
wheel chock may be located in the B-pillar
or in a storage compartment in the front
right-hand side stepwell.
Make sure that the arrows on
directional tires point in the direction
of rotation when your vehicle is
moving forward. If you have to fit a spare
tire with the arrows pointing in the opposite
direction have the tire refitted as soon as
possible.
1.

Insert the flat end of the lug wrench
between the wheel rim and the wheel
trim and carefully remove the wheel
trim.
2. Use the locking lug nut key to loosen
the locking lug nut.
3. Loosen the remaining lug nuts, but do
not remove them.
4. Raise your vehicle until the tire is clear
of the ground.
5. Remove the lug nuts and the road
wheel.
Note: Do not lay alloy road wheels face
down on the ground.

E171406

Position the head of the vehicle jack under
the rear axle.

Removing a Road Wheel
WARNINGS
Park your vehicle so that you do not
obstruct the flow of traffic or place
yourself in any danger and set up a
warning triangle.
Switch the ignition off and apply the
parking brake.

Installing a Road Wheel
WARNINGS
Use only approved wheel and tire
sizes. Using other wheel and tire sizes
could damage your vehicle and will
make the National Type Approval invalid.

If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, shift into first or reverse
gear. If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, shift into park (P).
Make sure all passengers are out of
your vehicle.

Make sure there is no lubrication
(grease or oil) on the threads or the
surface between the wheel lugs and
nuts. This can cause the lug nuts to loosen
while driving.

Make sure that your vehicle is on firm
and level ground with the front
wheels pointing straight ahead.

262

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Wheels and Tires
3. Lower your vehicle and remove the
vehicle jack.
4. Fully tighten all of the lug nuts in the
sequence shown.
5. Install the wheel trim.
Note: Make sure that the cones on the lug
nuts are against the wheel.

WARNINGS
Make sure the wheel and hub
contact surfaces are free from
foreign material.
Never use wheels or lug nuts
different than the original equipment
as this could damage the wheel or
mounting system. This damage could
allow the wheels to come off when your
vehicle is moving.
1.

Note: Alloy wheel lug nuts are suitable for
use on a steel spare wheel.
Note: If the spare wheel is not the same
type and size as your vehicle road wheel
replace it as soon as possible.

Install the wheel.

Note: Check the lug nuts for correct
tightness and check the tire pressure as
soon as possible.

Stowing the Wheel and Vehicle
Jack
Note: Do not raise the spare wheel bracket
without a wheel attached. Damage can
occur to the winch mechanism if the spare
wheel bracket is lowered without a wheel
attached.

3.
4.

E70961

2. Install all of the lug nuts and partially
tighten them in the sequence shown.

263

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Attach the spare wheel bracket to the
wheel using the retaining nut.
Slide the cable through the slot and
attach the spare wheel bracket to the
winch.
Rotate the cable through 90 degrees
and lower the cable end cover.
Insert the flat end of the lug wrench
into the socket. Turn it clockwise until
you feel a strong resistance. Make sure
the wheel is secure.
Stow the vehicle jack, jack handle and
lug wrench in their correct locations
and secure them with the straps.

Wheels and Tires
LUG NUTS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials
present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting
surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off
while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.
Bolt size

Ib-ft (Nm)

M14 x 1.5

148 lb.ft (200 Nm)

Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any
wheel disturbance, for example tire rotation, changing a flat tire or wheel removal.

E145950

Wheel pilot bore

Inspect the wheel pilot bore and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.

264

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L
Engine

3.5L V6 Ecoboost

Cubic inches

214

Required fuel

Minimum 87 octane

Firing order

1-4-2-5-3-6

Ignition system

Coil on plug

Spark plug gap

.030-.033 in. (.75-.85 mm)

Compression ratio

10.0:1

Drivebelt Routing
3.5L V6 Ecoboost Engines with A/C

E167467

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.7L
Engine

3.7 V6

Cubic inches

226

Required fuel

Minimum 87 octane or E85

Firing order

1-4-2-5-3-6

Ignition system

Coil on plug

Spark plug gap

.049-.053 in. (1.25-1.35 mm)

Compression ratio

10.5:1

265

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing
3.7L V6 Engines with A/C

E167464

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.2L POWER STROKE DIESEL
Engine

3.2L Power Stroke Diesel

Cubic inches

195

Required fuel

No. 2 Diesel

Firing order

1-2-4-5-3

Compression ratio

15.4:1

Drivebelt Routing
3.2L Power Stroke Diesel Engines with
A/C

E175582

266

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L
3.5L V6 Ecoboost
Component

Part number

Air filter element

FA-1916

Automatic transmission fluid filter

Service required

Battery

BXT-48H6-610

Oil filter

FL-500S

Spark plugs

SP534

Windshield wiper blades - vehicles with low
roof
Windshield wiper blades - vehicles with
medium or high roof

WW-2955 - driver side
WW-2112 - passenger side
WW-2901 - driver side
WW-2049 - passenger side

We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Normal Scheduled Maintenance (page 443).

267

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.7L
3.7L Duratec
Component

Part number

Air filter element

FA-1916

Automatic transmission fluid filter

Service required

Battery

BXT-48H6-610

Oil filter

FL-500S

Spark plugs

SP520

Windshield wiper blades - vehicles with low
roof
Windshield wiper blades - vehicles with
medium or high roof

WW-2955 - driver side
WW-2112 - passenger side
WW-2901 - driver side
WW-2049 - passenger side

268

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.2L POWER STROKE DIESEL
3.2L Power Stroke Diesel
Component

Part number

Pre air filter

FA-1921

Air filter element

FA-1916

Automatic transmission fluid filter

Service required

Battery

BAGM-48H6-760 - dual batteries

Oil filter

FL-500S

Fuel filter

FD-46-21

Windshield wiper blades - vehicles with low
roof
Windshield wiper blades - vehicles with
medium or high roof

WW-2955 - driver side
WW-2112 - passenger side
WW-2901 - driver side
WW-2049 - passenger side

Note: Motorcraft replacement parts are recommended for scheduled maintenance and
are available at an authorized dealer or at fordparts.com. These parts meet or exceed Ford
Motor Company’s specifications, and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your vehicle Warranty may be void
for any damage related to use of other parts.
Note: Should a Motorcraft oil filter not be available, use an oil filter that meets industry
performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.

269

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.

Make, vehicle line, series, body
type

Engine type

Check digit

Model year

Assembly plant

Production sequence number

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL

E142476

Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E167469

The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.

E142477

World manufacturer identifier

Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations

270

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Capacities and Specifications
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.

TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION

Code

Description

Six-speed automatic transmission 6R80

CAPACITIES AND
SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant
system contains refrigerant R-134a
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system can
cause personal injury.

E142806

Capacities
Item

Capacity

Engine lubrication system - including the oil filter

5.9 qt (5.6 L)

Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter

5.4 qt (5.1 L)

Engine oil top-up - raise the level on the dipstick
from minimum to maximum

1 qt (0.9 L)

Engine cooling system, vehicles with an auxiliary

16.4 qt (15.5 L)

heater

Engine cooling system, vehicles without an auxiliary

14.9 qt (14.1 L)

heater

Automatic transmission

13.1 qt (12.4 L)

Fuel tank

25.1 gal (95 L)

Windshield and rear window washer system including headlamp washer

4.8 qt (4.5 L)

2, 3

271

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Capacities and Specifications

Item

Capacity

A/C Refrigerant, vehicles with rear heating, ventilation and air conditioning

2.43 lb (1.1 kg)

A/C Refrigerant, vehicles without rear heating,
ventilation and air conditioning

1.76 lb (0.8 kg)

A/C Refrigerant oil, vehicles with rear heating, ventilation and air conditioning

9.5 fl oz (280 ml)

A/C Refrigerant oil, vehicles without rear heating,
ventilation and air conditioning

5.4 fl oz (160 ml)

Add the coolant type originally used in your vehicle.

Automatic transmissions that require Motorcraft MERCON LV transmission fluid should
only use Motorcraft MERCON LV transmission fluid. Use of any fluid other than the
recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
3

Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter at the correct service interval. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 443).

Specifications
Materials
Name

Specification

Motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QSP

WSS-M2C946-A

Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12

WSS-M2C946-A

Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20

WSS-M6C65-A2

272

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
XT-10-QLVC

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

Automatic transmission fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
CXT-10-LV12

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

Power steering fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
XT-10-QLVC

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

Power steering fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
CXT-10-LV12

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
WSS-M14P19-A
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)

WSS-M14P19-A

A/C refrigerant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D

WSH-M1C231-B

Grease:
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1

ESA-M1C75-B

273

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications. Motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines are
also acceptable. Do not use oil labeled
with API SN service category unless the
label also displays the API certification
mark.

Use only Motorcraft DOT 4 LV High
Performance Brake Fluid, or equivalent,
meeting WSS-M6C65-A2 or ISO 4925
Class 6. Use of any fluid other than the
recommended fluid may cause brake
system damage.
Use multi-purpose grease for door latches,
hood latch, auxiliary hood latch, trunk latch
and seat tracks.
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grades this may lead to:
• Component damage which may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.

E142732

An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricant Standardization
and Approval Committee (ILSAC).

CAPACITIES AND
SPECIFICATIONS - 3.7L
WARNING

Note: Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives. They are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that is not covered
by Ford’s warranty.

The air conditioning refrigerant
system contains refrigerant R-134a
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
the air conditioning refrigerant system can
cause personal injury.

Capacities
Item

Capacity

Engine lubrication system – including the oil filter

6 qt (5.7 L)

Engine lubrication system – excluding the oil filter

5.5 qt (5.2 L)

Engine oil top-up – raise the level on the dipstick
from minimum to maximum

1 qt (0.9 L)

274

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Item

Capacity

Engine cooling system, vehicles with an auxiliary

16.4 qt (15.5 L)

heater

Engine cooling system, vehicles without an auxiliary

14.9 qt (14.1 L)

heater

Automatic transmission

13.1 qt (12.4 L)

Fuel tank

25.1 gal (95 L)

Windshield and rear window washer system –
including headlamp washer

4.8 qt (4.5 L)

A/C Refrigerant, vehicles with rear heating, ventilation and air conditioning

2.43 lb (1.1 kg)

A/C Refrigerant, vehicles without rear heating,
ventilation and air conditioning

1.76 lb (0.8 kg)

2, 3

A/C Refrigerant oil, vehicles with rear heating, ventilation and air conditioning

9.5 fl oz (280 ml)

A/C Refrigerant oil, vehicles without rear heating,
ventilation and air conditioning

5.4 fl oz (160 ml)

Add the coolant type originally used in your vehicle.

Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter at the correct service interval. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 443).

275

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
Name

Specification

Motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP

WSS-M2C945-A

Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12

WSS-M2C945-A

Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20

WSS-M6C65-A2

Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
XT-10-QLVC

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

Automatic transmission fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
CXT-10-LV12

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

Power steering fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
XT-10-QLVC

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

Power steering fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
CXT-10-LV12

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
WSS-M14P19-A
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant

276

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

ZC-32-B2
Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)

WSS-M14P19-A

A/C refrigerant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D

WSH-M1C231-B

Grease:
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1

ESA-M1C75-B

Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications. Motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines are
also acceptable. Do not use oil labeled
with API SN service category unless the
label also displays the API certification
mark.
E142732

An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricant Standardization
and Approval Committee (ILSAC).
Note: Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives. They are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that is not covered
by your Ford warranty.

277

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Use only Motorcraft DOT 4 LV High
Performance Brake Fluid, or equivalent,
meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid
other than the recommended fluid may
cause brake system damage.

•
•

Reduced fuel economy.
Degraded brake performance.

CAPACITIES AND
SPECIFICATIONS - 3.2L
POWER STROKE DIESEL

Use multi-purpose grease for door latches,
hood latch, auxiliary hood latch, trunk latch
and seat tracks.

WARNING

If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grades this may lead to:
• Component damage which may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.

Capacities
Item

Capacity

Engine lubrication system — including the oil filter

12.0 qt (11.4 L)

Engine lubrication system — excluding the oil filter

11.6 qt (11 L)

Engine oil top-up — raise the level on the dipstick
from minimum to maximum

2.6 qt (2.5 L)

Engine cooling system, vehicles with an auxiliary

15.3 qt (14.5 L)

heater

Engine cooling system, vehicles without an auxiliary

13.9 qt (13.2 L)

heater

Automatic transmission fluid

13.1 qt (12.4 L)

2, 3

Fuel tank

25.1 gal (95 L)

Diesel exhaust fluid

5.5 gal (21 L)

Windshield and rear window washer system —
including headlamp washer

4.8 qt (4.5 L)

A/C Refrigerant, vehicles with rear heating, ventilation and air conditioning

2.43 lb (1.1 kg)

278

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Item

Capacity

A/C Refrigerant, vehicles without rear heating,
ventilation and air conditioning

1.76 lb (0.8 kg)

A/C Refrigerant oil, vehicles with rear heating, ventilation and air conditioning

9.5 fl oz (280 ml)

A/C Refrigerant oil, vehicles without rear heating,
ventilation and air conditioning

5.4 fl oz (160 ml)

Add the coolant type originally used in your vehicle.

Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter at the correct service interval. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 443).

Specifications
Materials
Name

Specification

Motor oil:
Motorcraft SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Diesel Motor
Oil
XO-5W40-5QSD

WSS-M2C171-E

Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20

WSS-M6C65-A2

Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
XT-10-QLVC

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

Automatic transmission fluid (Canada):

WSS-M2C938-A

279

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
CXT-10-LV12

MERCON LV

Power steering fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
XT-10-QLVC

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

Power steering fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
CXT-10-LV12

WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON LV

WSS-M14P19-A

A/C refrigerant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D

WSH-M1C231-B

Grease:
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1

ESA-M1C75-B

Note: The American Petroleum Institute
(API) service symbol is used to identify the
correct engine oil for your vehicle's engine.
The API service symbol is on the oil
container.

280

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Capacities and Specifications
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grades this may lead to:
• Component damage which may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.

E179966

Note: The use of correct oil viscosities is
important for satisfactory operation.
Determine which oil viscosity best suits the
temperature range you expect to encounter
for the next service interval from the SAE
viscosity grade chart.

E176394

Note: For the use of biodiesel fuel (B6 –
B20), use SAE 5W-40 API CJ-4.
Use only Motorcraft DOT 4 LV High
Performance Brake Fluid, or equivalent,
meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid
other than the recommended fluid may
cause brake system damage.
Use multi-purpose grease for door latches,
hood latch, auxiliary hood latch, trunk latch
and seat tracks.

281

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Audio System
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz

GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors

Radio Reception Factors

Distance and strength

The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.

Terrain

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.

Station overload

When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods.

CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact
discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable
compact discs may not function correctly
when used in Ford CD players.

MP3 Track and Folder Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 individual tracks and folder
structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
disc playback: MP3 track mode
(system default) and MP3 folder
mode.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder
structure on the MP3 disc. The player
numbers each MP3 track on the disc
(noted by the .mp3 file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3
files may be less depending on the
structure of the CD and exact model
of radio present.

Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact an authorized dealer for further
information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the
disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a
circular motion.
282

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Audio System
•

•

MP3 folder mode represents a folder
structure consisting of one level of
folders. The CD player numbers all MP3
tracks on the disc (noted by the .mp3
file extension) and all folders
containing MP3 files, from F001
(folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through
the disc files.

In track mode, the system displays and
plays the structure as if it were only one
level deep (all .mp3 files play, regardless
of being in a specific folder). In folder
mode, the system only plays the .mp3 files
in the current folder.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM

If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is
important to understand how the system
reads the structures you create. While
various files may be present, (files with
extensions other than mp3), only files with
the .mp3 extension are played; other files
are ignored by the system. This enables
you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety
of tasks on your work computer, home
computer and your in-vehicle system.

WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

283

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Audio System

K
C

I
H
G

E175058

Display: Shows the status of the current mode selected.

Clock: Press the button to select clock setup.

Seek up: Press the button to go to the next station up the radio frequency band.
Seek down: Press the button to go to the next station down the radio frequency
band.

Numeric keypad: Press the button to recall a previously stored station. To
store a favorite station press and hold until the sound returns.

On, Off and VOL: Press the button to switch the audio system on or off. Turn
the dial to adjust the volume.

MENU: Press the button to access different audio system features.

Sound: Press the button to adjust the sound settings for bass, treble, balance
or fade.

AUX: Press the button to access the AUX features, it will also cancel the menu
or list browsing.

284

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Audio System
I

Radio: Press the button to select different radio frequency bands. Press to
cancel the menu or list browsing.

Cursor up or down: Press the cursor up or down arrow buttons to adjust the
settings within the menus or to move to the next radio station while listening
to the radio on the FM or AM frequency band.

Mute: Press the button to mute the sound.

Clock Button
This allows you to adjust the clock settings.
Press the Clock button until the following message is displayed.
Message

Set Hour

Action and Description

Use the cursor up or down arrow buttons to set the correct
hour.

Press the Clock button again until the following message is displayed.
Set Minutes

Use the cursor up or down arrow buttons to set the correct
minutes.

Setting 24 Hour or 12 Hour Display
Press the Menu button until the following message is displayed.
Message

24 Hour

Action and Description

Use the cursor up or down arrow buttons to select one of the
following:
12 Hour
24 Hour

Note: The default setting is 24 hour.
Manual Tuning

Station Tuning Buttons

Use the cursor up or down arrow buttons
to tune up or down the frequency band in
small increments. To increment quickly,
press and hold until you find a station you
want to listen to.

Seek Tuning
Select a frequency band and briefly press
one of the seek buttons. The unit will stop
at the first station it finds in the direction
you have chosen.

285

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Audio System
Station Preset Buttons

2. Use the cursor up or down arrow
buttons to select the required level.
Note: Fade settings are only adjustable if
there are speakers in the rear of your vehicle.

This feature allows you to store your
favorite stations. They can be recalled by
selecting the appropriate frequency band
and pressing one of the preset buttons.

AUX Button

1. Select a frequency band.
2. Tune to the station required.
3. Press and hold one of the preset
buttons. The audio unit will also mute
momentarily as confirmation.

Connect your media device to the audio
unit. See USB Port (page 297).
Select your media device as the audio
source by pressing the AUX button. After
connecting your media device, the first
track will start to play automatically.

You can repeat this on each frequency
band and for each preset button.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
PREMIUM AM/FM/CD

Menu Button
This allows you to adjust all of the audio
system settings. Press the button
repeatedly until the required setting is
displayed. Use the cursor up or down arrow
buttons to adjust the following settings:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

Clock hour.
Clock minutes.
24 hour, 12 hour.
Bass.
Treble.
Balance.
Fade.
RDS.

Sound Button

Note: The MyFord Touch system controls
most of the audio features. See MyFord
Touch™ (page 348).

This allows you to adjust the sound
settings for bass, treble, balance or fade.
1.

Press the sound button until the
required setting is displayed.

286

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Audio System
A

E177140

- TUNE +: Press this button to manually search through the radio frequency
band.

Mute: Press the button to mute the sound.

DISP: Press this button to switch the display screen off.

SEEK: Press this button to go to the next station up or down the radio frequency
band or the next or previous track on a CD.

SOUND: Press this button to adjust the sound settings for Bass, Treble, Balance,
Fade and Occupancy.

ON/OFF and VOL: Press this button to switch the audio system off and on.
Turn to adjust the volume.

SOURCE: Press this button to access different audio modes, such as AM, FM
and A/V input.

287

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Audio System
Note: You can operate your audio system
for up to one hour after you switch the
ignition off. Press the on and off control to
operate the system with the ignition turned
off. The system automatically turns off after
one hour.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/SYNC
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

M
F
L
K

E166684

288

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Audio System
A

Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.

Cursor arrows: Press these buttons to scroll through on screen audio system
choices.

OK: Press this button to confirm menu selections.

Information: Press this button to access any available radio or CD information.

TUNE - and TUNE +: Press these buttons to manually search the frequency
band.

Numeric keypad: In radio mode, store your favorite radio stations. To store a
radio station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound
returns. In CD mode, select a track. In phone mode, enter a phone number.

Clock: Push to access clock settings. You can also set the clock by pressing
the MENU button and scrolling to Clock Settings.

Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending
on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).

Seek: Press and release these buttons to go to the previous or next preset radio
station or disc track. Press and hold these buttons to fast forward to the previous
or next strong radio station, memory preset or through the current disc track.

On, off and volume: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn
to adjust the volume.

MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features. See Menu
Structure later in this section.

SOUND: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Middle, Bass, Fade,
Balance and Occupancy. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the
various settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow
buttons to change the settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit.

PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC system.
See SYNC™ (page 300).

MEDIA: Press this button to switch between listening to a CD and the
SYNC-Media menu. To change the SYNC-Media device (such as switching from
a device plugged into the USB port to a Bluetooth audio device), press MENU
and scroll to Select Source.

RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequencies.
Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radio
functions.

289

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/SYNC/SATELLITE
RADIO
WARNING

Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS
satellite radio, may not be available in your
location. Check with an authorized dealer.

Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

N
F
M
L

E166685

290

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Audio System
A

Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.

Cursor arrows: Press these buttons to scroll through on screen audio system
choices.

OK: Press this button to confirm menu selections.

Information: Press this button to access any available radio or CD information.

TUNE - and TUNE +: Press these buttons to manually search the frequency
band.

Clock: Push to access clock settings. You can also set the clock by pressing
the MENU button and scrolling to Clock Settings.

Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending
on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).

Sound: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Middle, Bass, Fade,
Balance and Occupancy. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the
various settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow
buttons to change the settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit.

On, off and volume: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn
to adjust the volume.

MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features. See Menu
Structure later in this section.

PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC system.
See SYNC™ (page 300).

SIRIUS: Press this button to listen to SIRIUS satellite radio.

RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequencies.
Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radio
functions.

291

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Audio System
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.

DIGITAL RADIO
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.

When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
• Scan allows you to hear a brief
sampling of all available stations. This
feature still works when HD Radio
reception is on, although it does not
scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may
see the HD logo appear if the station
has a digital broadcast.
• Memory presets allow you to save an
active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.

When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your
screen. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.

Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.

292

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Audio System
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues

Reception area

If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.

Station blending

When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.

In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.

293

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Audio System

Potential station issues
Issues

Echo, stutter, skip or repeat
in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.

Cause

Action

This is poor time alignment No action required. This is a
by the radio broadcaster.
broadcast issue.

Sound fading or blending in The radio is shifting between No action required. The
and out.
analog and digital audio.
reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.

There is an audio mute
delay when selecting HD2 or
HD3, multicast preset or
Direct Tune.

The digital multicast is not No action required. This is
available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until
broadcast is decoded. Once the audio is available.
decoded, the audio is available.

Cannot access HD2 or HD3
multicast channel when
recalling a preset or from a
direct tune.

The previously stored
No action required. The
multicast preset or direct
station is not available in
tune is not available in your your current location.
current reception area.

Text information does not
match currently playing
audio.

Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.

Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.

There is no text information Data service issue by the
shown for currently selected radio broadcaster.
frequency.

Fill out the station issue
form at website listed

HD2-HD7 stations not found Pressing Scan disables
when Scan is pressed.
HD2-HD7 channel search.

No action required. This is
normal behavior.

below.

http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences

HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not
responsible for the content sent using HD
Radio technology. Content may be
changed, added or deleted at any time at
the station owner's discretion.

SATELLITE RADIO
SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music,
news, sports, weather, traffic and
entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of
SIRIUS satellite radio channels, visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at
1-888-539-7474.

294

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Audio System
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.

Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues

Antenna obstructions

For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna
clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.

Terrain

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

Station overload

When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.

Satellite radio signal interfer- Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
ence
interference and the audio system may mute.
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SIRIUS satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term,
which begins on the date of sale or lease
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
for availability.

SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.

For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at
1-888-539-7474.

E142593

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. When in
satellite radio mode, press Options.

295

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Audio System
Troubleshooting
Message

Condition

Action

Acquiring…

Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.

Satellite antenna fault

There is an internal module If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an ignior system failure present.
tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.

SIRIUS system failure

No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.

Invalid Channel

The channel is no longer
available.

Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.

Unsubscribed Channel

Your subscription does not
include this channel.

Contact SIRIUS at 1-888539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.

No Signal

The signal is lost from the
SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS
tower to your vehicle
antenna.

The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.

Updating…

Update of channel
programming in progress.

No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.

Questions? Call

Your satellite service is no
longer available.

Contact SIRIUS at 1-888539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.

1-888-539-7474
None found
Check Channel Guide
Subscription Updated

All the channels in the
Use the channel guide to
selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip
skipped or locked.
function on that station.
SIRIUS has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.

296

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

No action required.

Audio System
The audio input jack allows you to connect
and play music from a portable music
player through your vehicle speakers. You
can use any portable music player
designed for use with headphones. The
audio extension cable must have a 0.14 in
(3.5 mm) male connector at each end. The
audio extension cable must be long
enough to allow the portable music player
to be safely stored while your vehicle is
moving.

AUDIO INPUT JACK
WARNINGS
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

For safety reasons, do not connect
or adjust the settings on your
portable music player while your
vehicle is moving.

3.
4.
5.

Store the portable music player in a
secure location when your vehicle is
moving, for example the glove
compartment. Hard objects may become
projectiles in a crash or sudden stop, which
may increase the risk of serious injury.

Make sure your vehicle is stationary
with the audio unit and the portable
music player switched off.
Plug the extension cable from the
portable music player into the audio
input jack.
Switch the audio unit on. Select either
a tuned FM station or a CD.
Adjust the volume as desired.
Switch the portable music player on
and adjust the volume to half its
maximum level.
Press the AUX button on the audio
unit. You should hear music from the
portable music player even if it is low.
Adjust the volume on the portable
music player as desired. Do this by
switching back and forth between the
AUX and FM or CD controls.

USB PORT
WARNINGS
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend

E185568

297

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Audio System
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See (page 300).
The extension cable must be long enough
to allow the device to be safely stored
while your vehicle is moving.

WARNINGS
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

MEDIA HUB (If Equipped)

For safety reasons, do not connect
or adjust the settings on your device
while your vehicle is moving.

The media hub is located in the center
console and has the following features:

Store all devices in a secure location
when your vehicle is moving, for
example the glove compartment.
Hard objects may become projectiles in a
crash or sudden stop, which may increase
the risk of serious injury.

E185339

E185567

A/V inputs

SD card slot

USB ports

See MyFord Touch™ (page 348).

298

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Audio System
AUDIO TROUBLESHOOTING
Message

Description and Action

Please check CD

General error message for CD fault conditions. For
example cannot read the CD, data-CD inserted, etc.
Make sure the disc is loaded correctly. Clean and re-try,
or replace disc with known music disc. If the error
persists contact an authorized dealer.

CD drive malfunction

General error message for a mechanism fault. The
system has detected a fault that requires service.

CD drive high temp.

General error message for the mechanism being too
hot. The unit will not work until it has cooled down. If
the error persists contact an authorized dealer.

299

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
GENERAL INFORMATION

E142598

•

SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and
portable media player. This allows you to:
• Make and receive calls.
• Access and play music from your
portable music player.
• Use 911 Assist, Vehicle Health Report
and SYNC Services (Traffic, Directions
*
& Information).
•
•
•
•

•

Use the advanced voice recognition
system
Charge your USB device (if your device
supports this).

These features require activation.

Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.

Support
The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you cannot
answer on your own.

Use applications, such as Pandora and
Stitcher, via SYNC AppLink.
Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands.
Stream music from your connected
phone.
Text message.

Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.
In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673.
In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673.

300

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.

When using SYNC:
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's manual for further information.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.

SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Required to activate Vehicle Health
Report and to view the reports online.
• Required to activate the
subscription-based SYNC Services and
to personalize your Saved Points and
Favorites.
• Essential for keeping up with the latest
software downloads available for
SYNC.
• Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.

Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
phone. This profile is created in order to
offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
(read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cellular
phone was not connected to the system.
In addition, if you connect a media device,
the system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.

Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are
speed-dependent and restricted when your
vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).

Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when the cellular phone or media player
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.

301

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada will not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the sections on 911 Assist,
Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic,
Directions and Information.

Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
• After pressing the voice button, wait
until after the tone sounds and
Listening appears before saying a
command. Any command spoken
before this does not register with the
system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
• At any time, you can interrupt the
system while it is speaking by pressing
the voice button.

USING VOICE RECOGNITION

Initiating a Voice Session

This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is in front of you.

Initiate a voice session by
pressing the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. See
Voice Control (page 61).
E142599

You can say any of the following:
Voice command

If you want the system to carry out the following

Bluetooth audio

Stream audio from your phone.

(cancel | stop | exit)

Cancel the requested action.

((line | AV | audio video)
in | AUX | audio video)

Access the device connected to the auxiliary input jack.

mobile (apps | applications)

Access mobile applications.

(phone | Blackberry |
iPhone | Mobile)

Make calls.

(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 Access the device connected to your USB port.
[player])
vehicle [health] report

Run a vehicle health report.

302

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Voice command

If you want the system to carry out the following

voice settings

Adjust the level of voice interaction and feedback.

[main menu] help

Hear a list of voice commands available in the current mode.

You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where (cancel | stop | exit) appears you say; cancel or
stop or exit.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where mobile (apps | applications) appears, you must say mobile followed
by either apps or applications.
You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where
(USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3 [player]) appears, you can say USB or USB stick.
Note: Mobile Applications, Services and Vehicle health report, is only available in the United
States of America.
Adjusting the Interaction Level

System Interaction and Feedback

Initiate a voice session by
pressing the voice button on the
E142599
steering wheel controls. See
Voice Control (page 61).

The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction (voice settings). You can
customize the voice recognition system to
provide more or less instruction and
feedback.

A tone sounds and the following
message appears in the information
display.

The default setting is to a higher level of
interaction in order to help you learn to use
the system. You can change these settings
at any time.

Message

Listen

When prompted say the following:
Voice command

If you want the system to carry out the following

voice settings
Followed by either of the following:
interaction mode novice

Provide more detailed interaction and guidance.

interaction mode
advanced

Provide less audible interaction and more tone prompts.

The system defaults to the standard interaction mode.

303

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Confirmation prompts are short questions
the system asks when it is not sure of your
request or when there are multiple possible
responses to your request. For example,
the system may ask "Phone, is that
Voice command

correct?". If turned off, the system simply
makes a best guess as to what you
requested and may ask you to confirm
settings.

If you want the system to carry out the following

confirmation prompts off Make a best guess from the command; you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings.
confirmation prompts on Clarify your voice command with a short question.
For example, say "Say 1 after the tone to
call John Doe at home. Say 2 after the tone
to call Johnny Doe on mobile. Say 3 after
the tone to call Jane Doe at home." You
could also say "Say 1 after the tone to play
John Doe, Say 2 after the tone to play
Johnny Doe."

The system creates candidate lists when
it has the same confidence level of several
options based on your voice command.
When turned on, it may prompt you with
as many as four possibilities for
clarification.
Voice command

If you want the system to carry out the following

media candidate lists off Make a best guess from the media candidate list. You may
still occasionally be asked questions.
media candidate lists on Clarify your voice command for media candidates.
phone candidate lists off Make a best guess from the phone candidate list. You may
still occasionally be asked questions.
phone candidate lists on Clarify your voice command for phone candidates
•
•
•
•
•

USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cell phone's
functionality. At a minimum, most cell
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
support the following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.

Using privacy mode.
Dialing a number.
Redialing.
Call waiting notification.
Caller ID.

Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are cell phone-dependent
features. To check your cell phone's
compatibility, see your cell phone's manual
and visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.

304

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Pairing a Cell Phone for the First
Time

Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.

Note: SYNC can support downloading up
to approximately 1000 entries per
Bluetooth-enabled cell phone.

Wirelessly pairing your cell phone with
SYNC allows you to make and receive
hands-free calls.

Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Put the transmission in
position park (P) (automatic transmission)
or neutral with the parking brake applied
(manual transmission).

Press the phone button. When the display indicates there is no cell phone paired,
do the following:
Message

Action and Description

No Phone Paired

Press the OK button. When the following message appears
in the display.

Find SYNC

1. Press the OK button.
2. Put your cell phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See
your device's manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your cell phone's display, enter the
six-digit PIN provided by SYNC in the radio display. The
display indicates when the pairing is successful.

Depending on your cell phone's capability
and your market, the system may prompt
you with questions, such as setting the
current cell phone as the primary cell
phone (the cell phone SYNC automatically
tries to connect with first upon vehicle
start-up) and downloading your
phonebook.

305

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Message

Action

Phone settings

Press the OK button.

Bluetooth Devices

Press the OK button.

Add Device

Press the OK button. When the following message appears
in the display.

Find SYNC

The system then prompts with questions, such as if you would like to set the current cell
phone as the primary cell phone (the cell phone SYNC automatically tries to connect
with first upon vehicle start-up) or download your phonebook.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition and the radio. Put the transmission in position
park (P) (automatic transmission) or neutral with the parking brake applied (manual
transmission).
Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on your audio system.
Phone Voice Commands
Voice Command

Action

call (someone |
[[a] name])

You do not need to preceed this command by saying; phone.
This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.

Call ___ at Home

You do not need to preceed this command by saying; phone.
This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.

Call ___ at Work

You do not need to preceed this command by saying; phone.
This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.

Call ___ in Office

You do not need to preceed this command by saying; phone.
This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.

306

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Voice Command

Action

Call ___ on Mobile

You do not need to preceed this command by saying; phone.
This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.

Call ___ on Other

You do not need to preceed this command by saying; phone.
This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.

Call History
Incoming

This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.

Call History
Missed

This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.

Call History
Outgoing

This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.

[Phone] Connections | [Media]
Connections |
[Bluetooth]
Connections
dial [[a] number]

You do not need to preceed this command by saying; phone.
See the following Phonebook Commands.

This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
See the following Menu Commands.

Phonebook ___

This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.

Phonebook ___ at
Home

This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.

Phonebook ___ at
Work

This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.

307

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Voice Command

Action

Phonebook ___ in
Office

This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.

Phonebook ___
on Cell

This command is not available until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.

Phonebook ___ on This command is not available until your cell phone information is
Other
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where (call | calls) appears you say; call or calls.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; join (call | calls) appears, you must say join followed by either call
or calls.
You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where
([go to] privacy [on]) appears, you can say privacy.
Voice Command

Phonebook Commands
When you ask SYNC to access content, for
example the phonebook name or number,
the requested information appears in the
display to view.

[Phone] Settings [Set] Phone Ringer

Phone Menu Commands

[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 3

[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 1
[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 2

[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer Off

Voice Command

Text Message Inbox

[Phone] Connections | [Media] Connections | [Bluetooth] Connections

You do not need to say word contained
within brackets for the system to
understand your command.

[Phone] Settings [Message] Notification
On
[Phone] Settings [Message] Notification
Off

308

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Making a Call
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Voice Command

call (someone | [[a]
name])

Action and Description

This command is not available until your cell phone information is completely downloaded using Bluetooth.

dial [[a] number]
When the system confirms the number say one of the following commands:
dial [[a] number]

To confirm the number and initiate the call.

(delete | correct)

To erase the last spoken digit or press the left arrow button.

clear

To erase all spoken digits or press and hold the left arrow
button.

To end a call press and hold the red phone button.

Receiving Calls

Phone Options during an Active
Call

When receiving a call, you can:
• Answer the call by pressing the phone
button.
• Reject the call by pressing and holding
the red phone button.
• Ignore the call by doing nothing.

During an active call, you have more menu
features that become available, for
example putting a call on hold or joining
calls. Use the arrow buttons to scroll
through the menu options.

Press the MENU button during an active call, then scroll to:
Message

Active call

Action and Description

Press the OK button.

Select one of the following:
Mute Call

Press the OK button to mute the call.

Privacy

Press the OK button to switch a call from an active handsfree environment to your cell phone for a more private
conversation.

Hold

Press the OK button to put an active call on hold.

Join calls

Join two separate calls. SYNC supports a maximum of three
callers on a multiparty call or conference call.

309

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Message

Action and Description

1. Press the phone button.
2. Access the desired contact through SYNC or use voice
commands to place the second call. Once actively in the
second call, press MENU.
3. Scroll to Join Calls, and press the OK button. Wait until
the following message appears.
Join calls

Press the OK button.

Phonebook

To access your phonebook contacts.
Press the OK button to select, and then scroll through
your phonebook contacts.
2. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the display.
3. Press the phone button to call the contact.
1.

Call History

To access your call history log.
1.

Press the OK button to select, then scroll through your
call history options (incoming, outgoing or missed).
2. Press the OK button when the desired selection appears
in the display.
3. Press the phone button to call the selection.
Return

Exit the current menu.

Accessing Features Through the
Phone Menu
The phone menu allows you to redial a
number, access your call history and
phonebook and sends text messages as
well as access cell phone and system
settings. You can also access advanced
features, for example 911 Assist, Vehicle
Health Report and SYNC Services.
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Message

Phone Redial

Action and Description

Press the OK button to redial the last number called.

310

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Message

Action and Description

Press the OK button again to confirm.
Call History

Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls after you
1

connect your Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to SYNC .
Press the OK button then select one of the following and press
the OK button again to confirm.
Incoming calls
Outgoing calls
Missed calls
The system attempts to automatically re-download your
phonebook and call history each time your cell phone connects
to SYNC (if the auto download feature is on and your Bluetoothenabled cell phone supports this feature).
Phonebook

Access and call any contacts in your previously downloaded
1,2

phonebook .
If your phonebook has less than 255 entries, they appear
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than 255
entries, the system will organize them into alphabetical
categories.
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to the desired contact.
3. Press OK or the phone button to call the contact.
Text messaging

Press the OK button to send, download, read and delete text
1

messages .
Phone settings

View your cell phone's status, set ring tones, select your
message notification, change phonebook entries and automat1

ically download your cell phone content among other features .
SYNC Services

Access the SYNC Services portal where you can request various
3

types of information, for example traffic reports and directions .
911 Assist

Auotmatically place an emergency call to a 911 operator
4

following a crash .
Vehicle Health Report

Create and receive a diagnostic report card on your vehicle .

311

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Message

Mobile Apps

Action and Description

Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your
3

smartphone .
Exit

Press the OK button to to exit the phone menu.

This is a cell phone-dependent feature.

This is a cell phone-dependent and speed-dependent feature.

This is an optional feature and available in the United States only.

This is an optional feature and available in the United States and Canada only.
Receiving a Text Message

Text Messaging

When a new text message arrives, an
audible tone sounds and the information
display indicates you have a new message.

SYNC allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages. The
system can also read incoming text
messages to you so that you do not have
to take your eyes off the road.

Note: This is a cell phone-dependent
feature. Your cell phone must support
downloading text messages using Bluetooth
to receive incoming text messages.

Note: This is a cell phone-dependent
feature.

Following the notification choose from
the following:

Read or store the text message:
Message

Action and Description

Text msg notify

Press the OK button to receive and open the text message.
Press the OK button again and SYNC reads your message
aloud if you are not able to view the message. You can then
also choose to reply or forward the message.

Text msg notify

Take no action, the message goes into your text message
inbox.

Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Voice Command

Read Message | Read
Text Message | Text
Message

Action and Description

Press the OK button to have SYNC read the message to you.

312

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™

Reply or forward the message:
Message

Text msg notify

Action and Description

Press the OK button.

Select one of the following:
Reply to sender

Press the OK button to access and then scroll through the
list of pre-defined messages to send.

Forward msg.

Press the OK button to forward the message to anyone in
your Phonebook or Call History. You can also choose Enter
Number.

Note: Forwarding a text message is a speed-dependent feature. It is only available when
your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
Note: Sending a text message is a
speed-dependent feature. It is only available
when your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5
km/h) or less.

Sending, Downloading and Deleting
Your Text Messages
Text messaging is a cell phone-dependent
feature. If your cell phone is compatible,
SYNC allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages.

Note: You can only have one recipient per
text message.

Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Message

Text messaging

Action and Description

Press the OK button.

Select one of the following:
Download now

Allows you to download your unread messages to SYNC. To
download the messages, press the OK button to select. The
display indicates the system is downloading your messages.
When downloading is complete, SYNC returns you to the
inbox.

Delete All Messages?

Allows you to delete current text messages from SYNC. To
delete the messages, press the OK button to select. The
display indicates when it is finished deleting all your text
messages. SYNC returns you to the text message menu.

313

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Message

Send Text Message?

Action and Description

Allows you to send a new text message based on a predefined set of 15 messages. See the following Pre-defined
text messages table.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Press the OK button.
Scroll to your desired message.
Press the OK button.
Scroll through your phonebook, call history entries or enter
a new number.
5. Press the OK button to enter the desired contact.
6. Press the OK button again when the system asks if you
would like to send the message. The system sends each
text message with the following signature: This message
was sent from my Ford.
Press the OK button to exit the current menu.

Return

Message

Pre-defined text messages
Thanks!

Message

Where R you?

Can't talk right now

I love you

Call me

Too funny :-)

Call you later

Heavy traffic :-(

See u in 10 minutes
See u in 20 minutes

Accessing Your Phone Settings

Yes

These are cell phone-dependent features.
Your cell phone settings allow you to
access and adjust some features. For
example ring tones, text message
notification, modify your phonebook and
set up automatic download.

No
Why?

314

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™

Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Message

Phone settings

Action and Description

Press the OK button.

Select one of the following:
Phone status

See the provider, name, signal power, battery power and
roaming status of your connected cell phone.
Press OK to select and scroll to view the information. When
done, press OK again to return to the phone status menu.

Set ringtone

Select which ring tone sounds during an incoming call. You
can choose one of the system ring tones or your cell phone
ring tones.
Press the OK button and scroll to hear and choose from the
following ring tones.
Set ringer X
Set ringer X
Set ringer X
Phone Ringer
Press the OK button to select th desired ring tone. If your cell
phone supports in-band ringing, your cell phone ring plays
when you choose the phone ringer option.

Text Message Notification

You have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you
when a text message arrives.
Press the OK button then select one of the following and
press the OK button again to confirm.
Message Notification On
Message Notification Off

Add contacts

Press the OK button to add more contacts from your
phonebook. Push the desired contact(s) on your cell phone.
See your cell phone's manual on how to push contacts.

315

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Message

Auto-download

Action and Description

Automatically download your phonebook each time your cell
phone connects to SYNC.

Return
*

Exit the current menu.

Downloading times are cell phone-dependent and quantity-dependent.

When Auto Download is on, it automatically deletes any changes, additions or deletions
saved since your last download.
Bluetooth Devices

System Settings

The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to add, connect and delete devices, set a
cell phone as primary as well as turn your
Bluetooth feature on and off.

This menu provides access to your
Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu
features. Use the arrow buttons to scroll
through the menu options.

In the Phone settings menu, some options you can select include:
Message

BT Devices

Action and Description

Press the OK button.

Select one of the following:
Add Device

See Using SYNC™ With Your Phone (page 304).

Bluetooth On and Off

Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Press the OK button and scroll to toggle between on and off.
Press the OK button again.
Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices
and turns off all Bluetooth features.

Delete

Delete a paired cell phone.
Press the OK button and scroll to select the device. Press OK
to confirm.

Return

Exit the current menu.

This is a speed-dependent feature. It is only available when your vehicle is traveling at
3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
**

You can only connect one device at a time. When another cell phone is connected, the
previous one is disconnected.

316

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Advanced

and set prompts, languages, defaults,
perform a master reset, install an
application and view system information.

The Advanced menu allows you to access

In the Advanced settings menu, you can select any of the following
Message

Confirmation Prompts

Action and Description

Get help from SYNC by using questions, helpful hints or asking
you for a specific action. To turn these prompts on or off:
1.

Press the OK button to select and scroll to select between
On and Off.
2. Press the OK button when the desired selection appears
in the display. SYNC returns you to the Advanced menu.
Language

Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages.
Choose between English, Français and Español. Once
selected, all of the radio displays and prompts are in the
selected language.
2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the
display. If you change the language setting, the display
indicates that the system is updating. When complete,
SYNC returns you to the Advanced menu.

Factory Defaults

Return to the factory default settings. This selection does
not erase your indexed information, for example phonebook,
call history, text messages or paired devices.
Press the OK button to select and then press OK again when
the following message appears in the display.
Restore Defaults?

Master reset

Completely erase all information stored on SYNC, for example
phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices,
and return the system to the factory default settings.
Press OK to select. The display indicates when complete.
SYNC returns you to the Advanced menu.

Install Applications

Install applications you have downloaded.
Press the OK button and scroll to select. Press the OK button
to confirm.

System info

Access the Auto Version number as well as the FDN number.
Press the OK button to select.

Return

Exit the current menu.

317

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES (If Equipped)

WARNINGS
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.

In order for the following features to work,
your cell phone must be compatible with
SYNC. To check your phone's
compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
*
• SYNC Services : Provides access to
traffic, directions and information such
as travel, horoscopes, stock prices and
more.
• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of
an emergency.
*
• Vehicle Health Report : Provides a
diagnostic and maintenance report
card of your vehicle.
• SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect
to and use certain applications, for
example Pandora and Stitcher on a
compatible cell phone.

Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is turned off, either a voice
message plays or a display message (or
icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle
is started after a previously paired phone
connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.

This is an optional feature and available
in the United States only.

911 Assist (If Equipped)

If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
can learn more about the 911 Assist
feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.

WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.

See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 32). Important information about
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 175).
Important information about the fuel pump
shut-off is in this chapter.

318

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Switching 911 Assist On or Off
Press the phone button to enter the phone menu and scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

911 Assist

Press the OK button to confirm and enter the 911 Assist menu.

Press the OK button when the desired option appears in the
radio display.

Off

In the Event of a Crash

Off selections include:
• Off with reminder: Provides a display
and voice reminder at phone
connection at vehicle start.
• Off without reminder: Provides a
display reminder only without a voice
reminder at phone connection.

Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the
triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell
phone sustains damage or loses its
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC
will search for and try to connect to a
previously paired cell phone; SYNC will
then attempt to call the emergency
services.

To make sure that 911 Assist works
correctly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.

Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.

319

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature
requires activation before use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There
is no fee or subscription associated with
Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature.

911 Assist May Not Work If
•
•
•

Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.

Note: This feature may not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Before
running a report, review the Vehicle Health
Report Privacy Notice.

911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you turn on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not turn the feature on.

Note: In order to allow a break-in period for
your vehicle, you may not be able to create
a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle
odometer has reached 200 miles.
Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may
apply when making a report.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set
your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering,
you can request a Vehicle Health Report
(inside your vehicle). Return to your
account at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view
your report. You can also choose for SYNC
to remind you automatically to run reports
at specific mileage intervals.

Vehicle Health Report
WARNING

The system allows you to check your
vehicle's overall health in the form of a
diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health
Report contains valuable information, for
example:
• Vehicle diagnostic information
• Scheduled maintenance
• Open recalls and Field Service Actions
• Items noted during vehicle inspections
by an authorized dealer that still need
servicing.

Always follow scheduled
maintenance instructions, regularly
inspect your vehicle, and seek repair
for any damage or problem you suspect.
Vehicle Health Report supplements, but
cannot replace, normal maintenance and
vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Report
only monitors certain systems
electronically monitored by your vehicle
and will not monitor or report the status
of any other system, (such as brake lining
wear). Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance and regularly inspect your
vehicle may result in vehicle damage and
serious injury.

You can run a vehicle health report after
your vehicle has been running a minimum
of 60 seconds. Choose one of the following
options.

Note: This feature is only available in the
United States.

320

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™

Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Voice command

vehicle [health] report

Action and Description

The system will run a vehicle health report of your vehicle's
diagnostic systems and send the results to Ford where it
combines with scheduled maintenance information, open
recalls, other field service actions and vehicle inspection items
that still need servicing by an authorized dealer.

Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Message

vehicle [health] report

Action and Description

Press the OK button.

Select one of the following:
Report Interval

Press the OK button to and select on or off.
Select On to have SYNC automatically prompt you to run a
*

health report at certain mileage intervals.

Mileage Interval

Scroll to select between 5000, 7500 or 10000-mile intervals.
Select your desire option and press the OK button.

Run Report

Press the OK button for SYNC to run a health report of your
vehicle's diagnostic systems and send the results to Ford
where it combines with scheduled maintenance information,
open recalls, other field service actions and vehicle inspection
items that still need servicing by an authorized dealer.

Return

Exit the current menu.

You must first turn this feature on before you can select the desired mileage interval.
information, do not run the feature or set
up your Vehicle Health Report profile at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. See
www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health
Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy
Statement) for more information.

321

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions
& Information (TDI) (If Equipped,
United States Only)

Note: The driver is ultimately responsible
for the safe operation of the vehicle, and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe
to follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features provided are only an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your
observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, place you in an
unsafe situation, or if you would be directed
into an area that you consider unsafe. Maps
used by this system may be inaccurate
because of errors, changes in roads, traffic
conditions or driving conditions.

Note: SYNC Services varies by trim level
and model year and may require a
subscription. Traffic alerts and turn-by-turn
directions available in select markets.
Message and data rates may apply. Ford
Motor Company reserves the right to change
or discontinue this product service at any
time without prior notification or incurring
any future obligation.
Note: SYNC Services requires activation
before use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to
register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone
and message rates may apply. Subscription
may be required. You must also have the
active SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use,
SYNC Services. See Using SYNC™ With
Your Phone (page 304).

Note: When you connect, the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect your vehicle's current
location, travel direction and speed to help
provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches you request.
Further, to provide the services you request,
for continuous improvement, the service
may collect and record call details and voice
communications. For more information, see
SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want
Ford or its service providers to collect your
vehicle travel information or other
information identified in the Terms and
Conditions, do not subscribe or use the
service.

Note: This feature does not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Make sure
your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID
before using SYNC Services.

SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle
sensors, integrated GPS technology and
comprehensive map and traffic data, to
give you personalized traffic reports,
precise turn-by-turn directions, business
search, news, sports, weather and more.
For a complete list of services, or to learn
more, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.

322

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Voice command

Services

Action and Description

This initiates an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your
paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Once you connect to the service, follow the voice prompts
to request the desired service, for example traffic or directions.

Once you are connected to SYNC Services, you can also say the following:
(what are my (options | Receive a list of available services from which to choose.
choices) | what can I say
| [available] commands)
Services

To return to the Services main menu.

Help

Receive system help.

You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where (options | choices) appears you say either; options
or choices.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; what are my (options | choices) appears, you must say; what are
my, followed by either, options or choices.
You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where
(what can I say [available] commands) appears, you can say, what can I say commands.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Phone Menu
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Message

Services

Action and Description

Press the OK button. The display indicates the system is
connecting.
2. Press the OK button again. SYNC initiates the call to the
Services portal.
3. Once you connect to the service, follow the prompts to
request the desired service, for example traffic or directions.

323

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
When connected to SYNC Services, press the voice button and when prompted
say:
Voice command

Action and Description

Directions

To receive directions to a location. Once you select your
destination, the system uploads your current vehicle location,
calculates a route based on current traffic conditions and
sends it back to your vehicle. After the route download is
complete, the phone call automatically ends. You then receive
audible and visual driving instructions as you travel toward
your destination.

Business search

To find a business or type of business. Select your destination,
the system uploads your current vehicle location, calculates
a route based on current traffic conditions and sends it back
to your vehicle. After the route download is complete, the
phone call automatically ends. You then receive audible and
visual driving instructions as you travel toward your destination.

You can also say the following:
Search near me

To find the closest business or type of business to your location, within business search.

Operator

If you need further assistance in finding a location at any time
within a Directions or Business search and need to speak with
a live operator.
The live operator can assist you by searching for businesses
by name or by category, residential addresses by street
address or by name or specific street intersections.
The system may prompt you to speak with an operator when
it has difficulty matching your voice request. Operator Assist
is a feature of your SYNC Services subscription. For more
information on Operator Assist, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com/
support.

If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks if you want the
route updated. Say yes when prompted and the system sends
a new route to your vehicle.

Yes

During an active route.

324

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
To disconnect from SYNC services, say:
Voice command

Goodbye

Action and Description

From the SYNC Services main menu, or press and hold the
phone button on the steering wheel.

SYNC Services quick tips
SYNC Services quick tips

Personalizing

You can personalize your Services feature to provide quicker
access to your most used or favorite information. You can
save address points, for example work or home. You can also
save favorite information like sports teams or a news
category. You can learn more about personalization by logging
onto www.SYNCMyRide.com.

Push to interrupt

Press the voice button at any time while connected to SYNC
Services to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip, say your
voice command.

Portable

Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone number, not your VIN (Vehicle Identification
Number). You can pair and connect your phone to any vehicle
equipped with SYNC Services and continue enjoying your
personalized services.
You can even access your account outside your vehicle. Just
use the number on your phone's call history. Traffic and
Directions features do not function properly but information
services and the 411 connect and text message features are
available.
Note: Android users need to connect the
phone to SYNC using Bluetooth.

SYNC Mobile Apps

Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford
website.

The system enables voice and steering
wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled
smartphone apps. Once an app is running
through AppLink, you can control main
features of the app through voice
commands and steering wheel controls.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.
325

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps work automatically with no
setup. Other apps want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or favorites.
We recommend you do this at home or
outside of your vehicle.

Note: AppLink is not available if your
vehicle is equipped with the MyFordTouch
system.

To Access Using the SYNC Menu
Press the Menu button to the SYNC menu and scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

SYNC applications

Press the OK button.

Mobile Apps

Press the OK button and scroll through the list of available
applications and select your desired app.

Find New Apps

Press the OK button to search for new app's.

Note: If a SYNC AppLink compatible app cannot be found, make sure the required app is
running on the mobile device.
You can access various app features from
here, for example thumbs up and thumbs
down.

Accessing an App's Menu
Once an app is running through SYNC,
press the right arrow button on the steering
wheel control to access the app menu.

Press the left arrow button on the steering
wheel control to exit the app menu.

To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Voice command

Mobile Apps

Action and Description

Say the name of the application after the tone.
The app should start. While an app is running through SYNC,
you can press the voice button and speak commands specific
to the app, for example, Playlist Road Trip.

You can also say the following:
Help

To discover the available voice commands.

326

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
SYNC Mobile App Voice Commands
The following voice commands are always available:
Voice command

Action and Description

Mobile Apps

SYNC prompts you to say the name of an app to start it on
SYNC.

List mobile apps

SYNC lists all of the currently available mobile apps.

Find New Apps

SYNC searches your connected mobile device for SYNCcompatible mobile apps.

At any time you can say the name of a mobile app to start
the mobile app on SYNC.

help

SYNC lists the available voice commands for the specified
app if the app is running on SYNC.
•

App Permissions
App permissions are organized by groups.
You can grant these group permissions
individually. You can change a permission
group status any time when not driving, by
using the settings menu.

•

When you launch an app using SYNC, the
system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example:
• To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle
information to the app such as, but not
limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel
consumption, engine speed, rain
sensor, odometer, VIN, external
temperature, gear position, tire
pressure, and head lamp status.
• To allow your vehicle to provide driving
characteristic information such as, but
not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status,
engine revolutions per minute, gear
position, braking events, steering wheel
angle, and accelerator pedal position.

To allow your vehicle to provide
location information, including: GPS
and speed.
To allow the app to send push
notifications using the vehicle display
and voice capabilities while running in
a background state. Push notifications
may be particularly useful for news or
location based apps.

Note: You only need to grant permissions
the first time you use an app with SYNC.
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for
any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any
vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.

327

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Enabling and Disabling App Permissions Using the SYNC Menu
Press the Menu button to the SYNC menu and scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

SYNC applications

Press the OK button.

Mobile Apps

Press the OK button.

App Settings

Select the specific app and press the OK button.

All Apps

If push notifications are supported, this setting is listed. Select
to enable or disable the feature as required.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.

Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.

Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.

Data is sent to Ford in the United States
through the connected device. The
information is encrypted and includes your
VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous
usage statistics and debugging
information. Updates may take place
automatically.

App Status
You can view the current status of an app
in the settings menu.

There are three possible statuses:
Message

Action and Description

Update Needed

The system has detected a new app requiring authorization
or a general permissions update is required.

Up-To-Date

No update is required.

Updating...

The system is trying to receive an update.

Request Update

If an update is required and you want to request it update
manually, for example when in a Wi-Fi hotspot.

Disable Updates

You can disable automatic updates in the settings menu.
Doing so also disables the use of Mobile Apps on SYNC.

328

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Connecting Your Digital Media
Player to the USB Port

USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
MEDIA PLAYER

Note: If your digital media player has a
power switch, make sure you switch it on
before plugging it in.

You can access and play music from your
digital music player over your vehicle's
speaker system using the system's media
menu or voice commands. You can also
sort and play your music by specific
categories, for example artist and album.

To Connect Using Voice Commands
Plug the device into the USB port. See
USB Port (page 297).

Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 6,000 songs.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player including: iPod®,
Zune™, plays from device players, and
most USB drives. SYNC also supports the
following audio formats MP3, WMA, WAV
and ACC.

E142599

Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Voice command

Action and Description

(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
[player])
voice commands. See Media voice commands.
You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where
(USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3 [player]) appears, you can say USB or USB stick.
To Connect Using the System Menu
Plug the device into the USB port. See
USB Port (page 297).
Press the AUX button, then scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

Press the OK button to enter the media menu.

Browse device

Press the OK button.

USB

Press the OK button.
Depending on how many digital media files are on your
connected device, the following message may appear in the
radio display. When indexing is complete, the screen returns
to the Play menu.
Indexing…

329

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Message

Action and Description

Select one of the following:
Play all
Artist
Albums
Genres
Playlists
Tracks
Browse USB
Similar music
Return

Exit the current menu.

What's Playing?
When a track is playing, you can ask the
system to tell you what is currently playing.
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Voice command

Action and Description

((who's | who is) this |
The system reads the metadata tags of the playing track,
who plays this | (what's and if the metadata tags are populated, the system will tell
| what is) playing [now] you what track is playing.
| (what | which) (song |
track | artist) is this |
(who's | who is) playing |
(what's | what is) this)
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or
what is.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; who plays this (what's | what is) playing, you must say; who plays
this (what's or what is) playing.

330

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Media Voice Commands

Voice command

Press the voice button and when
prompted say any of the following:

Refine album ___
repeat (track | song) [on]

Voice command

repeat off

(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player])

(browse | search | show) album

Autoplay Off

(browse | search | show) all (artist |
artists)

Autoplay [on]
[Phone] Connections | [Media] Connections | [Bluetooth] Connections

(browse | search | show) all (genre
| genres)

pause

play
play [album] [by [artist]]

1,2

shuffle [all] [on]
Play all

shuffle off

play [artist]

1,2

play [genre]

1,2

[Play] Next Folder

[play] next track
play [playlist]

1,2

[Play] Previous Folder

is a dynamic listing, meaning that
it could be the name of anything, such as
a group, artist or song.
2

This voice command is not available until
indexing is complete.

[play] previous track
play [song | track | title | file]

1,2

This voice command is only available in
folder mode.

331

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Voice Command Guide
Voice command

Autoplay [on]

Action and Description

Turn autoplay on to listen to music processed during indexing.
Turn autoplay off to allow the indexing process to finish
*

before the system plays any of your music.

(browse | search | show) The system searches all the data from your indexed music
and, if available, begins to play the chosen type of music. You
all (genre | genres)
can only play genres of music that are present in the GENRE
play [genre]
metadata tags that you have on your digital media player.
[play] (similar music |
more like this)

The system compiles a playlist and then plays music similar
to what is currently playing from the USB port using indexed
metadata information.

The system searches for specific artist information from the
music indexed through the USB port.

play [song | track | title |
file]

The system searches for specific track information from the
music indexed through the USB port.

play [album] [by [artist]] The system searches for specific album information from the
music indexed through the USB port.
Refine

This allows you to make your previous command more
specific. For example, if you asked to search and play all music
by a certain artist, you could then say, refine album and
choose a specific album from the list to view. If you then
select Play, the system only plays music from that specific
album.

Indexing times can vary from device to device and with regard to the number of songs
the system needs to process.

332

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Bluetooth Audio Command Guide

Voice command

Press the voice button and when
prompted say any of the following:

[play] next track
[play] previous track

Voice command

Media Menu Features

[Phone] Connections | [Media] Connections | [Bluetooth] Connections

The media menu allows you to select your
media source, how to play your music, for
example by artist, genre, shuffle or repeat,
and to add, connect or delete devices.

pause
play
Press the AUX button, then scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

Press the OK button to enter the media menu.

Select one of the following:
Menu

Play your music by artist, album, genre, playlist, track, similar
music or play all music. You can also choose to Explore USB
to view the supported digital music files on your playing
device.

Browse device

Select and play music from your USB port, auxiliary input jack
or stream music from your Bluetooth-enabled cell phone.

Select one of the following:
USB

Press the OK button to access music plugged into your USB
port. You can also plug in devices to charge them (if
supported by your device). Once connected, the system
indexes any readable media files.

Bluetooth audio

Line In

Press the OK button. This is a phone-dependent feature that
allows you to stream music playing on your Bluetoothenabled phone. If supported by your device, you can press
seek to play the previous or next track.
Press the OK button to select and play music from your
portable music player over your vehicle's speakers.

Media Player Settings

Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and select your
Autoplay settings. Once you turn these selections on, they
remain on until you turn them off. Press SEEK to play the
previous or next track.

333

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Message

Action and Description

Select one of the following:
Shuffle

Press the OK button to shuffle available media files in the
current playlist. To shuffle all media tracks, you must select
Play All in the play menu and then select Shuffle.

Repeat

Press the OK button to repeat any song.

Autoplay

Press the OK button to turn autoplay on to listen to music
processed during indexing. Turn autoplay off to allow the
indexing process to finish before the system plays any of your
music.

Mobile Apps

Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your
smartphone.

Settings

Access available Bluetooth Device menu listings as well as
Advanced menu listings.

Exit

Press OK to exit the media menu.

The time required to complete this depends on the size of the media the system needs
to index. If autoplay is on, you can listen to media processed during indexing. If autoplay
is off, you cannot listen to music until the system finishes indexing media. SYNC is capable
of indexing thousands of average size media and notifies you if it reaches the maximum
indexing file size.
2

If you have already connected a device to the USB port, you cannot access the line in
feature. Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data
and music separately.
3

Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data and music
separately
4

Indexing times can vary from device to device and with regard to the number of songs
the system needs to process.
If there are no media files to access, the
display indicates there is no media. If there
are media files, you have the following
options:

Accessing Your Play Menu
This menu allows you to select and play
your media by artist, album, genre, playlist,
track, similar music or even to explore what
is on your USB device.

Note: If your digital media player has a
power switch, make sure you switch it on
before plugging it in.

334

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™

Press the AUX button, then scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

Press the OK button to enter the media menu.

Select one of the following:
Play all

Press the OK button. The first track title appears in the
display.
Play all indexed media (tracks) from your playing device in
flat file mode, one at a time in numerical order.

Artist

Sort all indexed media by artist. Once selected, the system
lists and then play all artists and tracks alphabetically. If there
are fewer than 255 indexed artists, the system lists them
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than 255,
the system categorizes them alphabetically.
1.

Press the OK button. You can select to play all artists or
any indexed artist.
2. Scroll to choose the desired artist. Press the OK button.

Albums

Sort all indexed media by albums. If there are fewer than 255
indexed albums, the system lists them alphabetically in flat
file mode. If there are more than 255, the system categorizes
them alphabetically.
Press the OK button. You can enter the album menu and
select from playing all albums or from any individual
indexed album.
2. Scroll to choose the desired album. Press the OK button.
1.

Genres

Sort indexed music by genre (category) type. SYNC lists the
genres alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than
255, the system categorizes them alphabetically.
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to select the desired genre. Press the OK button.

Playlists

Access your playlists from formats ASX, M3U, WPL or MTP.
The system lists your playlists alphabetically in flat-file mode.
If there are more than 255, the system categorizes them
alphabetically.
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist. Press the OK button.

335

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Message

Tracks

Action and Description

Search for and play a specific indexed track. SYNC lists your
tracks alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than
255, the system categorizes them alphabetically.
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to select the desired track. Press the OK button.

Browse USB

Explore all supported digital media on your media device
connected to the USB port. You can only view media content
which is compatible with SYNC; other files saved are not
visible.
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to explore indexed media on your flash drive.

Similar Music

Play music similar to what is currently playing from the USB
port. The system uses the metadata information of each song
*

to compile a playlist for you.

1. Press the OK button.
2. The system creates a new list of similar songs and begins
playing. This feature does not include tracks with incomplete metadata information. Press the OK button.
Return

Exit the current menu.

With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags are not populated, the tracks are not
available in voice recognition, play menu or similar music. However, if you place these
tracks onto your playing device in "Mass Storage Device Mode", they are available in voice
recognition, play menu browsing and similar music. The system places Unknown items
into any unpopulated metadata tag.

System Settings
Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to add, connect and delete a device as turn
the Bluetooth feature on and off.

336

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™

Press the AUX button, then scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

Press the OK button to enter the media menu.

Settings

Press the OK button.

Bluetooth Devices

Press the OK button.

Select one of the following:
Add Device

Pair more devices to the system.

Press the OK button. When find SYNC appears in the
display, press the OK button again.
2. Follow the directions in your phone's manual to put your
phone into discovery mode. A six-digit PIN appears in the
display.
3. When prompted on your phone's six-digit display, enter
the PIN.
Bluetooth On and Off

Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
1.

Press the OK button and scroll to toggle between on and
off.
2. Make a selection, press the OK button.
DEL DEVICE

Delete a paired media device.
1. Press the OK button and scroll to select the device.
2. Press the OK button to confirm.

Delete All

Delete all previously paired devices.
1. Press the OK button.
2. Press the OK button to confirm.

Return

Exit the current menu.

This is a speed-dependent feature. It is only available when your vehicle is traveling at 3
mph (5 km/h) or less.
**

Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and turns off all Bluetooth
features.

337

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Advanced

and set prompts, languages, defaults and
perform a master reset.

The Advanced menu allows you to access

In the Advanced settings menu, you can select any of the following
Message

Confirmation Prompts

Action and Description

Have SYNC guide you by asking questions, helpful hints or
ask you for a specific action.
1.

Press the OK button and scroll to toggle between on and
off.
2. Make a selection, press the OK button. SYNC takes you
back to the Advanced menu.

Language

Choose from the available languages. The displays and
prompts are in the selected language.
1.

Press the OK button and scroll through the available
languages.
2. Press the OK button when the desired language appears
in the display.
3. If you change the language setting, the display indicates
that the system is updating. When complete, SYNC takes
you back to the Advanced menu.
Factory Defaults

Return to the factory default settings. This selection does
not erase your indexed information, for example phonebook,
call history, text messages and paired devices.
1. Press the OK button.
2. Press the OK button. When restore defaults appears in
the display, press the OK button again to confirm.

Master reset

Completely erase all information stored on SYNC. All
phonebook, call history, text messages and all paired devices
will be deleted and the system will return to the factory
default settings.

Install Applications

Download available software applications through the USB
port.

Return

Exit the current menu.

338

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Use the website at any time to check your
phone's compatibility, register your
account and set preferences as well as
access a customer representative via an
online chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca for more
information.

SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.

Phone issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

The audio control settings
There is excessive background noise during a phone on your phone may be
affecting SYNC performcall.
ance.

Review your phone's manual
about audio adjustments.

During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.

This may be a possible
phone malfunction.

Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.

SYNC is not able to download my phonebook.

This is a phone-dependent
feature.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.

Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.

The system says Phonebook This may be a limitation on
Downloaded but the
your phone's capability.
phonebook in SYNC is
empty or missing contacts.

Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associated with the missing
contact.

339

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Phone issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
I am having trouble
connecting my phone to
SYNC.

This is a phone-dependent
feature.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.

Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on
your phone.
Update your device's firmware.
Turn off the Auto phonebook download setting.

Text messaging is not
working on SYNC.

This is a phone-dependent
feature.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.

Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.

340

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™

USB and media issues
Issue

I am having trouble
connecting my device.

Possible cause(s)

This may be a possible
device malfunction.

SYNC does not recognize
This is a device limitation.
my device when I turn on the
car.

Possible solution(s)

Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device
does not have an autoinstall program or active
security settings.
Make sure you are not
leaving the device in your
vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.

Bluetooth audio does not
stream.

This is a phone-dependent Review the device compatibility chart on the SYNC
feature.
The device is not connected. website to confirm your
phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.
Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
and that you have pressed
play on your device.

SYNC does not recognize
music that is on my device.

Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
The file may be corrupted.
The song may have copyright protection, which does
not allow it to play.

341

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Make sure that all song
details are populated.
Some devices require you to
change the USB settings
from mass storage to MTP
class.

SYNC™

Vehicle Health Report and Services (Traffic, Directions and Information) issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

I received a text that I did
not activate Vehicle Health
Report.

You did not activate your
account on the website.
You may have the wrong
VIN (vehicle identification
number) listed.

This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to
use it.
Make sure that your VIN is
correctly listed in your
account.

I am unable to retrieve the
report on the website, or I
receive a system error.

The preferred dealer
information did not load
correctly.

When you register your
account, you must choose a
preferred dealer. If it already
lists a dealer, try selecting
another dealer and logging
out. Log back in, change it
back to your preferred
dealer, and retrieve the
report.

I am unable to submit a
report.

This could be due to your
phone's compatibility.
Bad signal strength.
You did not register your
phone correctly on the
website.

Update your cellular number
in your account on the
website.
Make sure you have full
signal strength and that your
Bluetooth volume level has
been turned up.
Make sure the currently
connected phone is
registered on your
SYNCMyRide account.
Try deleting your phone and
performing a clean pairing.

I heard a commercial when
I tried to use Traffic, Directions and Information.

You did not activate this
phone for this service.
Your phone has ID blocker
active.

This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to
use it.
Turn off ID blocker on your
phone as the system recognizes you by your phone
number.
Make sure the currently
connected phone is the
same one that is registered
on your SYNCMyRide
account.

342

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™

Voice command issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

SYNC does not understand You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
what I am saying.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong time.

Review the phone voice
commands and the media
voice commands at the
beginning of their respective
sections.
After pressing the voice icon,
wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
appears before saying a
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.

SYNC does not understand You may be using the wrong
the name of a song or artist. voice commands.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.

Review the media voice
commands at the beginning
of the media section.
Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
by Prince and the Revolution
or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
Do not use special characters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.

SYNC does not understand
or is calling the wrong
contact when I want to
make a call.

You may be using the wrong Review the Phone voice
voice commands.
commands at the beginning
You may be saying the
of the phone section.
name differently than the
way you saved it.

343

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SYNC™
Voice command issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Contacts in your phonebook
may be very short and
similar, or they may contain
special characters.
Your phonebook contacts
may be in CAPS.

Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
Wilson, say "Call Joe
Wilson".
Using the SYNC phone
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
SYNC is having trouble
understanding. SYNC will
read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
The system works better if
you list full names, such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
Do not use special characters, such as 123 or ICE, as
the system does not recognize them.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
have to spell it. JAKE
requires you to say "Call JA-K-E".

AppLink issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

AppLink Mobile ApplicaAn AppLink capable phone
tions: When I select "Find
is not connected to SYNC.
New Apps," SYNC does not
find any applications.

344

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Possible solution(s)

Ensure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. Additionally, ensure your phone is
paired and connected to

SYNC™
AppLink issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

SYNC in order to find
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
My phone is connected, but AppLink-enabled apps are Ensure you have downI still cannot find any apps. not installed and running on loaded and installed the
latest version of the app
your mobile device.
from your phone's app store.
Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some apps
require you to register or
login on the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
My phone is connected, my Sometime apps do not
app(s) are running, but I still properly close and re-open
their connection to SYNC,
cannot find any apps.
over ignition cycles, for
example.

345

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit'
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
menu, selecting 'Apps.' then
finding the particular app
and choosing 'Force stop.'
Don't forget to restart the
app afterwards, then select
"Find New Apps" on SYNC.

SYNC™
AppLink issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.

There is a bluetooth bug on
some order versions of the
Android OS that may cause
apps that were found on
your previous vehicle drive
to not be found again if you
have not turned off
bluetooth.

346

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Reset the Bluetooth on your
phone by turning it off and
then turning Bluetooth back
on. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC should be able to
automatically re-connect to
your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.

SYNC™
AppLink issues
Issue

My iPhone phone is
connected, my app is
running, I restarted the app
but I still cannot find it on
SYNC.

Possible cause(s)

Unplug the USB cable from
The USB connection to
SYNC may need to be reset. the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
back in to the phone. After a
few seconds, the app should
appear in SYNC's Mobile
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.

I have an Android phone. I
The bluetooth volume on
found and started my media the phone may be low.
app on SYNC, but there is no
sound or the sound is very
low.
I can only see some of the
AppLink apps running on my
phone listed in SYNC's
Mobile Apps Menu.

Possible solution(s)

Some Android devices have
a limited number of
bluetooth ports apps can
use to connect. If you have
more AppLink apps on your
phone than the number of
availble Bluetooth ports, you
will not see all of your apps
listed in SYNC's mobile apps
menu.

347

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Try increasing the Bluetooth
volume of the device by
using the device's volume
control buttons which are
most often found on the
side of the device.
Force close or uninstall the
apps you do not want SYNC
to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that
setting in the app's settings
menu on the phone.

MyFord Touch™
GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

E162500

Item

This system uses a four-corner strategy to
provide quick access to several vehicle
features and settings. The touchscreen
provides easy interaction with your cell
phone, entertainment, information and
system settings. The corners display active
modes within the menus, for example; your
cell phone's status.

Message

Phone

Navigation

Settings

Home

Information

Entertainment

Note: Some features are not available while
your vehicle is moving.
Note: You can access the entertainment
features for 30 minutes after you switch the
ignition off, and no doors are opened.

348

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
PHONE
Press to select any of the following:
Press to select any of the following:

Message

Clock

Phone

Display

Quick Dial

Sound

Phonebook

Vehicle

History

Settings

Messaging

Help

Settings
HOME
NAVIGATION

Press to access the home
screen.

Press to select any of the following:

E142613

Previous Destinations

Note: Depending on your vehicle’s option
package and software, the screens may vary
in appearance from the descriptions in this
section. The features may also be limited
depending on the market. Check with an
authorized dealer for availability.

Point of Interest

INFORMATION

Message

My Home
Favorites

Emergency
Street Address

E142608

Intersection

Press to select any of the following:

City Center

Message

Map

Services

Edit Route

Travel Link

Cancel Route

Alerts
Calendar

SETTINGS

Apps
E142607

349

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
ENTERTAINMENT

Message

Press to select any of the following:

Message

USB

BT Stereo

SD Card

SIRIUS

Line In

Using the Audio Controls
Depending on your vehicle, it may also have the following controls:
Message

Action and Description

Power

Switch the media features on or off.

Vol:

Adjust the volume of playing media.

Seek

Use as you normally would in media modes.

Tune

Use as you normally would in media modes.

Eject

Eject a CD from the entertainment system.

Display

Press this button to switch the display screen off. Press again,
or touch the screen to switch the display screen on.

Source

Touch the control repeatedly to switch between media
modes.

Sound

Adjust the settings for:
• Bass
• Treble
• Midrange
• Balance
• Fade
• DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
• Occupancy Mode
• Speed Compensated Volume.

350

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Using the Steering Wheel Controls
Depending on your vehicle, it may also have the following controls:
Control

Action and Description

VOL

Adjust the volume of playing media.

Seek

Use as you normally would in media modes.

Voice

Press to start a voice session. Press again to interrupt a voice
prompt and begin speaking. Press and hold to end an active
voice session.

Seek/call accept

Use as you normally would in media and phone modes.

Seek/call reject

Use as you normally would in media and phone modes.

Safety Information

Cleaning the Touchscreen Display

WARNING

Use a dry, clean, soft cloth. If dirt or
fingerprints are still visible, apply a small
amount of alcohol to the cloth. Do not pour
or spray alcohol onto the display. Do not
use detergent or any type of solvent to
clean the display.

The SYNC support team is available:
• Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm
EST.
• United States: 1-888-270-1055
• Canada: 1-800-565-3673

Note: Times are subject to change due to
holidays.

•

Support

•

351

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.
Do not operate media devices if the
power cables are broken or damaged.

MyFord Touch™
•

•

Speed-restricted Features

Make sure the power cables do not
interfere with the safe operation of your
vehicle's controls or affect your safe
driving abilities.
Some SYNC functions are
speed-dependent. Their use is limited
to when your vehicle is traveling at
speeds below 3 mph (5 km/h).

Some features of this system are restricted
from use unless your vehicle is stationary.
• Screens crowded with information, for
example:
• Point of Interest reviews and ratings
• SIRIUS Travel Link sports scores
• Movie times
• Ski conditions.
• Any action that requires keyboard use,
for example: entering a navigation
destination or editing information.
• All lists are limited, for example: phone
contacts.

Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.

See the following chart for more specific
examples.
Speed-restricted Features

Cell phone

Pairing a cell phone
Adding or editing phonebook contacts
Phone contacts and recent phone call entries

System Functionality

Enabling Valet Mode
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park
assist are active

Wi-Fi and Wireless

Editing wireless settings
Editing the list of wireless networks

Photos and Graphics

Adding or editing wallpaper

Text Messages

Composing text messages
Viewing received text messages
Editing preset text messages

Navigation

Using the keyboard to enter a destination
Demo navigation route
Adding or editing Address Book or Avoid Area entries

352

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Privacy Information

Using Voice Commands

When you connect a cell phone to SYNC,
the system creates a profile within your
vehicle that links to that cell phone. This
profile helps in offering you more cellular
features and operating more efficiently.
Among other things, this profile may
contain data about your cell phone book,
text messages (read and unread), and call
history, including history of calls when your
cell phone was not connected to the
system. In addition, if you connect a media
device, the system creates and retains an
index of supported media content. The
system also records a short development
log of approximately 10 minutes of all
recent system activity. The log profile and
other system data may be used to improve
the system and help diagnose any
problems that may occur.

This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is in front of you.
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction (voice settings).

The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log remain in your
vehicle unless you delete them, and are
generally accessible only in your vehicle
when your cell phone or media player is
connected. If you no longer plan to use the
system or your vehicle, we recommend you
carry out a Master Reset to erase all stored
information.

How to Use Voice Commands

The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure
of your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.
When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the lower left status
bar indicating the status of the voice
command session (such as Listening,
Success, Failed, Paused or Try Again).

E142599

The following voice commands
can be said at any time during a
voice command session.

Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice command

System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to your
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada do not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described without consent,
a court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the sections on 911
Assist®, Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic,
Directions and Information.

main menu
List of commands
(what are my (options | choices) | what
can I say | [available] commands)
Next page
Previous page
Go back

353

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
You can say any of the voice commands
that appear within open and close brackets
that are separated by |. For example, where
(cancel | stop | exit) appears you say;
cancel or stop or exit.

Voice command

(cancel | stop | exit)
[main menu] help

You must say any of the voice commands
that appear outside of open and close
brackets. For example, what are my
(options | choices) appears, you must say;
what are my, followed by either options or
choices.
You do not need to say words that appear
within square brackets. For example, for
what can I say [available] commands
appears, you can say what can I say
commands.
What Can I Say?
During a voice command session, press the help icon ? in the lower left status bar
of the screen, and when prompted say one of the following:
Voice command

Action and Description

(what are my (options | This will provide an on-screen listing of the possible voice
choices) | what can I say commands associated with your current voice command
| [available] commands) session.
voice settings help

This will provide a spoken listing of the possible voice
commands associated with your current voice command
session.

Helpful Hints

•

Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken voice commands.
After pressing the voice command icon,
wait until after the tone sounds and
Listening appears before saying a voice
command. Any voice command spoken
prior to this will not register with the
system.

Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
At any time, you can interrupt the
system while it is speaking by pressing
the voice command icon.

Accessing a List of Available Voice
Commands
To access a list of available voice
commands you can do either of the
following.

354

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Voice Command Settings
Using the touchscreen, press:

These allow you to customize the level of
system interaction, help and feedback. The
system defaults to standard interaction
that uses candidate lists and confirmation
prompts as these provide the highest level
of guidance and feedback.

Message

Settings
Help
Voice Command List

•

Using the steering wheel control, press
the voice button and when prompted
say one of the following:
•

Voice Commands

Audio list of commands
Bluetooth audio list of commands
Browse list of commands
CD list of commands

•

List of commands
Navigation list of commands

Phone list of commands

Interaction Mode: Novice mode
provides detailed interaction and
guidance. Advanced mode has less
audible interaction and more tone
prompts.
Confirmation Prompts: The system
uses these short questions to confirm
your voice command. If turned off, the
system simply makes a best guess as
to what you requested. The system
may still occasionally ask you to
confirm a voice command.
Phone and Media Candidate Lists:
Candidate lists are lists of possible
results from your voice commands. The
system creates these lists when it has
the same confidence level of several
options based on your voice command.

Using the touchscreen, press the
settings icon, then press:

Radio list of commands
SD card list of commands

Message

Sirius satellite list of commands

Travel link list of commands

Voice settings
Voice Control

USB list of commands

Select from the following:

Voice instructions list of commands

Interaction Mode

Voice settings list of commands

Confirmation Prompts

voice settings help

Media Candidate Lists

Phone Candidate Lists

These voice commands are only available
when your vehicle is fitted with a
navigation system, and the navigation
system SD card is in the SD card slot.

Voice Control Volume

355

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Voice command

Using the steering wheel control, press
the voice button and when prompted
say one of the following:

media candidate lists on
media candidate lists off

Voice command

voice settings help

interaction mode novice

Using Voice Commands with the
Touchscreen Options

interaction mode advanced
confirmation prompts on

The voice command system has a dual
mode feature which allows you to switch
between using voice commands and
making on-screen selections. This is
available only when the system displays a
list of candidates generated during a voice
command session. For example, when
entering a street address or trying to call a
contact from a cell phone paired to the
system.

confirmation prompts off
phone candidate lists on
phone candidate lists off

SETTINGS

A
B
C
D
E
F
E161968

356

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Clock
Item

Message

Clock

Display

Sound

Vehicle

Settings

Help

Under this menu, you can set the clock,
access and adjust the display, sound and
vehicle settings as well as access settings
for specific modes or the help feature.

E142607

To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Message

Action and Description

Settings

Press the settings icon.

Clock

Press the + or - to adjust the time.
From this screen, you can also make other adjustments such
as 12-hour or 24-hour mode, activate GPS time synchronization and have the system automatically update new time
zones (if equipped with navigation).
You can also turn the outside air temperature display off and
on. It appears at the top center of the touchscreen, next to
the time and date.

Note: You cannot manually set the date. Your vehicle’s GPS does this for you.
Note: If the battery has been disconnected, your vehicle needs to acquire a GPS signal to
update the clock. Once your vehicle acquires the signal, it may take a few minutes for the
update to display the correct time.
You can adjust the display using the
touchscreen or the voice button on the
steering wheel controls.

Display

E142607

To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Message

Settings

Action and Description

Press the settings icon.

Display
Then select from the following:

357

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Message

Action and Description

Brightness

Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.

Mode

Allows you to turn the display off. It also allows you to set
the screen to a certain brightness or have the system automatically change based on the outside light level.
If you select AUTO or NIGHT, you have the options of turning
the display's Auto Dim feature on or off and changing the
Auto Dim Manual Offset feature.

Edit Wallpaper

Allows you to display the default photo or upload your own.
Note: Photographs with extremely large
dimensions (such as 2048 x 1536) may not
be compatible and appear as a blank
(black) image on the display.

E142599

To make adjustments using the voice
button, press the button and when
prompted, say:

The system allows you to upload and view
up to 32 photos.
To access, press:

Voice command
E142607

Display Settings
Uploading Photos for Your Home
Screen Wallpaper
Note: You cannot load photos directly from
your camera. You must access the photos
either from your USB mass storage device
or from an SD card.
To upload your photos, select:
Message

Settings

Action and Description

Press the settings icon.

Display
Display Photos from
Phonebook

Follow the system prompts to upload your photographs.

358

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Only the photograph(s), which meets the
following conditions will display:
• Compatible file formats are as follows:
.jpg, .gif, .png, .bmp.
• Each file must be 1.5 MB or less.
• Recommended dimensions: 800 x 384.

Message

Occupancy Mode
Speed Compensated Volume
DSP
Note: Your vehicle may not have all of
these sound settings.

Sound

Vehicle
E142607

To make adjustments using the
touchscreen, select:

E142607

To make adjustments using the
touchscreen, select:

Message

Settings

Message

Sound

Settings

Then select from the following:

Vehicle

Bass

Then select from the following:

Midrange

Vehicle Health Report

Treble

Camera Settings

Set Balance and Fade

Enable Valet Mode

Vehicle Health Report
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Message

Settings

Action and Description

Press the settings icon.

Vehicle
Vehicle Health

359

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Message

Action and Description

Automatic Reminders

Turn on and off and set the mileage interval at which you
would like to receive the reports. Press the ? for more
information on these selections.

Run Vehicle Health
Report Now

To run the vehicle health report immediately.

You can find more information on Vehicle Health Report in this chapter.
Camera Settings
E142607

This menu allows you to access settings
for your rear view camera.

To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Message

Settings

Action and Description

Press the settings icon.

Vehicle
Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
Enhanced Park Aids
Rear Camera Delay
You can find more information on the rear view camera system in another chapter. See
Parking Aids (page 142).
Note: If the system locks, and you need to
reset the PIN, enter 3681 and the system
unlocks.

Enable Valet Mode
Valet mode allows you to lock the system.
No information is accessible until the
system is unlocked with the correct PIN.

E142607

360

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™

To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Message

Settings

Action and Description

Press the settings icon.

Vehicle
Enable Valet Mode

Then enter a four digit PIN twice, as prompted.

Continue

After you press Continue the system locks until you enter the
PIN again.
System

Settings
Access and adjust system settings, voice
features, as well as phone, navigation and
wireless settings.

E142607

To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Message

Settings

Action and Description

Press the settings icon.

System
Then select from the following:
Language

Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish or
French.

Distance

Select to display units in kilometers or miles.

Temperature

Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.

System Prompt Volume

Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the system.

Touch Screen Button
Beep

Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made
through the touchscreen.

Keyboard Layout

Have the touchscreen keyboard display in QWERTY or ABC
format.

Install Applications

Install any downloaded applications or view the current
software licenses.

Master reset

Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal
settings and personal data.

361

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Voice Control
E142607

To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Message

Action and Description

Settings
Voice Control
Then select from the following:
Interaction Mode

Novice interaction mode provides more detailed interaction
and guidance. Advanced mode has less audible interaction
and more tone prompts.

Confirmation Prompts

Have the system ask you short questions if it has not clearly
heard or understood your request.
Note: Even with confirmation prompts turned off, the system
may occasionally ask you to confirm settings.

Media Candidate Lists

Candidate lists are possible results from your voice
commands. The system simply makes a best guess at your
request with these turned off.

Phone Candidate Lists

Candidate lists are possible results from your voice
commands. The system simply makes a best guess at your
request with these turned off.

Voice Control Volume

This allows you to adjust the system’s voice volume level.

Media Player

E142607

To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Message

Settings

Action and Description

Press the settings icon.

Media Player
Then select from the following:

362

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Message

Action and Description

Autoplay

When this feature is on, the system automatically switches
to the media source upon initial connection. This allows you
to listen to music during the indexing process. When this
feature is off, the system does not automatically switch to
the inserted media source.

Bluetooth Devices

Select to connect, disconnect, add or delete a device. You
can also set a device as your favorite so that the system
automatically attempts to connect to that device at every
ignition cycle.

Gracenote® Database
Info

This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote
Database.

Gracenote® Mgmt

With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplies
metadata information for your music files. This overrides
information from your device. This feature defaults to off.

Cover Art Priority

With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplied cover
art for your music files. This overrides any art from your device.
This feature defaults to Media Player.

Navigation

E142607

To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Message

Settings

Action and Description

Press the settings icon.

Navigation
Then select from the following:
Map Preferences

Turn breadcrumbs on and off.
Have the system display your turn list top to bottom or
bottom to top.
Turn the Parking POI notification on and off.

Route Preferences

Select shortest route, fastest route or ecological route as
your preferred route. This route will be displayed first.

363

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Message

Action and Description

Always use preferred route. If set to yes, the system will only
calculate a single route. This speeds up your destination entry
process.
Select a low, medium or high cost for the calculated ecological route. This may incur a time penalty.
Have the system avoid freeways.
Have the system avoid toll roads.
Have the system avoid ferries or car trains.
Have the system use HOV (high-occupancy vehicle) lanes.
Navigation Preferences

Have the system use guidance prompts.
Have the system automatically fill-in State/Province
information.

Traffic Preferences

Have the system automatically avoid traffic concerns or allow
you to accept or decline an alternative route.
Have the system automatically alert you to traffic concerns
that occur on your route.
Have the system display areas where road work occurs.
Have the system display incident icons.
Have the system display areas where difficult driving conditions may occur.
Have the system display areas where snow and ice on the
road may occur.
Have the system display any smog alerts.
Have the system display weather warnings.
Have the system display where there may be reduced visibility.
Have the system turn on your radio for traffic announcements.
Have the system automatically avoid traffic concerns.
Turn traffic alert notifications on or off.
Have the system display accident icons.

364

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Message

Action and Description

Have the system display traffic jam icons.
Have the system display closed roads.
Avoid Areas

Enter specific areas that would like to avoid on planned
navigation routes.

Phone

E142607

To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Message

Settings

Action and Description

Press the settings icon.

Phone
Then select from the following:
Bluetooth Devices

Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as save
it as a favorite.

Bluetooth

Turn Bluetooth on and off.

Do Not Disturb

Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring inside
your vehicle. With this feature turned on, text message notifications are also suppressed and do not ring inside your
vehicle.

911 Assist

Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature. See Information
(page 395).

Phone Ringer

Select the type of notification for phone calls - ring tone,
beep, text to speech or silent.

Text Message Notification

Select the type of notification for text messages - alert tone,
beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.

365

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Message

Action and Description

Internet Data Connection If compatible with your phone, you can adjust your internet
data connection. Select to make your connection profile with
the personal area network or to turn off your connection. You
can also choose to adjust your settings or have the system
always connect, never connect when roaming, or query on
connect. Press ? for more information.
Manage Phonebook

Access features, such as automatic phonebook download,
re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your phone
as well as delete or upload your phonebook.

Roaming Warning

Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode.
feature, everyone in your vehicle can also
gain access the internet if you have a USB
mobile broadband connection inside your
vehicle, your phone supports personal area
networking and if you park outside a
wireless hotspot.

Wireless & Internet
Your system has a Wi-Fi feature that
creates a wireless network within your
vehicle, thereby allowing other devices
(such as personal computers or phones)
in your vehicle to speak to each other,
share files or play games. Using this Wi-Fi

E142607

To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Message

Settings

Action and Description

Press the settings icon.

Wireless & Internet
Then select from the following:
Wi-Fi Settings

Wi-Fi Network (Client) Mode
Turns the Wi-Fi feature on and off in your vehicle. Make sure
you turn it on for connectivity purposes.
Choose a Wireless Network
Allows you to use a previously stored wireless network. You
can categorize by alphabetical listing, priority and signal
strength. You can also choose to search for a network,
connect to a network, disconnect from a network, receive
more information, prioritize a network or delete a network.
Gateway (Access Point) Mode

366

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Message

Action and Description

Makes SYNC an access point for a phone or a computer when
turned on. This forms the local area network within your
vehicle for things, such as game playing, file transfer and
internet browsing. Press ? for more information.
Gateway (Access Point) Settings
Allows you to view and change settings for using SYNC as
the internet gateway.
Gateway (Access Point) Device List
Allows you to view recent connections to your Wi-Fi system.
USB Mobile Broadband

Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can also use a USB mobile
broadband connection to access the internet. (You must turn
on your mobile broadband device on your personal computer
before connecting it to the system.) This screen allows you
to set up what is your typical area for your USB mobile
broadband connection. (USB mobile broadband settings
may not display if the device is already on.) You can select
the following: Country, Carrier, Phone Number, User Name
and Password.

Bluetooth Settings

Shows you the currently paired devices as well as giving you
your typical Bluetooth options to connect, disconnect, set as
favorite, delete and add device. Bluetooth is a registered
trademark of the Bluetooth SIG.

Prioritize Connection
Methods

Choose your connection methods and change them as
needed. You can select to change order and have the system
either always attempt to connect using a USB mobile
broadband or using Wi-Fi.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification
mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Help

E142607
E142626

367

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™

To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Message

Settings

Action and Description

Press the settings icon.

Help
Then select from the following:
System Information

Touchscreen system serial number
Your vehicle identification number (VIN)
Touchscreen system software version
Navigation system version
Map database version
Sirius satellite radio ESN
Gracenote® Database Information and Library version

View Software Licenses

View the licenses for any software and applications installed
on your system.

Driving Restrictions

Certain features are not accessible when your vehicle is
moving.

911 Assist

Turn on and turn off the 911 Assist feature. See Information
(page 395).
In Case of Emergency (ICE) Quick Dial: allows you to save
up to two numbers as ICE contacts for quick access if there
is an emergency. Select Edit to access your phonebook and
then select the desired contacts. The numbers then appear
as options on this screen for the ICE 1 and ICE 2 buttons. The
ICE contacts you select appear at the end of the 911 Assist
call process.

Voice Command List

View categorized lists of voice commands.

You can also access Help using the voice
commands. The system provides
allowable voice commands for the current
mode.

Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice command

help
E142599

368

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
ENTERTAINMENT

A
B

C
D
E

E161892

Message

AM 1 and AM AST

FM 1, FM 2 and FM AST

SIRIUS

USB

BT Stereo

Touch this button to scroll down
for more options, for example
SD Card and A/V In

These buttons change with the
media mode you are in.

Browsing Device Content

Message and Description

When listening to audio on a device, you
can browse through other devices without
having to change sources. For example, if
you are currently listening to audio on an
SD card, you can browse all the artists that
are stored on your USB device.
Browse Within Devices
E142599

Press the voice button and when
prompted say one of the following:
Voice command

Radio memory presets.

Note: Some features may not be available
in your area. Contact an authorized dealer
for more information.

Browse

Browse games

Browse channels

Browse SD card

You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.

Browse Sirius channel guide

369

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
SIRIUS station (for example, "the
Highway"). The following voice commands
are available at the top level of the voice
session no matter which current audio
source you are listening to (for example a
USB device or SIRIUS satellite radio).

Voice command

Browse USB
Help
*

If you only say browse, you can then say
any commands in the following chart.

Note: This is only available when your
MyFord Touch system language is set to
North American English.

These commands are only usable if you
have an active subscription to SIRIUS
satellite radio.

Press the voice button and when
prompted say any of the following:

Browse

Voice command
Voice command

<87.9-107.9>

Games

channels

SD card

Sirius Channel Guide

USB

<530-1710>

AM <530-1710>
FM <87.9-107.9>

Help
*

This command is only usable if you have
an active subscription to SIRIUS satellite
radio.

play [album] [by [artist]]

play [artist]

play [genre]

play [playlist]

play [song | track | title | file]

For more commands in SD card or USB
mode, see the "SD Card and USB Port"
section of this chapter.

Play

The voice system allows you to change
audio sources with a simple voice
command. For example, if you are listening
to music on a USB device, then want to
switch to a satellite radio channel, simply
press the voice button on the steering
wheel controls and say the name of the

Play by

370

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Options

Voice command

Sound Settings

Sirius <0-223>

Sports games

Touch this button to adjust settings
for:

This command is only usable if you have
an active subscription to SIRIUS satellite
radio.

Message

Bass
Midrange

The commands that have [ ] around the
word means that the word is optional. For
example, if you say, "Play Metallica", this
is the same as the voice command, "Play
[artist] ".

Treble
Set Balance and Fade
DSP

AM/FM Radio

Occupancy Mode

Touch the AM or FM tab to listen
to the radio.

Speed Compensated Volume

E142611

To change between AM and FM presets,
just touch the AM or FM tab.

Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.

Memory Presets

Set PTY for Seek/Scan
This allows you to select a category of
music you would like to search for. You can
then choose to either seek or scan for the
stations playing that category.

Save a station by pressing and holding one
of the memory preset areas. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished.

RDS Text Display

HD Radio

This allows you to view the information
broadcast by FM stations.

Touch this button to turn HD Radio on. The
light on the button illuminates when the
feature is on. HD Radio allows you to
receive radio broadcasts digitally, where
available, providing free, crystal-clear
sound. See HD Radio information later in
this chapter.

AST
AST (Autostore) allows you to have the
system automatically store the six
strongest stations in your current location.

Scan

TAG Button

Touch this button to go to the next strong
AM or FM radio station. The light on the
button illuminates when the feature is on.

This feature is available when HD Radio is
on, and allows you to tag a song to
download later. When you select On, TAG
appears on-screen when HD Radio is
active. You can touch TAG to save the
information of the song that is playing.
When you plug in your portable music

371

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
player, the information transfers, if
supported by your device. When you are
connected to iTunes, the tags appear to
remind you of the songs you would like to
download. See HD Radio information later
in this chapter.
Direct Tune
E142616

Touch this button to manually enter the
desired station number. Touch Enter when
you are done.

The HD logo either blinks when acquiring
a digital station, and then stays solid when
digital audio is playing, or is grey when
acquiring a digital station, and then
changes to orange when digital audio is
playing. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.

HD Radio™ Information (If Available)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.

The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
TAG allows you to save a song to
download later when you are on an
acquired HD Radio station and the feature
is on.

When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:

372

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™

To turn the feature on and use it, select AM or FM and the select:
Message

Action and Description

Options
TAG Button
On

When you hear a song you, select:

TAG

The system automatically saves the song's information and
transfers it to your portable music player (if supported) when
you connect it to the system. The system automatically
transfers the tag to your player (if already connected) and a
pop-up confirms the transfer.
When you access iTunes with your portable music player, the
tags appear to you as a reminder. The system allows you to
tag up to approximately 100 songs. For a list of devices that
support tagging, see www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca

When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Message

Action and Description

Scan

Allows you to hear a brief sampling of all available stations.
This feature still works when HD Radio reception is on,
although it does not scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may
see the HD logo appear if the station has a digital broadcast.

Memory presets

Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when finished. When switching to an HD2 or HD3
memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital audio
plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital signal.

Note: As with any saved radio station, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle
is outside the station’s reception area.

373

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues

Reception area

If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the
fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to
weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to the
analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7
multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless
it is able to connect to the digital signal again.

Station blending

When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog
version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio
station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station
quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from
analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.

Cause

Action

Echo, stutter, skip or
This is poor time alignment by No action required. This is a
repeat in audio.
the radio broadcaster.
broadcast issue.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
Sound fading or
blending in and out.

The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.

There is an audio mute
delay when selecting
HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or .

The digital multicast is not
No action required. This is
available until the HD Radio
normal behavior. Wait until the
broadcast is decoded. Once
audio is available.
decoded, the audio is available.

374

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

No action required. The reception issue may clear up as you
continue to drive.

MyFord Touch™
Potential station issues
Issues

Cause

Action

Direct Tune
Cannot access HD2 or
HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a preset
or from a direct tune.

The previously stored multicast No action required. The station
preset or direct tune is not
is not available in your current
available in your current recep- location.
tion area.

Text information does Data service issue by the radio Fill out the station issue form
at http://www.ibiquity.com/
not match currently
broadcaster.
automotive/
playing audio.
report_radio_station_experiences
There is no text
Data service issue by the radio
information shown for broadcaster.
currently selected
frequency.

Fill out the station issue form
at http://www.ibiquity.com/
automotive/
report_radio_station_experiences

HD2-HD7 stations not This selection disables HD2found when you press. HD7 channel search.

No action required. This is
normal behavior.

Scan
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:

Voice command

Radio
Then any of the following:
<87.9-107.9>
<<87.9-107.9> HD>

Radio Voice Commands

<530-1710>
AM

E142599

AM <530-1710>
AM autoset
AM autoset preset <#>

375

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Voice command

Tune

AM preset <#>
Browse

Voice command
2

<530-1710>

<87.9-107.9>

FM <87.9-107.9>

<87.9-107.9> HD <#>

FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>

FM autoset

AM <530-1710>

FM autoset preset <#>

AM autoset

FM preset <#>

AM autoset preset <#>

FM 1

AM preset <#>

FM 1 preset <#>

FM 2

FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>
1

FM autoset

Preset <#>

FM autoset preset <#>

Radio off

FM preset <#>

Radio on

FM 1

Set PTY
Tune

FM <87.9-107.9>

FM 2 preset <#>
HD <#>

FM 1 preset <#>
FM 2

Help

FM 2 preset <#>

If available.

HD <#>

If you have said browse, see the Browse
chart later in this section.

Preset <#>
Help

If you have said tune, see the following
Tune chart.

376

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

If available.

MyFord Touch™
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)

Scan
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling
of channels.
Options

E142611

Touch this button to view and adjust
various media settings.

To turn the feature on press the lower
left corner of the touchscreen, and then
select:

Sound Settings

Message

Touch this button to adjust settings for:

SIRIUS

Message

Memory Presets

Bass

Save a channel by pressing and holding
one of the memory preset areas. There is
a brief mute while the radio saves the
channel. Sound returns when finished.

Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade

ALERT

DSP

Save the current song, artist, or team as a
favorite. The system alerts you when it
plays again on any channel.

Occupancy Mode
Speed Compensated Volume

Replay

Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.

Replay audio on the current channel. You
can replay approximately 45 minutes of
audio as long as you have remained tuned
to the current station. Changing stations
erases the previous audio.

Set Category for Seek/Scan
This allows you to select a category of
music you would like to search for. You can
then choose to either seek or scan for the
stations playing that category.

While in replay mode:
• Press and release the seek buttons to
hear the previous or next song.
• Press and hold the seek buttons to
reverse or fast forward in the current
track.
• Press play or pause to play or pause
the audio.
• Press Replay to return to live audio if
you have been using the feature to
replay audio.

Parental Lockout
This allows you to lock and unlock
channels, change or reset your PIN or
unlock all channels. To use this feature,
you need your initial PIN, which is 1234.

377

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Artist/Title/Team Alerts

Electronic Serial Number (ESN)

This feature allows you to select Artists,
Titles and Teams that you would like the
system to alert you to when they are
playing on other channels. Press Edit Alerts
to delete or turn off alerts. You can also
set all alerts to on or off. When an alert
appears on the screen, you can choose to
Tune to the channel, to Cancel the alert or
to Disable Alerts. If you are listening to a
sporting event, you can save your favorite
teams so that the system can alert you
when they are playing on a satellite radio
channel.

SIRIUS requires this number when
communicating with you about your
account.
Direct Tune
Touch this button to manually enter the
desired satellite channel number. Touch
Enter when you are done.
Browse
Touch this button to view a list of all
available stations. Scroll to see more
categories. Touch the station you want to
listen to.

Note: SIRIUS does not support the Alert
feature on all channels. Ford Motor
Company shall not be responsible for Alert
feature variation.
You can also select:
Message

Action and Description

Skip

Touch this button if you want to skip this channel.

Lock

Touch this button if you do not want anyone to listen to this
channel.

Title

Touch this button to see song and artists on other stations.

Artist

Touch this button to see song and artists on other stations.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.

378

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)
E142593

You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. The ESN
is on the System Information Screen (SR
ESN:XXXXXXXXXXXX).

SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SIRIUS satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
that begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.

To access your ESN, touch the bottom
left corner of the touchscreen, then
select:
Message

SIRIUS

For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, and
other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at
1-888-539-7474.

Options

SIRIUS Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues

Antenna obstructions

For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear
of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.

Terrain

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

Station overload

When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower,
a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.

Satellite radio signal
interference

Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute.

379

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™

Troubleshooting tips
Message

Acquiring…

Cause

Action

Radio requires more than two
seconds to produce audio for
the selected channel.

Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module or
system failure present.
SIRIUS system failure

Invalid Channel

No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
If this message does not clear
shortly, or with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized
dealer for service.

The channel is no longer avail- Tune to another channel or
able.
choose another preset.

Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not
include this channel.

Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-5397474 to subscribe to the
channel, or tune to another
channel.

No Signal

The signal is lost from the
The signal is blocked. When
SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS
you move into an open area,
tower to your vehicle antenna. the signal should return.

Updating…

Update of channel programming in progress.

No action required. The
process may take up to three
minutes.

Questions? Call

Your satellite service is no
longer available.

Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-5397474 to resolve subscription
issues.

1-888-539-7474
None found
Check Channel Guide

All the channels in the selected Use the channel guide to turn
category are either skipped or off the Lock or Skip function on
locked.
that station.

Subscription Updated SIRIUS has updated the chan- No action required.
nels available for your vehicle.
If you are not listening to SIRIUS satellite
radio, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say "", then any of the following
commands.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio Voice
Commands
If you are listening to SIRIUS
satellite radio, press the voice
button on the steering wheel
controls. When prompted, say any of the
following commands.
E142599

380

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™

Press the voice button and when
prompted say:

Sports Game
Voice command

Voice command

Tune to the game

SIRIUS

Tune to the game

Then any of the following:

Tune to the
game

Preset <#>

Tune to the game

SAT

Help

SAT preset <#>

Tune

SAT 1

Voice command

SAT 1 preset <#>

SAT 2

Preset <#>

SAT 2 preset <#>

SAT

SAT 3

SAT 1

SAT 3 preset <#>

SAT 1 preset <#>

Sirius <0-223>

SAT 2

Sirius off

SAT 2 preset <#>

Sirius on

SAT 3

Sports game

Tune

SAT 3 preset <#>
Sirius <0-223>
Help

Help
*

If you have said, sports game, see the
following Sports game chart.

SD Card Slot and USB Port
The SD card slot and USB port are located
in the Media Hub. See Media Hub (page
298).

If you have said, tune, see the following
Tune chart.

381

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
USB Port

SD Card
Note: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded.
To remove the SD card, press the card in
and the system ejects it. Do not attempt to
pull the card to remove it as this could cause
damage.
Note: The navigation system also uses this
card slot. See Navigation (page 405).

E142621

The USB ports are located either in the
center console or behind a small access
door in the instrument panel. To access
and play music from your device, press the
lower left corner of the touchscreen.
This feature allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature.

E142619

The SD card slot is located either in the
center console or behind a small access
door in the instrument panel. To access
and play music from your device, press the
lower left corner of the touchscreen.

In order to playback video from your iPod
or iPhone, you must have a special
combination USB/RCA composite video
cable (which you can buy from Apple).
When you connect the cable to your iPod
or iPhone, plug the other end into both the
RCA jacks and the USB port.
Playing Music from Your Device
Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 30,000 songs.

E142620

SD logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
E142611

Insert your device and select:
Message

USB
SD Card
Repeat

Action and Description

Once the system recognizes your USB or SD card you can
then select from the following options:
This feature replays the currently playing song or album.

382

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Message

Action and Description

Shuffle

Touch this button to play music on the selected album or
folder in random order.

Similar Music

This feature allows you to choose music similar to what is
currently playing.

More Info

Touch this button to see disc information, for example current
track, artist name, album and genre.

Options

Touch this button to view and adjust various media settings.

Sound
Sound settings allows you to adjust settings for:
Message

Action and Description

Bass
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
DSP
Occupancy Mode
Speed Compensated
Volume
Media Player Settings

Allows you to select more settings, which is under Media
Player. See Settings (page 356).

Device Information

Displays software and firmware information about the
currently connected media device.

Update Media Index

Indexes your device when you connect it for the first time and
each time the content changes (for example adding or
removing tracks) to make sure you have the latest voice
commands available for all media on the device.

Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.

383

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Browse

artist or album.

This feature allows you to view the
contents of the device. It also allows you
to search by categories, for example genre,

If you want to view song information, for
example Title, Artist, File, Folder, Album,
and Genre, touch the on-screen album art.

You can also select:
Message

What’s Playing

Action and Description

To hear how the system pronounces the current band and
song. This can be helpful when using voice commands to
make sure the system correctly plays your request.
Voice command

Playing Video from Your Device
play [artist]

To access and play video from your device,
your vehicle's transmission must be in park
(P) with the ignition in accessory mode.
See Starting and Stopping the Engine
(page 104).

Play audiobook
Play author
Play composer

USB and SD Card Voice Commands

Play folder
play [genre]

E142599

Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice command

Play music video

play [playlist]

(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3
[player])

Play podcast
Play podcast episode

SD card

[play] (similar music | more
like this)

Then any of the following:
Browse

Play movie

play [song | track | title | file]

[play] next track

Play TV show

pause

Play TV show episode

Play video podcast

play
play [album] [by [artist]]
play all

384

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Voice command

Voice command

Play video podcast episode

Play video playlist

[play] previous track

All movies

All music videos

repeat [all | folder | track |
song] off

All playlists

Repeat off

All songs

Repeat one

All TV shows

All video playlists

All video podcasts

What's this?

All videos

Help

Artist

All podcasts

shuffle [all] [on]
Shuffle album
shuffle off

If you have said you would like to browse
your USB or SD card, the system prompts
you to specify what you would like to
browse. See the following Browse chart.

Audiobook
Author
Composer

These commands are only available in
USB mode and are device-dependent.

Folder
Genre

Browse

Playlist

Voice command

Podcast

Album

TV show

All artists

Video

All audiobooks

Video playlist

All authors

Video podcast

All albums

All composers

Help

All folders

This command is only available in USB
mode and is device-dependent.

All genres

385

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Supported Media Players, Formats
and Metadata Information

Press the voice button and when
prompted say:

SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player, including iPod,
Zune™, plays from device players, and
most USB drives. Supported audio formats
include MP3, WMA, WAV and AAC.

Voice command

Next song
play

It is also able to organize your indexed
media from your playing device by
metadata tags. Metadata tags, which are
descriptive software identifiers embedded
in the media files, provide information
about the file.

pause
[play] previous track

A/V Inputs

If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.

WARNINGS
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any handheld device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

Bluetooth Audio
The system allows you to stream audio
over your vehicle's speakers from your
connected, Bluetooth-enabled cell phone.

For safety reasons, do not connect
or adjust the settings on your
portable music player while your
vehicle is moving.
Store the portable music player in a
secure location, for example the
center console or the glove box,
when your vehicle is moving. Hard objects
may become projectiles in a crash or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk
of serious injury. The audio extension cable
must be long enough to allow the portable
music player to be safely stored while your
vehicle is moving.

E142611

To access, press the lower left corner
on the touchscreen, then select:
Message

BT Stereo
Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands

E142599

386

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
3. Press the lower left corner on the
touchscreen. Select a tuned FM station.
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Turn the portable music player on and
adjust the volume to ½ the maximum.
6. Press the lower left corner on the
touchscreen. Select the A/V In tab.
(You should hear audio from your
portable music player although it may
be low.)
7. Adjust the sound on your portable
music player until it reaches the level
of the FM station by switching back and
forth between the controls.

E142622

The A/V inputs allow you to connect an
auxiliary audio/video source (for example
gaming systems or a personal camcorder)
by connecting RCA cords (not included)
to these input jacks. The jacks are yellow,
red and white and are located either
behind a small access door on the
instrument panel or in your center console.

You can also use the A/V inputs as an
auxiliary input jack to play music from your
portable music player over your vehicle's
speakers. Plug in your 1/8 inch (3.5
millimeter) RCA adapter into the two left
A/V input jacks (red and white).

Troubleshooting
•

Press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen, and then select A/V In.
To use the auxiliary input jack feature,
make sure that your portable music player
is designed for use with headphones and
that it is fully charged. You also need an
audio extension cable with stereo male
1/8-inch (3.5 millimeter) connectors at one
end and a RCA jack at the other.

•

Switch off the engine, radio and
portable music player. Set the parking
brake and put the transmission in park
(P).
2. Attach one end of the audio extension
cable to the headphone output of your
player and the other end into the
adapter in one of the two left A/V input
jacks (white or red) inside the center
console.

•

387

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Do not connect the audio input jack to
a line level output. The jack only works
correctly with devices that have a
headphone output with a volume
control.
Do not set the portable music player's
volume level higher than is necessary
to match the volume of the FM radio
as this causes distortion and reduces
sound quality.
If the music sounds distorted at lower
listening levels, turn the portable music
player volume down. If the problem
persists, replace or recharge the
batteries in the portable media player.
Control the portable media player in
the same manner when used with
headphones, as the auxiliary input jack
does not provide control (for example
Play or Pause) over the attached
portable media player.

MyFord Touch™
PHONE

A
B
C
D
E
F
E161968

Item

•
•
•
•
•

Message

Phone

Quick Dial

Phonebook

History

Messaging

Settings

Using privacy mode.
Dialing a number.
Redialing.
Call waiting notification.
Caller ID.

Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are cell phone-dependent
features. To check your cell phone’s
compatibility, see your cell phone’s user
manual and visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.

Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC®. Once you pair your cell
phone, you can access many options using
the touchscreen or voice commands. While
the system supports a variety of features,
many are dependent on your cell phone’s
functionality.
At a minimum, most cell phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.

388

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the
First Time

The first thing you must do to use the
phone features of SYNC is to pair your
Bluetooth-enabled cell phone with SYNC.
This allows you to use your cell phone in a
hands-free manner.

WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

Note: Put the transmission in position P.
Turn on your vehicle ignition and the radio.

Touch the upper left corner of the touchscreen:
Message

Action and Description

Add phone
Find SYNC

Follow the on-screen instructions.
Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cell phone
is in the correct mode. See your cell phone’s manual if
necessary.
Select SYNC and a six-digit PIN appears on your device.
If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does not
support Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN
displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the next step.
When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm that
the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your
cell phone.
The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. For
more information on your cell phone's capability, see your
cell phone's manual and visit the website.
Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and
that your cell phone is in the correct mode.
See your device's manual if necessary.

Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones
Note: Move the gearshift lever to park (P).
Switch your vehicle ignition and the radio
on.

389

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™

To pair a subsequent cell phone, select:
Message

Action and Description

Phone
Settings
Select BT Device
Add Device

Select SYNC and a six-digit PIN appears on your device.
If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does not
support Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN
displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the next step.
When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm that
the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your
cell phone.
The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. For
more information on your cell phone's capability, see your
cell phone's manual and visit the website.

Making Calls
To accept the call, select:

E142599

Message

Press the voice button and when
prompted say:

Accept
Note: You can also accept the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.

Voice command

call [[a] name]
dial [[a] number]
To end the call or exit phone
mode, press and hold the phone
button.

To reject the call, select:
Message

Receiving Calls

Reject

During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Call information appears in the
display if it is available.

Note: You can also reject the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.

390

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC logs
it as a missed call.

To turn on contact picture settings, if
your device supports this feature,
select:

Phone Menu Options
Press the top left corner on the
touchscreen to select from the following
options:

Phone

Settings

Message

Manage Phonebook

Touch this button to access the
on-screen numerical pad to enter a
number and place a call. During an
active call, you can also choose to:

Display Photos from Phonebook
On

Message

Privacy

Certain smartphones may support
transferring street addresses when listed
with phonebook contact information. If
your cell phone supports this feature, you
can select and use these addresses as
destinations and save them as favorites.

Join Calls

History

End

After you connect your Bluetooth-enabled
cell phone to SYNC, you can access any
previously dialed, received or missed calls.
You can also choose to save these to your
Favorites or to Quick Dial.

Mute Call
Hold Call

Quick Dial
Select and call contacts stored in your
phonebook contacts and call history folder.

Note: This is a cell phone-dependent
feature. If your cell phone does not support
downloading call history using Bluetooth,
SYNC keeps track of calls made with the
SYNC system.

Phonebook
Touch this button to access and call any
contacts in your previously downloaded
phonebook. The system places the entries
in alphabetical categories summarized at
the top of the screen.

Messaging
Send text messages using the touchscreen.
See Text messaging later in this section.
Settings
Touch this button to access various phone
settings, for example turning Bluetooth on
and off, managing your phonebook and
more. See Phone settings later in this
section.

391

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Text Messaging

Message

Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.

Listen (speaker icon)

Note: Certain features in text messaging
are speed-dependent and not available
when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
3.1 mph (5 km/h).

Send Text

Dial

View
Delete

Note: SYNC does not download read text
messages from your cell phone.

Composing a Text Message

You can send and receive text messages
using Bluetooth, read them aloud and
translate text messaging acronyms, for
example LOL.

Note: This is a speed-dependent feature.
It is unavailable when your vehicle is
traveling at speeds over 3.1 mph (5 km/h).
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.

Touch the top left corner of the display,
then select:
Message

Phone
Messaging
Then any of the following:
To compose and send a text message, select:
Message

Action and Description

Phone
Messaging
Send Text

Enter a cell phone number or choose from your phonebook.

Edit Text

Allows you to customize the pre-defined message or create
a message on your own.

Send

Sends the message as it is.

You can then preview the message, verify
the recipient as well as update the
message list.

392

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Message

Text Message Options
Stuck in traffic.

Message

Call me later.

I’ll call you back in a few minutes.

LOL

I just left, I’ll be there soon.
Can you give me a call?

Receiving a Text Message

I’m on my way.

Note: If you select View and your vehicle is
traveling over 3.1 mph (5 km/h), the system
offers to read the message to you instead
of allowing you to view it while driving.

I’m running a few minutes late.
I’m ahead of schedule, so I’ll be there
early.

When a new message arrives, an
audible tone sounds and the screen
displays a pop-up with the caller name
and ID, if supported by your cell phone.
You can select:

I’m outside.
I’ll call you when I get there.
OK

Message

Yes
No
Thanks

Action and Description

View

To view the text message.

Listen

For SYNC to read the
message to you.

Dial

To call the contact.

Ignore

To exit the screen.

Phone Settings
To enter the phone settings menu select:
Message

Action and Description

Phone
Settings
Then any of the
following:
Bluetooth Devices

Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as save
it as a favorite.

Bluetooth

To turn Bluetooth off or on.

393

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Message

Action and Description

Do Not Disturb

If you want all calls to go directly to your voicemail and not
ring in the vehicle. When this feature is on, text message
notifications do not ring inside the cabin either.

911 Assist

Turn the 911 Assist feature on and off. See Information
(page 395).

Phone Ringer

Select the ring tone you want to hear when you receive a call.
Choose from possible system ring tones, your currently paired
cell phone’s ring tone, a beep, text-to-speech or a silent
notification.

Text Message Notification

Select a text message notification, if supported by your cell
phone. Choose from possible system alert tones, text-tospeech or silent.

Internet Data Connection If your cell phone is compatible, use this screen to adjust your
internet data connection. Select to make your connection
profile with the personal area network or to turn off your
connection. You can also choose to adjust your settings or
have the system always connect, never connect when
roaming or query on connect. Press ? for more information.
Manage Phonebook

To access features such as automatic phonebook download,
re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your cell
phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook.

Roaming Warning

To have the system alert you when your cell phone is in
roaming mode.
Voice command

Phone Voice Commands

Call voicemail
dial [[a] number]

E142599

(do not disturb off | disturb me)

Press the voice button and when
prompted say any of the following:

do not disturb [on]
forward (text | [text] message)

Voice command

call [[a] name]

(go to hands free | transfer to car)

call ( | []
)

(hold call off | take call off hold)

call ( | []
)

(hold call [on] | place call on hold)

394

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Voice command

join (call | calls)

Voice command

(mute [call] off | Unmute [call])

(listen to | read) [[text] message |
line] [number]

Help
1

These commands are only available
during an active call.

(listen to | read) ([text] message)
[text] (messages | message)

mute call [on]

If you say messages, see the following
additional commands.
Voice command

(pair ([Bluetooth] device | phone |
Bluetooth audio) | add [a] phone)
([go to] privacy [on] | transfer to
phone)

call [[a] name]
forward (text | [text] message)

reply to (text | [text] message)

(listen to | read) [[text] message | line]
[number]

(turn ringer off | silent mode [on])

(listen to | read) ([text] message)

(turn ringer on | silent mode off)

reply to (text | [text] message)
Help

INFORMATION

E188418

395

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™

Item

Note: This feature does not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Make sure
your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID
before using SYNC Services.

Message

SYNC Services

Travel Link

Alerts

Calendar

Apps

Where Am I?

Note: The driver is ultimately responsible
for the safe operation of the vehicle, and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe
to follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features provided are only an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your
observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be
placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would
be directed into an area that you consider
unsafe. Maps used by this system may be
inaccurate because of errors, changes in
roads, traffic conditions or driving
conditions.

If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, press the
E142608
Information button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, press the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.

SYNC Services (If Equipped,
United States Only)

396

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions

Connecting to SYNC Services Using
Voice Commands

When connected to SYNC Services,
say "Directions" or "Business search".
To find the closest business or type of
business to your current location, just
say "Business search" and then
"Search near me". If you need further
assistance in finding a location you can
say "Operator" at any time within a
Directions or Business search to speak
with a live operator. The system may
prompt you to speak with an operator
when it has difficulty matching your
voice request. The live operator can
assist you by searching for businesses
by name or by category, residential
addresses by street address or by
name or specific street intersections.
Operator Assist is a feature of your
SYNC Services subscription. For more
information on Operator Assist, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select your
Destination. After the route download
is finished, the phone call automatically
ends.

E142599

1. Press the voice button.
2. When prompted, say "Services". This
initiates an outgoing call to SYNC
Services using your paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular
phone.
3. Once you connect to the service, follow
the voice prompts to request the
desired service, such as "Traffic" or
"Directions". You can also say, "What
are my choices?" to receive a list of
available services from which to
choose.
4. Say, "Services" to return to the Services
main menu or for help, say, "Help".
Connecting to SYNC Services Using
the Touchscreen

E142608

If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, press the
Information button.

If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation:
• Turn-by-turn directions appear in the
information display, in the status bar
of your touchscreen system and on the
SYNC Services screen. You also receive
driving instructions from audible
prompts.
• When on an active route, you can
select Route Summary or Route
Status using the touchscreen controls
or voice commands to view the Route
Summary Turn List or the Route
Status ETA. You can also turn voice
guidance on or off, cancel the route or
update the route.

If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation, press the green tab on your
touchscreen.
Select Connect to Services to initiate
an outgoing call to SYNC Services
using your phone.
2. Once connected, follow the voice
prompts to request your desired
Service, such as "Traffic" or
"Directions". You can also say, "What
are my choices?" to receive a list of
available services from which to
choose.
3. Say, "Services" to return to the Services
main menu or for help, say, "Help".
1.

397

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks
if you want the route updated. Just say,
"Yes" when prompted and the system
delivers a new route to your vehicle.

Tips

Lions, or a news
category. You can
learn more about
personalization by
logging onto
www.SYNCMyRide.com.

If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation,
SYNC Services downloads your requested
destination to the navigation system. The
navigation system then calculates the
route and provides driving instructions.
See Navigation (page 405).

Push to interrupt

Press the voice
button at any time
(while connected
to SYNC Services)
to interrupt a voice
prompt or an audio
clip (such as a
sports report) and
say your voice
command.

Portable

Your subscription is
associated with
your Bluetoothenabled cellular
phone number, not
your VIN (Vehicle
Identification
Number). You can
pair and connect
your phone to any
vehicle equipped
with SYNC Services
and continue
enjoying your
personalized
services.

Disconnecting from SYNC Services
1.

Press and hold the hang-up phone
button on the steering wheel.
2. Say "Good-bye" from the SYNC
Services main menu.
SYNC Services Quick Tips
Tips

Personalizing

You can personalize your Services
feature to provide
quicker access to
your most used or
favorite information. You can save
address points,
such as work or
home. You can also
save favorite
information like
sports teams, for
example Detroit

SYNC Services Voice Commands
When a route has been
downloaded (non-navigation
E142599
systems), press the voice button
on the steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the following
commands:

398

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the Sirius
Travel Link services or its use in vehicles.

Services
Voice command

When you subscribe to Sirius Travel Link,
it can help you locate the best gas prices,
find movie listings, get current traffic alerts,
view the current weather map, get
accurate ski conditions and see scores to
current sports games.

Cancel route
Navigation voice off
Navigation voice on
Route status

If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I
E142608
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.

Route summary
Update route
Help

Sirius Travel Link (If Equipped)

Traffic On Route and Traffic Nearby
Touch these buttons to identify traffic
incidents on your route, nearby your
vehicle’s current location or near any of
your favorite places, if programmed.

Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view fuel prices at
stations close to your vehicle’s location or
on an active navigation route.
Movie Listings
Touch this button to view nearby movie
theaters and their show times, if available.
Weather

Note: In order to use Sirius Travel Link, your
vehicle must be equipped with navigation
and your navigation SD card must be in the
SD card slot.

Touch this button to view the nearby
weather, current weather, or the five day
forecast for the chosen area. Select Map
to see the weather map, which can show
storms, radar information, charts and
winds. Select Area to select from a listing
of weather locations.

Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by Sirius Travel Link.

399

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Sports Info
Touch this button to view scores and
schedules from a variety of sports. You can
also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes
when a game is in progress.

Sports-Related Commands
Voice command

Baseball
College basketball

Ski Conditions

College football

Touch this button to view ski conditions
for a specific area.

Golf
MLS

Sirius Travel Link Voice Commands

My teams

Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
E142599
prompted, say any of the
following commands:

NBA
NFL
NHL

Sirius Travel Link

WNBA

Voice command

Help

5-day weather forecast

Additional Sports-Related Voice
Commands

Fuel prices
Movie listings

Voice command

Sports headlines

Sports schedules

Sports scores

Baseball headlines
Baseball schedule
Baseball scores

Traffic

College basketball headlines

Weather

College basketball schedule

Weather map

College basketball scores

Help

College football headlines
College football schedule

If you say "Sports headlines", "Sports
schedules" or "Sports scores", you can
then say any of the commands in the
following chart.

College football scores
Golf headlines
Golf leaderboard
Golf schedule

400

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Voice command

Press Alerts, and then choose from any
of the following services:

MLS headlines

Message

MLS schedule

Action and Description

MLS scores

View

The complete message

Motor sports headlines

Delete

The message

Motor sports order

Delete All

Messages

Motor sports schedule

This screen displays any system messages
(such as an SD card fault).

My team headlines

Note: The system alerts you to any
messages by turning the information icon
yellow. After you read or delete the
messages, the icon returns to white.

My teams schedule
My teams scores
NBA headlines

Calendar

NBA schedule

If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.

NBA scores

E142608

NFL headlines
NFL schedule
NFL scores
NHL headlines

Press Calendar. You can view the current
calendar by day, week or month.

NHL schedule

911 Assist (If Equipped)

NHL scores

WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
dial for help, which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.

WNBA headlines
WNBA schedule
WNBA scores
Help

Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time, which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.

Alerts
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I
E142608
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.

401

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Setting 911 Assist On

WARNINGS
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or damaged in
a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious
injury to someone or damage the phone,
which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.

E142608

If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I (Information)
button to access these features. If your
vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab. Then
select:

Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.

Message

Apps
Emergency Assistance

Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is turned off, either a voice
message plays or a display message (or
icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle
is started after a previously paired phone
connects.

E142607

Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.

You can also access 911 Assist by
pressing the Setting icon and then
selecting:
Message

If a crash deploys an airbag, excluding knee
airbags and rear inflatable safety belts
where fitted or activates the fuel pump
shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may
be able to contact emergency services by
dialing 911 through a paired and connected
Bluetooth-enabled phone. You can learn
more about the 911 Assist feature, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.

Settings
Phone
Emergency Assistance
You can also select:
Help
Emergency Assistance

See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 32). Important information
regarding airbag deployment is in this
chapter.

To make sure that 911 Assist works
properly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
prior to the incident.

See Roadside Emergencies (page 175).
Important information regarding the fuel
pump shut-off is in this chapter.

402

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
•

•

You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
phone to SYNC.
A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the United States,
Canada or in a territory in which 911 is
the emergency number.

911 Assist May Not Work If:
•
•
•

Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
The phones(s) previously paired or
connected to the system are thrown
from the vehicle.

In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off (which would
trigger 911 Assist); however, SYNC tries to
contact emergency services if 911 Assist
triggers. If a connected phone sustains
damage or loses connection to SYNC,
SYNC searches for, and tries to connect
to, any available previously paired phone
and tries to make the call to 911.

Vehicle Health Report

Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(approximately 10 seconds) to cancel
the call. If you fail to cancel the call,
SYNC attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."

WARNING
Always follow scheduled
maintenance instructions, regularly
inspect your vehicle, and seek repair
for any damage or problem you suspect.
Vehicle Health Report supplements, but
cannot replace, normal maintenance and
vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Report
only monitors certain systems
electronically monitored by your vehicle
and will not monitor or report the status
of any other system, (such as brake lining
wear). Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance and regularly inspect your
vehicle may result in vehicle damage and
serious injury.

If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.

Note: This feature is only available in the
United States.

403

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature
requires activation prior to use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There
is no fee or subscription associated with
Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature.

If you want to run a report by using the
touchscreen, select:
Message

Apps

Note: This feature may not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Before
running a report, review the Vehicle Health
Report Privacy Notice.

Vehicle Health Report
You can also run a vehicle health
report by voice command.
E142599

Note: In order to allow a break-in period for
your vehicle, you may not be able to create
a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle
odometer has reached 200 miles.

Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice command

Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may
apply when making a report.

Vehicle Health Report

Register for Vehicle Health Report and set
your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering,
you can request a Vehicle Health Report
(inside your vehicle). Return to your
account at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view
your report. You can also choose for SYNC
to remind you automatically to run reports
at specific mileage intervals. Cellular phone
airtime usage may apply when reporting.

Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you create a Vehicle Health Report,
Ford Motor Company may collect your
cellular phone number (to process your
report request) and diagnostic information
about your vehicle. Certain versions or
updates to Vehicle Health Report may also
collect more vehicle information. Ford may
use your vehicle information it collects for
any purpose. If you do not want to disclose
your cellular phone number or vehicle
information, do not run the feature or set
up your Vehicle Health Report profile at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. See
www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health
Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy
Statement) for more information.

The system allows you to check your
vehicle’s overall health in the form of a
diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health
Report contains valuable information, for
example:
• Vehicle diagnostic information.
• Scheduled maintenance.
• Open recalls and Field Service Actions.
• Items noted during vehicle inspections
by your authorized dealer that still need
servicing.
Making a Report

E142608

404

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Where Am I?

Setting a Destination

For information about your current
location, select:

Press the green corner of your touchscreen,
then the Dest button when it appears.
Choose any of the following:

Message

Where Am I?

Action and Description

Destination

View your vehicle's
current location, if
your vehicle is
equipped with
navigation. If your
vehicle is not
equipped with
navigation, nothing
displays.

Message

My Home
Favorites
Previous Destinations
Point of Interest
Emergency
Street Address

NAVIGATION

Intersection
Note: The navigation SD card must be in
the SD card slot to operate the navigation
system. If you need a replacement SD card,
see an authorized dealer.

City Center
Map
Edit Route

Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded. To
remove the SD card, just push the card in
and release it. Do not attempt to pull the
card out to remove it; this could cause
damage.

Cancel Route
1.

Enter the necessary information into
the highlighted text fields (in any
order). For address destination entry,
the Go! button appears once you enter
all the necessary information. Pressing
the Go! button makes the address
location appear on the map. If you
choose Previous Destination, the last
20 destinations you have selected
appear.
2. Select Set as Dest to make this your
destination. You can also choose to set
this as a waypoint (have the system
route to this point on the way to your
current destination) or save it as a
favorite. The system considers any
Avoid Areas selections in its route
calculation.

Your navigation system is comprised of
two main features, destination mode and
map mode.
To set a destination, press the green corner
of your touchscreen, then the Dest button
when it appears. See Setting a
Destination later in this chapter.
To view the navigation map and your
vehicle's current location, touch the green
bar in the upper right-hand corner of the
touchscreen, or, press Dest, then Map. See
Map mode later in this chapter.

405

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
3. Choose from up to three different types
of routes, and then select Start Route.
• Fastest: Uses the fastest moving roads
possible.
• Shortest: Uses the shortest distance
possible.
• Eco Route: Uses the most fuel-efficient
route.

Message

Health & Medicine
Automotive
Shopping
Entertainment & Arts
Recreation & Sports

You can cancel the route or have the
system demo the route for you. Select
Route Prefs to set route preferences like
avoiding freeways, tollroads, ferries and
car trains as well as to use or not use
high-occupancy vehicle lanes.
(High-occupancy vehicle lanes are also
known as carpool or diamond lanes.
People who ride in buses, vanpools or
carpools use these lanes.)

Government
Domestic Services
Subcategories
Message

Restaurant
Golf

Note: If your vehicle is on a recognized road
and you do not press the Start Route
button, the system defaults to the Fastest
Route option and begins guidance.

Parking
Home & Garden

During route guidance, you can press the
talking bubble icon that appears in the
upper right navigation corner (green bar)
if you want the system to repeat route
guidance information. When the system
repeats the last guidance instruction, it
updates the distance to the next guidance
instruction, since it detects when the
vehicle is moving.

Personal Care Services
Auto Dealership
Govt Office
Public Transit
Education

Point of Interest (POI) Categories

To expand these listings, press the + in
front of the listing.

Main categories

The system also allows you to sort
alphabetically, by distance or by cityseekr
listings (if available).

Message

Food/Drink & Dining

cityseekr

Travel & Transportation

Note: cityseekr point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 912
cities (881 in the United States, 20 in
Canada and 11 in Mexico).

Financial
Emergency
Community

406

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Attraction

E142639

This icon appears when your
selection exists in multiple
categories within the system.
E142634

E142640

cityseekr, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.

When you are viewing more
information for hotels, cityseekr also
tells you if the hotel has certain
services and facilities using icons, such
as:

When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such
as address and phone number. If cityseekr
lists the point of interest, more information
is available, such as a brief description,
check-in and checkout times or restaurant
hours.

Subcategories
Message

Restaurant
Business center

Press More Information for a longer
review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price as well as the
website. This screen displays the point of
interest icon such as:

Handicap facilities
Laundry
Refrigerator

Hotel

24 hour room service
Fitness center
E143884

Internet access

Coffeehouse

Pool
Wi-fi

E142636

Food & Drink

For restaurants, cityseekr can provide
information such as star rating, average
cost, review, handicap access, hours of
operation, and website address.

E142637

Nightlife

For hotels, cityseekr can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address.

E142638

407

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Eco Time Penalty

Setting Your Navigation
Preferences

Select a low, medium or high cost for the
calculated Eco Route. The higher the
setting, the longer the time allotment is for
the route.

Select settings for the system to take into
account when planning your route.
Press the Settings icon >
Settings > Navigation.

Avoid

E142607

These features allow you to choose to
have the system avoid freeways, toll roads,
ferries and car trains when planning your
route. Switch these features ON or OFF.

Map Preferences
Breadcrumbs
Display your vehicle’s previously traveled
route with white dots. Switch this feature
ON or OFF.

Use HOV Lanes
Have the system use high-occupancy
vehicle lanes, if available, when planning
your route.

Turn List Format
Have the system display your turn list Top
to Bottom or Bottom to Top.

Navigation Preferences
Guidance Prompts

Parking POI Notification

Have the system use Voice & Tones or
Tone Only on your programmed route.

Set the automatic parking point of interest
notification. Switch this feature ON or OFF.
When parking point of interest notification
is on, the icons display on the map when
you get close to your destination. This may
not be very useful in dense areas, and may
clutter the map when other points of
interest display.

Auto - Fill State/Province
Have the system automatically fill in the
state and province based on the
information already entered into the
system. Switch this feature ON or OFF.

Route Preferences

Traffic Preferences

Preferred Route

Avoid Traffic Problems

Choose to have the system display the
Shortest, Fastest or most Ecological route
first. If you set Always Use Preferred
Route to Yes, the system uses the
selected route type to calculate only one
route to the desired destination.

Choose how you want the system to
handle traffic problems along your route.
• Automatic: Have the system reroute
you to avoid traffic incidents that
develop and impact the current route.
The system does not provide a traffic
alert notification.
• Manual: Have the system always
provide a traffic alert notification for
traffic incidents along the planned
route. You have a choice to accept or
ignore the notification before making
the route deviation.

Always Use Preferred Route
Bypass route selection in destination
programming. The system only calculates
one route based on preferred route setting.

408

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Traffic Alert Notification
Have the system display traffic alert
notifications.
Other traffic alert features allows you to
turn on certain, or all, traffic icons on the
map such as road work, incident, accidents
and closed roads. Scroll down to view all
the different types of alerts. Switch these
features ON or OFF.
Avoid Areas

E174016

Change the appearance of the map display
by repeatedly pressing the arrow button in
the upper left corner of the screen. It
toggles between three different map
modes: Heading up, North up and 3D.

Choose areas which you want the system
to avoid when calculating a route for you.
Press Add to program an entry. Once you
make a selection, the system tries to avoid
the area(s) if possible for all routes. To
delete a selection, choose the listing on
the screen. When the screen changes to
Avoid Areas Edit, you can press Delete
at the bottom right of the screen.

Heading up (2D map) always
shows the direction of forward
travel to be upward on the screen.
E142642
This view is available for map
scales up to 2.5 miles (4 kilometers). The
system remembers this setting for larger
map scales, but shows the map in North
up only. If the scale returns below this level,
the system restores Heading up.

Map Mode
Press the green bar in the upper right area
of the touchscreen to view map mode. Map
mode shows advanced viewing comprised
of both 2D city maps as well as 3D
landmarks (when available).
2D city maps show detailed outlines of
buildings, visible land use and land
elements and detailed railway
infrastructure for the most essential cities
around the globe. These maps also contain
features, such as town blocks, building
footprints and railways.

E142643

North up (2D map) always shows
the northern direction to be
upward on the screen.

3D map mode provides an
elevated perspective of the map.
This viewing angle can be adjusted
E142644
and the map can be rotated 180
degrees by touching the map twice, and
then dragging your finger along the shaded
bar with arrows at the bottom of the map.

3D landmarks appear as clear, visible
objects that are typically recognizable and
have a certain tourist value. The 3D
landmarks appear in 3D map mode only.
Coverage varies and improves with
updated map releases.

View switches between full map, street
list and exit view in route guidance.
Menu displays a pop-up box that allows
direct access to navigation settings,
View/Edit Route, SIRIUS Travel Link,
Guidance Mute and Cancel Route.

409

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Press the speaker button on the
map to mute route guidance.
E174017
When the light on the button
illuminates, the feature is on. The speaker
button appears on the map only when
route guidance is active.

Scroll cursor allows you to scroll
the map; the fixed icon is in the
center of the screen. The map
E142647
position closest to the cursor is in
a window on the top center part of the
screen.

Re-center the map by pressing
this icon whenever you scroll the
E146188
map away from your vehicle’s
current location.

Address book entry default
icon(s) indicates the location on
the map of an address book entry.
E142648
This is the default symbol shown
after the entry has been stored to the
Address Book by any method other than
the map. You can select from any of the
22 icons available. You can use each icon
more than once.

Auto Zoom
Press the green bar to access map mode,
then select the + or - zoom button to bring
up the zoom level and Auto buttons on the
touchscreen. When you press Auto, Auto
Zoom turns on and Auto displays in the
bottom left corner of the screen in the map
scale. The map zoom level then
synchronizes with vehicle speed. The
slower your vehicle is traveling, the farther
the map zooms in; the faster your vehicle
is traveling, the farther the map zooms out.
To switch off the feature, just press the +
or - button again.

Home indicates the location on
the map currently stored as the
home position. You can only save
E142649
one address from the Address
Book as your Home entry. You cannot
change this icon.
POI (Point Of Interest) icons
indicate locations of any point of
interest categories you choose to
E142650
display on the map. You can
choose to display three point of interest
categories on the map at one time.

In 3D mode, rotate the map view by
swiping your finger across the shaded bar
with the arrows.

Starting point indicates the
starting point of a planned route.

The ETA box under the zoom buttons
appears when a route is active and
displays the distance and time to your
destination. If the button is pressed, a pop
up appears with the destination listed (and
waypoint if applicable) along with mileage
and time to destination. You may also
select to have either the estimated time
to reach your destination or your estimated
arrival time.

E142651

Waypoint indicates the location
of a waypoint on the map. The
number inside the circle is different
E142652
for each waypoint and represents
the position of the waypoint in the route
list.
Destination symbol indicates the
ending point of a planned route.

Map Icons

E142646

Vehicle mark shows the current
location of your vehicle. It stays
in the center of the map display,
except when in scroll mode.

E142653

E142654

410

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Next maneuver point indicates
the location of the next turn on the
planned route.

MyFord Touch™
View/Edit Route When a Route is
Active

No GPS symbol indicates that
insufficient GPS satellite signals
are available for accurate map
E142655
positioning. This icon may display
under normal operation in an area with
poor GPS access.

Subcategories
Message

View Route

Quick-touch Buttons

Edit Destination/Waypoints

When in map mode, touch anywhere on
the map display to access the following
options:

Edit Turn List

Set as Dest

Edit Route Preferences

Touch this button to select a scrolled
location on the map as your destination.
You may scroll the map by pressing your
index finger on the map display. When you
reach the desired location, simply let go
and then touch Set as Dest.

Edit Traffic Preferences

Detour

Cancel Route
Nokia is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to
Nokia by going to
http://mapreporter.navteq.com. Nokia
evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
investigation by e-mail.

Set as Waypoint
Touch this button to set the current
location as a waypoint.
Save to Favorites
Touch this button to save the current
location to your favorites.

Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are
available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-866-4NAVTEQ
(1-866-462-8837) or going to
www.navigation.com/sync. You need to
specify the make and model of your vehicle
to determine if there is an update available.

POI Icons
Touch this button to select icons to display
on the map. You can select up to three
icons to display on the map at the same
time. Turn these ON or OFF.
Cancel Route

Navigation Voice Commands

Touch this button to cancel the active
route.

When in navigation mode, press
the voice button on the steering
E142599
wheel controls. After the tone,
say any of the following commands:

411

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Voice command

Navigation system voice commands
Voice command

Show route

Cancel next waypoint

Show turn list

Cancel route

Voice guidance off

Destination

Voice guidance on
Where am I?

Destination

Zoom in

Destination

Zoom out

Destination favorites

Help

Destination home

These commands are only available when
a navigation route is active.

Destination intersection

Destination nearest

If you say "Destination", you can then say
any command in the following
"Destination" chart.

Destination nearest POI
Destination play nametags

If you say "Navigation", you can then say
any command in the following
"Navigation" chart.

Destination POI
Destination POI category

Destination

Destination previous destination

Voice command

Destination street address

Detour

Navigation

Favorites

Navigation voice volume decrease

Home

Navigation voice volume increase
Repeat instruction

Intersection
Nearest

Show 3D

Nearest POI

Show heading up

Play nametags

Show map

POI category

Show north up

412

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

MyFord Touch™
Voice command

Previous destination
Street address
Help
Navigation
Voice command

Destination

Zoom city
Zoom country
Zoom minimum
Zoom maximum
Zoom province
Zoom state
Zoom street
Zoom to
Help
*

If you say "Destination", you can then say
any command in the "Destination" chart.
One-shot Destination Street Address
When you say either "Navigation
destination street address" or "Destination
street address", the system asks you to say
the full address. The system displays an
example on-screen. You can then speak
the address naturally, such as "One two
three four Main Street, Anytown".

413

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Accessories
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, contact
an authorized dealer or visit our online
store at www.accessories.ford.com
(United States only).

•
•
•

*The Ford Licensed Accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Ford Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Ford Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Ford dealer for the
manufacturer's limited warranty details,
and request a copy of the Ford Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.

Ford Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Ford Genuine Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period,
as well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories. Ford Motor
Company will warrant your accessory
through the warranty that provides the
greatest benefit:
•
•

For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:

24 months, unlimited miles
The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty

Contact an authorized dealer for details
and a copy of the warranty.

•

Exterior Style
•
•
•

Side window deflectors
Splash guards
Wheels
•

Interior Style
•
•
•
•
•

All-weather floor mats
Interior ambient lighting
Cargo organizers
Rear seat entertainment*
Premium carpeted floor mats

Lifestyle
•
•
•

Ash cup and smokers packages
Roof racks and carriers*
Hitch and towing accessories

Peace of Mind
•
•

Wheel locks
Bumper-mounted parking sensor*
Keyless entry keypad

Remote start
Vehicle security system

414

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio
transmitters, for example, two-way
radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.

Accessories
•

•

Mobile communications systems may
harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if they are not properly
designed for automotive use.
If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability,
and may adversely affect the
performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.

E163431

The switches only operate while the
ignition is in the on position, whether the
engine is running or not. It is, however,
recommended that the engine remain
running to maintain a battery charge when
using the switches for an extended
duration or higher current draws. When you
switch them on they provide 20 amps of
electrical battery power for a variety of
uses.

AUXILIARY SWITCHES
The auxiliary switchboard on the center
console makes aftermarket customization
easier, with four prewired switches
attached to the power distribution box for
electrical accessories.

A fuse and relay kit is included with this
option. The kit contains the required fuses
and relays that are included under the
driver seat in the pre-fusebox. Refer to the
instructions included with the kit. See an
authorized dealer for service.
There will also be one power lead for each
switch found in a four way connector
located under the driver seat.

The relays are coded as follows:
Switch

Circuit number

Wire color

Fuse

AUX 1

CAC05

Yellow

20A

AUX 2

CAC06

Green with brown
trace

20A

AUX 3

CAC07

Violet with green
trace

20A

AUX 4

CAC08

Brown

20A

415

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Appendices
•

END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
SYNC End User License Agreement
(EULA)
•

•

You have acquired a device ("DEVICE")
that includes software licensed by Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY") from an
affiliate of Microsoft Corporation
("MS") . Those installed software
products of MS origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials,
and "online" or electronic
documentation ("MS SOFTWARE")
are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties.
The MS SOFTWARE is licensed, not
sold. All rights reserved.
The MS SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY. The additional
software and systems of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials,
and "online" or electronic
documentation ("FORD SOFTWARE")
are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties.
The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not
sold. All rights reserved.

•

The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD
SOFTWARE may interface with and/or
communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by third party
software and service suppliers. The
additional software and services of
third party origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation ("THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
The MS SOFTWARE, FORD
SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively
and individually will be referred to as
"SOFTWARE".

IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL
CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO
THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY
PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
•

416

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICE and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.

Appendices
•

Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
•

•

Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process.
Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, or disassemble nor permit
others to reverse engineer, decompile
or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation.
Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation.
Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICE and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.

•

417

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICE, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or MS may terminate this EULA if you
fail to comply with the terms and
conditions of this EULA.
Security Updates/Digital Rights
Management: Content owners use
the WMDRM technology included in
your DEVICE to protect their
intellectual property, included
copyrighted content. Portions of the
SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use
WMDRM software to access
WMDRM-protected content. If the
WMDRM software fails to protect the
content, content owners may ask
Microsoft to revoke the SOFTWARE's
ability to use WMDRM to play or copy
protected content. This action does
not affect unprotected content. When
your DEVICE downloads licenses for
protected content, you agree that
Microsoft may include a revocation list
with the licenses. Content owners may
require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE
on your DEVICE to access their content.
If you decline an upgrade, you will not
be able to access content that requires
the upgrade.

Appendices
•

•

supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components").

Consent to Use of Data: You agree
that MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and systems suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may collect and use technical
information gathered in any manner as
part of product support services related
to the SOFTWARE or related services.
MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and services suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may use this information solely to
improve their products or to provide
customized services or technologies to
you. MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and systems suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may disclose this information to others,
but not in a form that personally
identifies you.
Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, their affiliates and/or
their designated agent may
automatically check the version of the
SOFTWARE and/or its components
that you are utilizing and may provide
upgrades or supplements to the
SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICE.
Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,

If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party
software and services suppliers provide or
make available to you Supplemental
Components and no other EULA terms are
provided along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this EULA
shall apply.
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent make
available Supplemental Components, and
no other EULA terms are provided, then
the terms of this EULA shall apply, except
that the MS, Microsoft Corporation or
affiliate entity providing the Supplemental
Component(s) shall be the licensor of the
Supplemental Component(s).
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to you or
made available to you through the use of
the SOFTWARE.

418

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Appendices
•

•

Links to Third Party Sites: The MS
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites through
the use of the SOFTWARE. The third
party sites are not under the control of
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated
agent. Neither MS nor Microsoft
Corporation nor their affiliates nor their
designated agent are responsible for
(i) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated
agent.
Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICE operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and assumes any risk associated with
the use of the DEVICE.

INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or
their affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content. All rights not
specifically granted under this EULA are
reserved by MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service providers, their
affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.

UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CD
ROM disk(s) or via web download or other
means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.

EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments. For additional
information, see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.

419

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Appendices
Adobe

TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, third party software or service
providers, their affiliates or suppliers.

Contains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or
[AIR®] technology by Adobe Systems
Incorporated. This [Licensee Product]
contains [Adobe® Flash® Player]
[Adobe® AIR®] software under license
from Adobe Systems Incorporated,
Copyright ©1995-2009 Adobe
Macromedia Software LLC. All rights
reserved. Adobe, Flash and AIR are
trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.

PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support
for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS,
its parent corporation Microsoft
Corporation, or their affiliates or
subsidiaries. For product support, please
refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY
instructions provided in the documentation
for the DEVICE. Should you have any
questions concerning this EULA, or if you
desire to contact FORD MOTOR
COMPANY for any other reason, please
refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICE.

End User Notice
Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for
Automotive Important Safety
Information
This system Ford SYNC contains software
that is licensed to Manufacturer FORD
MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of
Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a license
agreement. Any removal, reproduction,
reverse engineering or other unauthorized
use of the software from this system in
violation of the license agreement is strictly
prohibited and may subject you to legal
action.

No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND
THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS,
MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR
THEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY
AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO
HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.
$250.00).
•

Read and follow instructions: Before
using your Windows Automotive- based
system, read and follow all instructions
and safety information provided in this end
user manual ("User's Guide"). Not
following precautions found in this User's
Guide can lead to an accident or other
serious consequences.
Keep User's Guide in vehicle: When kept
in the vehicle, the User's Guide will be a
ready reference for you and other users
unfamiliar with the Windows
Automotive-based system. Please make
certain that before using the system for
the first time, all persons have access to
the User's Guide and read its instructions
and safety information carefully.

THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER
THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY
BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.

420

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Appendices
Use of Speech Recognition Functions:
Speech recognition software is inherently
a statistical process which is subject to
errors. It is your responsibility to monitor
any speech recognition functions included
in the system and address any errors.

WARNING
Operating certain parts of this
system while driving can distract
your attention away from the road,
and possibly cause an accident or other
serious consequences. Do not change
system settings or enter data non-verbally
(using your hands) while driving. Stop the
vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations. This is
important since while setting up or
changing some functions you might be
required to distract your attention away
from the road and remove your hands from
the wheel.

Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully read
and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual (non-verbal)
setup. Attempting to perform such set-up
or insert data while driving can seriously
distract your attention and could cause an
accident or other serious consequences.
Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner
before attempting these operations.

General Operation
Voice Command Control: Functions
within the Windows Automotive-based
system may be accomplished using only
voice commands. Using voice commands
while driving allows you to operate the
system without removing your hands from
the wheel.

Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only as
an aid. Make your driving decisions based
on your observations of local conditions
and existing traffic regulations. Any such
feature is not a substitute for your personal
judgment. Any route suggestions made by
this system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.

Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a prolonged
view of the screen while you are driving.
Pull over in a safe and legal manner before
attempting to access a function of the
system requiring prolonged attention. Even
occasional short scans to the screen may
be hazardous if your attention has been
diverted away from your driving task at a
critical time.

Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be
placed in an unsafe situation, or if you
would be directed into an area that you
consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately
responsible for the safe operation of the
vehicle and therefore, must evaluate
whether it is safe to follow the suggested
directions.

Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level
where you can still hear outside traffic and
emergency signals while driving. Driving
while unable to hear these sounds could
cause an accident.

421

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Appendices
Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used
by this system may be inaccurate because
of changes in roads, traffic controls or
driving conditions. Always use good
judgment and common sense when
following the suggested routes.

Telenav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.

Emergency Services: Do not rely on any
navigation features included in the system
to route you to emergency services. Ask
local authorities or an emergency services
operator for these locations. Not all
emergency services such as police, fire
stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to
be contained in the map database for such
navigation features.

1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the Telenav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the Telenav Software: (a) observe
all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the Telenav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c)
do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the Telenav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked; (d)
do not use the Telenav Software for any
illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
manner inconsistent with this Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
Telenav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).

Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the Telenav
Software. Your use of the Telenav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the Telenav Software.
These terms and conditions represent the
agreement (“Agreement”) between you
and Telenav, Inc. (“Telenav”) with respect
to the Telenav Software (including
upgrades, modifications, or additions
thereto) (collectively “Telenav Software”).
All references herein to “you” and “your”
means you, your employees, agents, and
contractors, and any other entity on whose
behalf you accept these terms and
conditions, all of whom shall also be bound
by this Agreement. Additionally, all of your
account information, as well as other
payment and personal information
provided by you to Telenav (directly or
through the use of the Telenav Software,
is subject to Telenav’s privacy policy
located at http://www.telenav.com.

You agree to indemnify and hold Telenav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the Telenav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.

422

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Appendices
2. Account Information

or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party, (ii)
violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or (iii) is harmful,
threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous,
defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or
otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent
out, or otherwise permit unauthorized
access by third parties to the Telenav
Software without advanced written
permission of Telenav.

You agree: (a) when registering the
Telenav Software, to provide Telenav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform Telenav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
Subject to your compliance with the terms
of this Agreement, Telenav hereby grants
to you a personal, non-exclusive,
non-transferable license (except as
expressly permitted below in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
Telenav Software license), without the
right to sublicense, to use the Telenav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the Telenav
Software. This license shall terminate upon
any termination or expiration of this
Agreement. You agree that you will use the
Telenav Software only for your personal
business or leisure purposes, and not to
provide commercial navigation services to
other parties.

4. Disclaimers
To the fullest extent permissible pursuant
to applicable law, in no event will Telenav,
its licensors and suppliers, or agents or
employees of any of the foregoing, be
liable for any decision made or action
taken by you or anyone else in reliance on
the information provided by the Telenav
Software. Telenav also does not warrant
the accuracy of the map or other data used
for the Telenav Software. Such data may
not always reflect reality due to, among
other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing
conditions. You are responsible for the
entire risk arising out of your use of the
Telenav Software. For example but
without limitation, you agree not to rely on
the Telenav Software for critical navigation
in areas where the well-being or survival
of you or others is dependent on the
accuracy of navigation, as the maps or
functionality of the Telenav Software are
not intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.

3.1 License Limitations
You agree not to do any of the following:
(a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or
otherwise change the Telenav Software
or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive
the source code, audio library or structure
of the Telenav Software without the prior
express written consent of Telenav; (c)
remove from the Telenav Software, or
alter, any of Telenav’s or its suppliers’
trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or
copyright notices, or other notices or
markings; (d) distribute, sublicense or
otherwise transfer the Telenav Software
to others, except as part of your permanent
transfer of the Telenav Software; or (e)
use the Telenav Software in any manner
that (i) infringes the intellectual property

TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM

423

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Appendices
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR
TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not
permit the disclaimer of certain warranties,
so this limitation may not apply to you.

STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION
OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS
OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to this
Agreement or the Telenav Software shall
be settled by independent arbitration
involving a neutral arbitrator and
administered by the American Arbitration
Association in the County of Santa Clara,
California. The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and the
judgment upon the award rendered by the
arbitrator may be entered by any court
having jurisdiction. Note that there is no
judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding
and the decision of the arbitrator shall be
binding upon both parties. You expressly
agree to waive your right to a jury trial.

5. Limitation of Liability
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY
FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN
EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE
THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA,
LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS,
LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

This Agreement and performance
hereunder will be governed by and
construed in accordance with the laws of
the State of California, without giving
effect to its conflict of laws provisions. To
the extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both Telenav and you agree to submit to
the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of
the County of Santa Clara, California. The
United Nations Convention on Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods shall
not apply.

NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT
OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV’S
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME

7. Assignment
You may not resell, assign, or transfer this
Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
Telenav Software, and expressly
conditioned upon the new user of the
Telenav Software agreeing to be bound by
424

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Appendices
the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or
transfer that is not expressly permitted
under this paragraph will result in
immediate termination of this Agreement,
without liability to Telenav, in which case
you and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the Telenav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, Telenav
may assign this Agreement to any other
party at any time without notice, provided
the assignee remains bound by this
Agreement.

Notices by posting them on Telenav’s
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the Telenav Software.
8.4
Telenav’s or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party’s right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.

8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between Telenav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.

8.5
If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.

8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, Telenav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
Telenav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
Telenav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement.

8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words “include” and “including,” and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
“without limitation.”

8.3
By using the Telenav Software, you
consent to receive from Telenav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
Telenav Software (collectively, “Notices”)
electronically. Telenav may provide such

9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement includes
end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this

425

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Appendices
Agreement), and thus your use of the
Telenav Software is also subject to such
terms. You agree to comply with the
following additional terms and conditions,
which are applicable to Telenav’s third
party vendor licensors:

9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including
their licensors and suppliers) on the other
hand.

9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.

© 20xx. All rights reserved.
Permitted Use.
You agree to use this Data together with
the Telenav Software solely for the internal
business and personal purposes for which
you were licensed, and not for service
bureau, time-sharing or other similar
purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the
restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,
disassemble, create any derivative works
of, or reverse engineer any portion of this
Data, and may not transfer or distribute it
in any form, for any purpose, except to the
extent permitted by mandatory laws.

© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from
the United States Postal Service® to
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.

Restrictions.

©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4.

Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by Telenav, and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not use this Data (a) with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any

The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS

426

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Appendices
Disclaimer of Liability:

positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs.

This Data is provided to you “as is,” and
you agree to use it at your own risk. Telenav
and its licensors (and their licensors and
suppliers) make no guarantees,
representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, arising by law or
otherwise, including but not limited to,
content, quality, accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or
results to be obtained from this Data, or
that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.

TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS
(INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND
SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF
THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING
ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT
OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM
THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN
THE INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF
THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT
OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY,
EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS
HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.

Disclaimer of Warranty:

Export Control.

TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS
(INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND
SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.

You shall not export from anywhere any
part of the Data or any direct product
thereof except in compliance with, and
with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations, including but not limited to the
laws, rules and regulations administered
by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of
the U.S. Department of Commerce and the
Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S.
Department of Commerce. To the extent

Warning.
The Data may contain inaccurate or
incomplete information due to the passage
of time, changing circumstances, sources
used and the nature of collecting
comprehensive geographic data, any of
which may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty.

427

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Appendices
that any such export laws, rules or
regulations prohibit HERE from complying
with any of its obligations hereunder to
deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall
be excused and shall not constitute a
breach of this Agreement.

NOTICE OF USE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606

Entire Agreement.
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between Telenav (and
its licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.

Governing Law.

If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.

The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the State of Illinois
[insert “Netherlands” where European
HERE Data is used], without giving effect
to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii)
the United Nations Convention for
Contracts for the International Sale of
Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You
agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the
State of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used] for
any and all disputes, claims and actions
arising from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder.

I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing
Data for the United States shall contain
the following notices:
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
information.”

Government End Users.
If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf
of the United States government or any
other entity seeking or applying rights
similar to those customarily claimed by the
United States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with these End-User Terms,
and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:

“©United States Postal Service®
20XX. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United
States Postal Service®. The following
trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”

428

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Appendices
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage
media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
for the copy; or (iii) other materials
packaged with the copy, such as user
manuals or end user license agreements: “This data includes information
taken with permission from Canadian
authorities, including © Her Majesty
the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”

B. Canada Data. The following provisions apply to the Data for Canada,
which may include or reflect data from
third party licensors (“Third Party
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada
Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provisions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representations or warranties respecting such
data, either express or implied,
arising by law or otherwise, including
but not limited to, effectiveness,
completeness, accuracy or fitness
for a particular purpose.

3. End-User Terms: Except as otherwise agreed by the parties, in connection with the provision of any portion
of the Data for the Territory of Canada
to End-Users as may be authorized
under the Agreement, Client shall
provide such End-Users, in a reasonably conspicuous manner, with terms
(set forth with other end user terms
required to be provided under the
Agreement, or as otherwise may be
provided, by Client) which shall include
the following provisions on behalf of
the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan:

b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of
any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause
of the claim, demand or action
alleging any loss, injury or damages,
direct or indirect, which may result
from the use or possession of such
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the
Data.

The Data may include or reflect
data of licensors, including Her
Majesty the Queen in the Right of
Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
and the Department of Natural
Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,

429

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Appendices
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, completeness, accuracy or fitness for a
particular purpose. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in
respect of any claim, demand or
action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or possession of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not
be liable in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the data
or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
and their officers, employees and
agents from and against any claim,
demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action, alleging loss,
costs, expenses, damages or injuries
(including injuries resulting in death)
arising out of the use or possession
of the data or the Data.

II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional
de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice:
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Territory Notice
Ecuador “INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
ENERO DE 2011”
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
Guadeloupe,
French
Guiana
and
Martinique
Mexico

4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addition to all of the rights and obligations
of the parties under the Agreement.
To the extent that any of the provisions of this Section are inconsistent
with, or conflict with, any other provisions of the Agreement, the provisions
of this Section shall prevail.

“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”

IV. Middle East Territory

430

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Appendices
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Country

Notice

Jordan

“© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The
foregoing notice requirement
for Jordan Data is a material
term of the Agreement. If
Client or any of its permitted
sublicensees (if any) fail to
meet such requirement, HERE
shall have the right to
terminate Client’s license
with respect to the Jordan
Data.

V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
and agrees that in certain countries of
the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
party RDS-TMC code providers to
receive and use the Traffic Codes in
the Data and to deliver to End-Users
Transactions in any way derived from
or based on such Traffic Codes. For
such countries, HERE shall deliver the
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
Client only after receiving certification
from Client of its having obtained such
rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
each Transaction that uses Traffic
Codes for Belgium, provide the
following notice to the End-User:
“Traffic Codes for Belgium are
provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”

B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enterprise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
In addition, Client, its permitted sublicensees (if any) and End-Users are
restricted from using the Jordan Data in
Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
Jordan-based customer. For purposes
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applications” shall mean Geomarketing applications, GIS applications, mobile business
asset management applications, call
center applications, telematics applications, public organization Internet
applications or for providing geocoding
services.

B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
license granted to Client relating to
making, selling or distributing paper
maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
paper-like medium): (a) such license
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
entering into and complying with a
separate written agreement with the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
OS any and all applicable paper map
royalties, and Client’s complying with
the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic

431

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Appendices
is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior
written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
Client is restricted from using Data for
the Territory of France to create paper
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted
from using any Data to create, sell or
distribute paper maps that are the same
or substantially similar, in terms of data
content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessungswesen of Austria, and the National
Land Survey of Sweden.

Austria

Germany “Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung der
zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”

C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring
a direct action against Client to enforce
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper
map requirements (see Section IV(B)
above) contained in this Agreement.

Great
Britain

“Contains Ordnance Survey
data © Crown copyright and
database right 2010 Contains
Royal Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database right
2010”

Greece

“Copyright Geomatics Ltd.”

D. Third Party Notices. Any and all
copies of the Data and/or packaging
relating thereto shall include the
respective Third Party Notices set forth
below and used as described below
corresponding to the Territory (or
portion thereof) included in such copy:

Italy

“La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando quale
riferimento anche cartografia
numerica ed al tratto
prodotta e fornita dalla
Regione Toscana.”

Norway

Portugal “Source: IgeoE – Portugal”
Spain

Country(ies) Notice

432

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”

Appendices
Sweden

Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.

B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
shall contain the following notice:
“Product incorporates traffic location
codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited and its licensors.”

E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not
received approvals to distribute map
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
HERE may update such list from time to
time. The license rights granted to Client
under this TL with respect to the Data
for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations, including, without
limitation, any required licenses or
approvals to distribute the Application
incorporating such Data in such
respective countries.

VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
as necessary for your personal use to (i)
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.

VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).

Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)

433

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Appendices
No Other Warranty:

with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease
using this Data if you fail to comply with
these terms and conditions.

EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.

Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
described in applicable written materials
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s
support engineers will make commercially
reasonable efforts to solve any problem
issues.

Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.

rigCustomer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
be warranted for the remainder of the
original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
nor any product support services offered
by NAV2 are available without proof of
purchase from an authorized international
source.

434

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Appendices
Export Control

Gracenote® Copyright

You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any
direct product thereof except in
compliance with, and with all licenses and
approvals required under, applicable
export laws, rules and regulations.

CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000-2007
Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright
© 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and
service may practice one or more of the
following U.S. Patents #5,987,525,
#6,061,680, #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6.240,459,
#6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent: #6,304,523.

IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its
suppliers and are protected by applicable
copyright and other intellectual property
law and treaties. The Data are provided
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale.

Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.

Entire Agreement
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.

Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device.

Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
United Nations Convention for Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods, which
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder shall be
submitted to the Shanghai International
Economic and Trade Arbitration
Commission for arbitration.

This device may contain content belonging
to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote.

435

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Appendices
You agree that you will use the content
from Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") ,
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers for your own
personal, non-commercial use only. You
agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote
Data (except in a Tag associated with a
music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE
NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE
CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER.

You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote,
respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content,
including all ownership rights. Under no
circumstances will either Gracenote
become liable for any payment to you for
any information that you provide, including
any copyrighted material or music file
information. You agree that Gracenote
may enforce its respective rights,
collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.

436

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Appendices
Vehicle with SYNC only
United States and Mexico
FCC ID: KMHSG1G1
IC: 1422A-SG1G1
Mexico
Model: KMHSG1P1
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
The operation of this equipment is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
equipment or device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this
equipment or device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Vehicle with SYNC with
Touchscreen/My Touch
FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2
IC: 1422A-SYNCG2
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the
equipment. The term "IC" before the radio
certification number only signifies that
Industry Canada technical specifications
were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.

437

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Extended Service Plan (ESP)
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.

That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts

SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only)
More than 32 million Ford owners have
discovered the powerful protection of Ford
Extended Service Plan. It is the extended
service plan backed by Ford Motor
Company, and provides peace of mind
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty coverage.

Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
You take advantage of replacement
transportation if your vehicle is at your
authorized dealer for same day covered
repairs.

Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and
labor – can easily exceed the price of your
Ford Extended Service Plan. With Ford ESP
you minimize your risk for unexpected
repair bills and rising repair costs.

Extended Rental Benefits

Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components

Roadside Assistance

If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.

Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:

There are four core Extended Service Plans
with different levels of coverage. Ask your
authorized dealer for details.

•

PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.

•
•
•

Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts
Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle,
rental car coverage and emergency
transportation.

Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Extended Service Plan coverage expires,
you can transfer any remaining coverage
to the new owner. Whenever you sell your
vehicle, prospective buyers may have a
higher degree of confidence that vehicle
was properly maintained with Ford ESP,
thereby improving resale value.

Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by
all authorized Ford dealers in the U.S.,
Canada and Mexico. It is the extended
service plan authorized and backed by Ford
Motor Company.

438

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Extended Service Plan (ESP)
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)

Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly
Maintaining Your Vehicle!

You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended
Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan
is the only service contract backed by Ford
Motor Company of Canada, Limited.
Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford
Extended Service Plan provides benefits
such as:

Ford Extended Service Plan also offers a
Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all
scheduled maintenance, and selected
wear items. The coverage is prepaid, so
you never have to worry about affording
your vehicle’s maintenance. It covers
regular checkups, routine inspections,
preventive care and replacement of select
items that require periodic attention for
normal wear:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•

Windshield wiper blades.
Spark plugs.
The clutch disc.
Brake pads and linings.
Shock absorbers.
Struts.
Engine Belts.
Engine coolant hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment.

•

Rental reimbursement.
Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires.
Roadside Assistance benefits.

There are several Ford Extended Service
Plans available in various time, distance
and deductible combinations. Each plan
is tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase Ford Extended
Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada and the United States, provided
by a network of participating authorized
Ford Motor Company dealers.

Interest Free Finance Options
Available
Take advantage of our interest free
installment payment plan. Just a 10%
down payment will provide you with an
affordable, no interest, no fee payment
program allowing you all the security and
benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying
over time. You are pre-approved with no
credit checks, no hassles! To learn more,
call our Ford ESP specialists at
800-367-3377.

Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada
and the United States are not eligible for
Ford Extended Service Plan coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for
you.

Ford ESP
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232

439

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Scheduled Maintenance
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft
Replacement Parts

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION

Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide
12-month or 12000 mi (20,000 km) parts
and labor limited warranty.

Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.

If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.

We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the correct
times. These intervals serve two purposes;
one is to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep the cost
of owning your vehicle down.

Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one
stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to crash repairs.

It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 265).

Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.

Protecting Your Investment

Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.

Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the correct performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.

Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your
dealership about the training and
certification their technicians have
received.

Vehicles with a 3.2L, 3.5L or 3.7L Engine
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which
displays a message in the information
display at the correct oil change interval.
This interval may be up to one year or
10000 mi (16,000 km).

440

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Scheduled Maintenance
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 miles
(800 kilometers) of the message
appearing. Make sure you reset the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each oil
change. See Changing the Engine Oil
and Oil Filter (page 205).

Additives and Chemicals

If your information display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at
six months or 5000 mi (8,000 km) from
your last oil change. Never exceed one year
or 10000 mi (16,000 km) between oil
change intervals.

Oils, Fluids and Flushing

This owner's manual and the Ford
Workshop Manual list the recommended
additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
We do not recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part of
your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information.

In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert, such
as the factory-trained technicians at your
dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination
immediately.

All Vehicles
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to correctly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.

Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using a Ford-approved flushing
chemical.

Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts
and component systems based upon
engineering testing. Ford Motor Company
relies upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.

Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
Check every month

We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.

Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and
correct pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.

441

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-point inspection
Check every six months

Battery connections. Clean if necessary.

Exterior lamps and hazard warning
system operation.

Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.

Fluid levels ; fill if necessary.

For oil and fluid leaks.

Cooling system fluid level and coolant
strength.

Horn operation.

Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if
necessary.

Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hoses.
Suspension component for leaks or
damage.

Hinges, latches and outside locks for
correct operation. Lubricate if necessary.

Steering and linkage.

Parking brake for correct operation.

Tires (including spare) for wear and

Safety belts and seat latches for wear
and function.

correct pressure .
Windshield for cracks, chips or pits.

Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag
and safety belt) for operation.

Washer spray and wiper operation.

Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean
or replace blades as necessary.

Brake, coolant recovery reservoir,
automatic transmission, power steering (if
equipped with hydraulic power assist
steering) and window washer.

Multi-point Inspection

If your vehicle is equipped with a
temporary mobility kit, check the tire
sealant expiration Use By date on the
canister. Replace as needed.

In order to keep your vehicle running
correctly, it is important to have the
systems on your vehicle checked regularly.
This can help identify potential issues and
prevent major problems. We recommend
having the following multi-point inspection
performed at every scheduled
maintenance interval to help make sure
your vehicle keeps running correctly.

Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.

Multi-point inspection

Accessory drive belt(s).
Battery performance.
Engine air filter.
Exhaust system.

442

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Scheduled Maintenance
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.

NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor®
(Vehicles with a 3.2L, 3.5L and 3.7L
Engine)

The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of
use.

Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several

When to expect the oil change message
Interval

Vehicle use and example

Normal
7500-10000 miles
(12000-16000 km)

Normal commuting with highway driving.
No, or moderate, load or towing.
Flat to moderately hilly roads.
No extended idling.
Severe

5000-7499 miles
(8000-11999 km)

3000-4999 miles
(4800-7999 km)

Moderate to heavy load or towing.
Mountainous or off-road conditions.
Extended idling.
Extended hot or cold operation.
Extreme
Maximum load or towing.
Extreme hot or cold operation.

443

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Scheduled Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Intervals
3.2L, 3.5L and 3.7L Engines
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display

Change engine oil and filter.

Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level (if equipped with dipstick). Consult your
dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect front axle and U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and Ujoints. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings.
Diesel engine fill diesel exhaust fluid.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
*

Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.

Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.

Other maintenance items

Torque rear axle U-bolts to specification.
Every 30000 miles (48000
2
Diesel engine replace fuel filter.
km)
Replace engine air filter.
Every 45000 miles (70000 Change diesel foam air filter.
km)
At 100000 miles (160000
km)

Change engine coolant.

444

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Scheduled Maintenance
Other maintenance items

Every 100000 miles
(160000 km)

Replace spark plugs.
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)

Change rear axle fluid.
Replace accessory drive belt(s).

Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last
engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2

Replace early if indicated by per Water In Fuel warning lamp. See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 74).
3

Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three
years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
4

After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
Perform the services shown in the
following tables when specified or within
3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the oil
change required message appearing in the
information display.
• Example 1: The message appears at
28750 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
30000 mi (48,000 km) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The message does not
appear, but the odometer reads
30000 mi (48,000 km) (for example,
the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was
reset at 25000 mi (40,000 km)).
Perform the engine air filter
replacement.

SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
3.2L, 3.5L and 3.7L Engines
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.

Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier

As required

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled
Maintenance chart.

Inspect frequently,
service as required

Inspect and lubricate U-joints.
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.

445

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use
(such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)

As required

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled
Maintenance chart.

Inspect frequently,
service as required

Replace engine air filter.

Every 60000 miles
(96000 km)

Replace spark plugs.

Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)

Inspect frequently,
service as required

Replace engine air filter.

Every 5000 miles (8000 Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
km)
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.
Every 5000 miles (8000 Change engine oil and filter.*
km) or six months
*

Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.

Off-road operation

Inspect frequently,
service as required

Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and U-joints, Lubricate if
equipped with grease fittings.
Replace engine air filter.

Every 5000 miles (8000 Change engine oil and filter.*
km) or six months
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.
*

Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.

446

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Exclusive use of E85 (Flex fuel vehicles only)

Every oil change interval

If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
or equivalent. Add four ounces (118
milliliters) of additive friction modifier XL-3
EST-M2C118-A, or equivalent, for complete
refill of Traction-Lok rear axles. Change
the axle fluid anytime the axle submerges
in water.

Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
Normal vehicle axle maintenance: Rear
axles and power take-off units with
synthetic fluid and light-duty trucks
equipped with Ford-design axles are
lubricated for life; do not check or change
fluid unless a leak is suspected, service is
required or the assembly has been
submerged in water. During long periods
of trailer towing with outside temperatures
above 70°F (21°C) and at wide-open
throttle for long periods above 45 mph
(72 km/h), change non-synthetic rear axle
fluid every 3000 mi (4,800 km) or three
months, whichever comes first. This
interval can be waived if the axle is filled
with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting
Ford specification WSL-M2C192-A; GL-5
or equivalent. Add friction modifier XL-3
EST-M2C118-A or equivalent for complete
refill of Traction-Lok rear axles. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
265).

California fuel filter replacement: If you
register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot climate oil change intervals:
Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
oil change interval is 5000 mi (8,000 km).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
3000 mi (4,800 km).

Police, Taxi and Livery vehicle axle
maintenance: Change rear axle fluid every
100000 mi (160,000 km). Rear axle fluid
change may be waived if the axle was filled
with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting
Ford specification WSL-M2C192-A; GL-5

Engine air filter replacement: The life of
the engine air filter is dependent on
exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions
require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter.

447

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Scheduled Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

448

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

449

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

450

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

451

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

452

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

453

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

454

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Index

Audio Input Jack...........................................297
Audio System................................................282
General Information.........................................282

A/C

Audio Troubleshooting..............................299
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Satellite Radio.............................290
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC.............................................................288
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/
FM...................................................................283

See: Climate Control..........................................88

About This Manual...........................................7
Protecting the Environment................................7

ABS
See: Brakes...........................................................136

ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes................................................................136

AUX Button..........................................................286
Clock Button........................................................285
Menu Button.......................................................286
Sound Button.....................................................286
Station Preset Buttons....................................286
Station Tuning Buttons...................................285

Accessories.....................................................414
Exterior Style........................................................414
Interior Style.........................................................414
Lifestyle..................................................................414
Peace of Mind......................................................414

Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium
AM/FM/CD.................................................286
Autolamps........................................................66

Accessories
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation............................................10

Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps........................................................66

Adjusting the Headlamps..........................215
Horizontal Aim Adjustment............................216
Vertical Aim Adjustment..................................215

Automatic Transmission............................132
Brake-Shift Interlock.........................................134
Hints on Driving with an Automatic
Transmission...................................................134
Understanding the Gearshift Lever
Positions of the Automatic
Transmission....................................................132

Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................60
Airbag Disposal...............................................42
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control..........................................88

Air Vents............................................................88
Alarm

Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check............................................................209
Autowipers.......................................................63
Auxiliary Power Points.................................101

See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................59

Anti-Theft Alarm............................................59
Alarm System........................................................59
Arming the Alarm.................................................59
Disarming the Alarm...........................................59
Triggering the Alarm............................................59

AC Power Point....................................................101
Auxiliary Power Point Locations....................101

Auxiliary Switches........................................415

Appendices.....................................................416
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............76

Airbag Secondary Warning...............................76
Door Ajar...................................................................77
Exterior Lamps On................................................77
Gearshift Lever not in Park (P)........................77
Key in Ignition..........................................................77
Parking Brake On...................................................77
Safety Belt Minder................................................77

Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood.........200

Booster Seats..................................................22
Types of Booster Seats......................................22

Bottle Holder..................................................103
Brake Fluid Check.........................................210
Brakes...............................................................136

Audio Control - Vehicles With:
Touchscreen Display...................................61
Audio Control - Vehicles Without:
Touchscreen Display.................................60

General Information..........................................136

Breaking-In......................................................172
Bulb Specification Chart............................221

Seek, Next or Previous.........................................61

455

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Index

Changing the Engine Air Filter 3.5L.................................................................223
Changing the Engine Air Filter 3.7L.................................................................224
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil
Filter...............................................................205

California Proposition 65.............................10
Capacities and Specifications - 3.2L
Power Stroke Diesel.................................278
Capacities.............................................................278
Specifications......................................................279

Engine Lubrication for Severe Service
Operation........................................................205

Capacities and Specifications 3.5L..................................................................271

Changing the Wiper Blades......................215

Capacities..............................................................271
Specifications......................................................272

Changing the Windshield Wiper
Blades................................................................215

Capacities and Specifications 3.7L..................................................................274

Checking MyKey System Status..............49
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................215
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance..................................................31
Child Safety.......................................................13

Capacities.............................................................274
Specifications......................................................276

Capacities and Specifications................265
Car Wash

General Information.............................................13

See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................227

Child Safety Locks..........................................25

Catalytic Converter.......................................114

Left-Hand Side......................................................25
Right-Hand Side...................................................25

Driving with a Catalytic Converter.................114

Child Seat Positioning..................................24
Cigar Lighter...................................................102
Cleaning Products........................................227
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................230
Cleaning the Engine....................................228
Cleaning the Exterior...................................227

Changing a Bulb............................................217
Central High Mounted Brake Lamp............220
Front Clearance Lamp......................................219
Headlamp..............................................................217
Interior Lamp.......................................................220
License Plate Lamp..........................................220
Reading Lamps....................................................221
Rear Lamps...........................................................219
Side Direction Indicator....................................219
Sun Visor Mirror Lamp.......................................221

Body Paintwork Preservation........................227
Cleaning the Chrome Trim..............................227
Cleaning the Headlamps.................................227
Cleaning the Rear Window.............................227
Sliding Door Tracks...........................................228

Changing a Fuse...........................................198
Changing a Road Wheel...........................256

Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.........................229
Cleaning the Interior...................................229

Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information.....................................................256
Front Jacking Points...........................................261
Installing a Road Wheel..................................262
Locking Lug Nuts................................................257
Rear Jacking Points............................................261
Removing a Road Wheel................................262
Stowing the Wheel and Vehicle Jack.........263
Vehicle Jack.........................................................260
Vehicles With a Spare Wheel........................257

Instrument Cluster Screens, LCD Screens
and Radio Screens.......................................229
Rear Windows.....................................................229
Safety Belts..........................................................229

Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................229
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................48
Climate Control..............................................88
Principle of Operation........................................88

Changing the 12V Battery..........................213
Installing the Battery.........................................214
Removing the Battery.......................................213

Cold Weather Precautions.........................173
Coolant Check

Changing the Engine Air Filter - 3.2L
Power Stroke Diesel.................................225

Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.........41

See: Engine Coolant Check...........................206

456

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Index
Creating a MyKey............................................47

Emission Control System...........................122

Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................47

Diesel Exhaust System: Oxidation Catalyst
And Diesel Particulate Filter System
..............................................................................124
Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Tampering Acts and Maintenance...........131
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)....................122
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) Testing....................................................123
Tampering With a Noise Control
System................................................................131

Cruise Control..................................................62
Principle of Operation.......................................146

Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control................................146

Cup Holders....................................................103
Customer Assistance.................................180

End User License Agreement..................416

Data Recording..................................................9
Daytime Running Lamps.............................67

SYNC End User License Agreement
(EULA)...............................................................416

Type 1 - Conventional
(Non-Configurable)........................................67
Type 2 - Configurable..........................................67

Engine Block Heater....................................107

Diesel Particulate Filter..............................106

Adding Engine Coolant...................................206
Checking the Engine Coolant.......................206
Recycled Engine Coolant................................207
Severe Climates.................................................208
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling.............................................................208

Using the Engine Block Heater.....................108

Engine Coolant Check...............................206

Regeneration........................................................107

Digital Radio..................................................292
HD Radio Reception and Station
Troubleshooting............................................293

Direction Indicators.......................................68
DPF

Engine Immobilizer

See: Diesel Particulate Filter..........................106

See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................58

Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap........210

Engine Oil Check..........................................204

Changing the Fuel Filter....................................211
Purging Air From the Fuel System................212

Adding Engine Oil..............................................205

Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.2L Power Stroke
Diesel............................................................204
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.5L.........................204
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.7L..........................204
Engine Specifications - 3.2L Power
Stroke Diesel..............................................266

Driver Alert......................................................148
Principle of Operation.......................................148
Using Driver Alert................................................148

Driver and Passenger Airbags....................33
Children and Airbags..........................................38
Passenger Airbag On and Off Switch ..........33
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment........................................................38

Drivebelt Routing...............................................266

Engine Specifications - 3.5L....................265
Drivebelt Routing...............................................265

Engine Specifications - 3.7L....................265

Driving Aids.....................................................148
Driving Hints....................................................172
Driving Through Water................................173
DRL

Drivebelt Routing...............................................266

Entertainment..............................................369
A/V Inputs............................................................386
AM/FM Radio........................................................371
Bluetooth Audio.................................................386
Browsing Device Content...............................369
SD Card Slot and USB Port............................381
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If
Activated).........................................................377
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information................................386

See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................67

E
Economical Driving.......................................172

457

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Index
Essential Towing Checks...........................163

Fuel Quality - Gasoline................................110

Before Towing a Trailer.....................................168
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Water Craft (PWC).......................................169
Safety Chains.......................................................164
Tow Hitch...............................................................164
Trailer Brakes........................................................164
Trailer Lamps.......................................................168
Trailer Towing Connector.................................163
When Towing a Trailer......................................168

Choosing the Right Fuel With a Flex Fuel
Vehicle (If Equipped)....................................110
Choosing the Right Fuel Without a Flex Fuel
Vehicle (If Equipped)....................................110
Octane Recommendations.............................110

Fuel Shutoff....................................................176
Fuse Box Locations.....................................186

See: Data Recording..............................................9

Body Control Module Fuse Box....................186
Engine Compartment Fuse Box...................186
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box............186
Pre-fuse Box.........................................................186

Export Unique Options...................................11
Extended Service Plan (ESP).................438

Fuses.................................................................186
Fuse Specification Chart............................187

SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)............439
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only).........................438

Body Control Module.........................................197
Engine Compartment Fuse Box....................187
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel.........191
Pre-fuse Box.........................................................194

Event Data Recording

Exterior Mirrors................................................70
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................70
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................70

Gauges................................................................72

Fastening the Safety Belts..........................27

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge.............72
Fuel Gauge..............................................................73
Information Display..............................................72
Tripmeter Reset and Distance to
Empty...................................................................73

Safety Belt Extension Assembly....................29
Safety Belt Locking Modes...............................28
Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy...........27

Floor Mats........................................................173
Ford Credit.........................................................10

General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................43
General Maintenance Information.......440

(U.S. Only)...............................................................10

Fuel and Refueling.......................................109
Fuel Consumption.......................................120

Multi-point Inspection.....................................442
Owner Checks and Services...........................441
Protecting Your Investment..........................440
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................440
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?....................................................440

Calculating Fuel Economy................................121
Filling the Tank......................................................121

Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................113
Fuel Filter - Gasoline....................................212
Fuel Quality - Diesel......................................111

Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada..........................................................183
Getting the Services You Need...............180

Biodiesel..................................................................112
Diesel Fuel Additives .........................................113
Fuel Requirements - Choosing The Right
Fuel: Vehicles Operated Where
Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel Is Not
Required .............................................................111
Fuel Requirements - Choosing the Right
Fuel: Vehicles Operated Where
Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel is Required
(United States/Canada/Puerto Rico/U.S.
Virgin Islands and Other Locales).............111

Away From Home..............................................180

H
Handbrake
See: Parking Brake..............................................137

Hazard Warning Flashers...........................176

458

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Index
Head Restraints..............................................93

Installing Child Seats.....................................14

Adjusting the Head Restraint..........................94
Installing the Head Restraint ..........................94
Removing the Head Restraint.........................94

Child Seats...............................................................14
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts..........................15
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)..............................................17
Using Tether Straps..............................................19

Heated Windows and Mirrors....................92
Heated Exterior Mirrors......................................92
Heated Rear Window..........................................92
See: Climate Control..........................................88

Instrument Cluster.........................................72
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................67
Interior Lamps.................................................68

Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate...........................................................90

Courtesy Lamp.....................................................68
Reading Lamps.....................................................68

Cooling the Interior Quickly.............................90
General Hints........................................................90
Heating the Interior Quickly.............................90
Maximum Cooling Performance in
Instrument Panel or Instrument Panel
and Footwell Positions..................................91
Recommended Settings for Cooling ...........90
Recommended Settings for Heating...........90
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather...............................................................91
Vehicle Stationary for Extended Periods
During Extreme High Ambient
Temperatures...................................................90

Interior Mirror...................................................70

Heating

Auto-Dimming Mirror..........................................70

Introduction.........................................................7

J
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................177
Connecting the Jumper Cables.....................178
Jump Starting.......................................................178
Preparing Your Vehicle.......................................177
Removing the Jumper Cables........................178

Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes............................................................136
Hood Lock

Keys and Remote Controls.........................43
Principle of Operation........................................43

See: Opening and Closing the Hood.........200

Lane Keeping System.................................149

Ignition Switch..............................................104
In California (U.S. Only)..............................181
Information Display Control.......................62
Information Displays.....................................78

Lane Keeping Alert.............................................149

Lighting Control..............................................65
Headlamp Flasher...............................................66
High Beams............................................................65
Lighting Control Positions................................65
Parking Lamps......................................................66

General Information............................................78

Information....................................................395

Lighting..............................................................65

911 Assist...............................................................401
Alerts.......................................................................401
Calendar................................................................401
Sirius Travel Link................................................399
SYNC Services (If Equipped, United States
Only).................................................................396
Vehicle Health Report.....................................403

General Information............................................65

Load Carrying.................................................152
Load Limit........................................................152
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles.............................................................159
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer..................................................................152

Information Messages.................................83

Load Retaining Fixtures..............................152
Securing Cargo.....................................................152

459

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Index

Locking and Unlocking.................................53
Automatic Locking..............................................56
Automatic Unlocking..........................................56
Configurable Unlocking......................................57
Locking.....................................................................53
Locking and Unlocking Confirmation...........53
Locking and Unlocking the Doors From
Inside....................................................................53
One-Stage Unlocking.........................................56
Opening and Closing the Double Rear
Doors....................................................................54
Opening and Closing the Sliding Door.........54
Rear Emergency Exit...........................................56
Two-Stage Unlocking.........................................57
Unlocking.................................................................53
Zone Re-Locking...................................................57

Navigation......................................................405
cityseekr...............................................................406
Map Mode............................................................409
Navigation Map Updates..................................411
Navigation Voice Commands.........................411
Point of Interest (POI) Categories..............406
Quick-touch Buttons..........................................411
Setting a Destination.......................................405
Setting Your Navigation
Preferences....................................................408

Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........443
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor® (Vehicles with
a 3.2L, 3.5L and 3.7L Engine)....................443
Normal Maintenance Intervals....................444

Locks...................................................................53
Lug Nuts

See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................256

Lug Nuts..........................................................264

Oil Change Indicator Reset......................206
Resetting the Oil Life Monitoring
System.............................................................206

Oil Check

Maintenance.................................................200

See: Engine Oil Check......................................204

General Information.........................................200

Opening and Closing the Hood.............200

Manual Climate Control..............................89
Manual Seats..................................................94

Closing the Hood................................................201
Opening the Hood............................................200

Adjusting the Armrest........................................96
Adjusting the Lumbar Support.......................95
Moving the Seat Backward or
Forward...............................................................94
Recline Adjustment.............................................95

Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature......................................................184
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual..........184

Overhead Console.......................................103
Overhead Storage Compartments..............103

Media Hub......................................................298
Message Center

See: Information Displays.................................78

Mirrors

Parking Aid......................................................142

See: Heated Windows and Mirrors................92
See: Windows and Mirrors................................69

Switching the Parking Aid System
Off........................................................................143

Mobile Communications Equipment........11
Motorcraft Parts - 3.2L Power Stroke
Diesel............................................................269
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L...............................267
Motorcraft Parts - 3.7L..............................268
MyFord Touch™...........................................348

Parking Aids....................................................142
Principle of Operation.......................................142

Parking Brake..................................................137
Center Parking Brake.........................................137

Passive Anti-Theft System........................58
SecuriLock®...........................................................58

General Information.........................................348

PATS

MyKey Troubleshooting................................51
MyKey™.............................................................46

See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................58

Perchlorate........................................................10

Principle of Operation........................................46

460

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Index
Personalized Settings...................................82

Refueling...........................................................118

Measure Units........................................................82
Switching Chimes Off or On............................82

Remote Control..............................................43

Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System................120

Phone..............................................................388

Car Finder................................................................44
Integrated Key head Transmitter....................43
Programming a New Remote Control.........44
Replacing the Battery.........................................44
Sounding a Panic Alarm....................................45

Making Calls........................................................390
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones.................389
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time..................................................................389
Phone Menu Options........................................391
Phone Settings...................................................393
Phone Voice Commands................................394
Receiving Calls...................................................390
Text Messaging...................................................392

Removing a Headlamp...............................216
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............230
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................10
Collision Repairs.....................................................11
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs...................................................................11
Warranty on Replacement Parts......................11

Post-Crash Alert System...........................179
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................53

Power Seats.....................................................96

Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................45
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)...............................................................185
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)..............................................................184
Roadside Assistance...................................175

Power Lumbar.......................................................97

Power Steering Fluid Check.....................210
Adding Power Steering Fluid..........................210

Power Windows.............................................69
Accessory Delay...................................................69
Bounce-Back.........................................................69
Driver Side One-Touch Down..........................69
Driver Side One-Touch Up................................69

Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance.........................................................175
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance.........................................................175
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance.....................................175
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance.....................................175

R
Rear Passenger Climate Controls.............91
Rear Quarter Windows..................................71
Closing the Rear Windows.................................71
Opening the Rear Windows...............................71

Roadside Emergencies...............................175
Running-In

Rear Seats.........................................................97
Installing the Seats.............................................99
Recline Adjustment............................................98
Removing Seats, 12 & 15 Passenger
Vehicles..............................................................98

See: Breaking-In...................................................172

Running Out of Fuel......................................113
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container...........................................................113
Filling a Portable Fuel Container....................113

Rear View Camera........................................143
Switching the Rear View Camera Off.........145
Switching the Rear View Camera On..........144
Using the Display................................................144
Vehicles with Parking Aid................................145

S
Safety Belt Height Adjustment.................29
Safety Belt Minder.........................................30

Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera....................................143

Belt-Minder®.........................................................30

Recommended Towing Weights.............161

Safety Belts......................................................26

Calculating the Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight for Your Vehicle...............................163

Principle of Operation........................................26

Reduced Engine Performance.................172

461

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Index
Starting a Diesel Engine............................105

Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................29

Cold Weather Operation.................................106
Engine Glow Plugs.............................................105
Failure to Start....................................................106
Starting a Cold or Hot Engine........................106

Conditions of operation.....................................30

Safety Canopy™............................................40
Safety Precautions......................................109
Satellite Radio..............................................294

Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................104

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)................................................................295
Satellite Radio Reception Factors..............295
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service..................295
Troubleshooting.................................................296

Before starting the engine check the
following:..........................................................104
Cold or Hot Engine.............................................105
Engine Idle Speed after Starting..................105
Flooded Engine...................................................105

Scheduled Maintenance Record...........448
Scheduled Maintenance..........................440
Seats...................................................................93
Security..............................................................58
Selective Catalytic Reduction
System............................................................115

Starting and Stopping the Engine.........104

Approximate Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Usage...................................................................117
Contaminated Diesel Exhaust Fluid or
Inoperative Selective Catalytic Reduction
System.................................................................117
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Guidelines.....................117
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level................................115

Switching Off the Engine...........................107

General Information..........................................104

Steering Wheel...............................................60
Storage Compartments.............................103
Supplementary Restraints System.........32
Principle of Operation.........................................32
Vehicles With a Turbocharger........................107

Symbols Glossary.............................................7
SYNC™ Applications and Services.......318
911 Assist................................................................318
SYNC Mobile Apps............................................325
SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions &
Information (TDI) (If Equipped, United
States Only)....................................................322
Vehicle Health Report......................................320

Settings...........................................................356
Clock.......................................................................357
Display....................................................................357
Settings..................................................................361
Sound.....................................................................359
Vehicle...................................................................359

SYNC™...........................................................300
General Information........................................300

SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................339

Side Airbags.....................................................39
Sitting in the Correct Position...................93
Snow Chains

T
Technical Specifications

See: Using Snow Chains..................................251

Special Notices.................................................11
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance..............................................445

See: Capacities and Specifications............265

The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)........................182

3.2L, 3.5L and 3.7L Engines............................445
Exceptions............................................................447

Speed Control
See: Cruise Control............................................146

Speed Limiter................................................148
Engine Speed Limiter........................................148
Vehicle Speed Limiter - Fixed........................148

Stability Control............................................140
Principle of Operation......................................140

Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch...........................................104

462

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Index
Tire Care..........................................................234

Trip Computer..................................................81

Glossary of Tire Terminology.........................235
Inflating the Tires...............................................243
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grades...............................................................234
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall............................................................236
Inspecting the Tires and Wheel Valve
Stems................................................................245
Location of the Tire Label...............................243
Tire Age.................................................................246
Tire and Wheel Alignment.............................249
Tire Damage........................................................246
Tire Pressure Monitoring System................248
Tire Replacement Requirements.................247
Tire Rotation........................................................249
Tire Safety Practices........................................248
Tire Wear...............................................................246
United States Department of
Transportation Tire Quality
Grades...............................................................234

All Values..................................................................81
Average Fuel Consumption...............................81
Distance to Empty................................................81
Outside Air Temperature....................................81
Resetting the Trip Computer............................81
Trip Odometer.......................................................82
Trip Timer................................................................82

U
Under Hood Overview - 3.2L Power
Stroke Diesel..............................................203
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L....................201
Under Hood Overview - 3.7L...................202
USB Port..........................................................297
Using Cruise Control...................................146
Switching Cruise Control Off..........................147
Switching Cruise Control On..........................146

Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................50

Tire Pressure Monitoring System............251

Vehicles With Ford-Approved Aftermarket
Remote Start Systems.................................50
Vehicles With Non-Ford-Approved
Aftermarket Remote Start
Systems..............................................................50

Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.......................................252
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset
Procedure........................................................254
Understanding the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System .............................................................253

Using Snow Chains......................................251
Using Stability Control.................................141

Tires

AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™
(RSC®)...............................................................141

See: Wheels and Tires......................................233

Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player............................................................329

Towing a Trailer.............................................160
Load Placement.................................................160

Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels...........................................................170

Accessing Your Play Menu.............................334
Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the
USB Port...........................................................329
Media Menu Features.......................................333
Media Voice Commands..................................331
System Settings.................................................336
What's Playing?.................................................330

Emergency Towing.............................................170
Recreational Vehicle Towing .........................170

Towing..............................................................160
Traction Control............................................138
Principle of Operation.......................................138

Trailer Sway Control.....................................161
Transmission Code Designation..............271
Transmission..................................................132
Transmission
See: Transmission...............................................132

Transporting the Vehicle...........................169

463

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Index

Using SYNC™ With Your Phone...........304
Accessing Features Through the Phone
Menu...................................................................310
Accessing Your Phone Settings.....................314
Making a Call......................................................309
Pairing a Cell Phone for the First
Time..................................................................305
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones.................306
Phone Options during an Active Call........309
Receiving Calls...................................................309
System Settings..................................................316
Text Messaging....................................................312

Warning Lamps and Indicators.................74
Anti-Lock Brake System.....................................74
Battery......................................................................74
Brake System.........................................................74
Diesel Warning Lamps........................................74
Direction Indicator................................................75
Door Ajar..................................................................75
Engine Coolant Temperature...........................75
Engine Warning Lamps......................................75
Front Airbag............................................................75
High Beam...............................................................75
Lane Departure......................................................75
Low Fuel Level.......................................................76
Low Tire Pressure Warning...............................76
Message Center Warning..................................76
Oil Pressure.............................................................76
Park Lamp...............................................................76
Safety Belt Minder................................................76
Stability Control....................................................76
Transmission Tow/Haul.....................................76

Using Traction Control................................138
Using Voice Recognition...........................302
Initiating a Voice Session................................302
System Interaction and Feedback..............303

Using Winter Tires.......................................250
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only).........................182

V
Vehicle Care....................................................227
Vehicle Certification Label.......................270
Vehicle Identification Number................270
Vehicle Storage..............................................231

Washer Fluid Check.....................................210
Washers

Battery....................................................................232
Body.........................................................................231
Brakes.....................................................................232
Cooling system....................................................231
Engine......................................................................231
Fuel system...........................................................231
General...................................................................231
Miscellaneous.....................................................232
Removing Vehicle From Storage..................232
Tires.........................................................................232

Waxing.............................................................228
Wheel Nuts

See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................227
See: Wipers and Washers.................................63

See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................256

Wheels and Tires.........................................233
General Information..........................................233

Windows and Mirrors...................................69
Windshield Washers.....................................64
Windshield Wipers.........................................63
Intermittent Wipe.................................................63

Winter Tires

Ventilation

See: Using Winter Tires...................................250

See: Climate Control..........................................88

Wipers and Washers.....................................63

Vents
See: Air Vents........................................................88

VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number............270

Voice Control - Vehicles With:
Touchscreen Display...................................61
MyFord Touch® Controls..................................62

Voice Control - Vehicles Without:
Touchscreen Display...................................61

464

Transit (TTH) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2014, Third Printing

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Author                          : Unknown
Create Date                     : 2014:09:15 15:16:19Z
Modify Date                     : 2014:09:26 09:23:32-04:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Untitled
Creator                         : Unknown
Producer                        : XEP 4.16 build 20090723
Trapped                         : False
Creator Tool                    : Unknown
Metadata Date                   : 2014:09:26 09:23:32-04:00
Document ID                     : uuid:52957054-82ca-44b8-a842-ac8335940d16
Instance ID                     : uuid:7a25bf9c-3bec-4b4b-85bd-eb0e89de8beb
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 467

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Ford 2015 Transit Owners Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation